AmapiPro7US

Reference manual

Trademark & Copyright Notice

Program copyright 2006, e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. All rights reserved. e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier are trademarks and Amapi, Amapi Pro, Shade designer LE, Shade standard and Shade professional are registered trademarks of e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the properties of their respective owners.“Macintosh” is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. “Windows” is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. “Pentium” is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. All other product names mentioned in the manual and other documentation are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Registered and unregistered trademarks used herein are the exclusive property of their respective owners. e frontier, Inc. makes no claim to any such marks, nor willingly or knowingly misused or misapplied such marks.This manual as well as the software described herein is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. Program copyright 2006 e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc., including the look and feel of the product. Amapi Pro User Guide copyright 2006 by e frontier America, Inc. and e frontier, Inc. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means without prior written permission of e frontier America, Inc. or e frontier, Inc.

5615 Scotts Valley DriveSuite 210Scotts Valley, CA 95066, USA

Phone; 831.480.2000Fax: 831.480.2010

www.e-frontier.com

Contribution

The Amapi Pro documentation was written by Sylvie GateuilThe Amapi Pro documentation add-on was written by Thomas Roussel and Pascal Doux

The translation has been made by Blaise Zapparata, Laurent Billy and Pascal Doux.

Amapi Pro development team:

Pascal Doux, Xavier Durand, Mickael Gasrel, Maxime Rouca, Thomas Roussel.

Thanks to those who have participated to the Amapi Pro development:

Laurent Billy, Emmanuel Rémia, Thierry Duvignac, Olivier Gardinetti, Fabrice Sadaune.

Thanks

This manual would not have existed without the help and support of Philip Staiger and Blaise Zapparata.

We would like to express our gratitude for the active involvement that Pierre Bretagnolle andRichard Enjalbert gave us in the formal and functional specifications of the program and for the graphical

user interface graphic design.Pierre and Richard took part in the program validation phase and the design of the 3D objects supplied

with Amapi Pro.

Many thanks to Emmanuel Rémia who created the model for the cover.

Many thanks to Valérie Berth, Lori Izabelle and Matthew Schultzfor the validation of the English translation of this manual.

Thanks also to all the beta-testers who helped us enthusiastically during the program validation phase and particularly to Olivier Drion!

Table of Contents

Introduction

Ch 1 Welcome..............................................................................................................................3

Ch 2 How to use the Reference Manual? ..................................................5

Ch 3 Installation........................................................................................................................7

PC..................................................................................................................................................7• Minimum system requirements ...................................................................................7• Recommended system requirements .......................................................................7• Installation .............................................................................................................................8

Macintosh .................................................................................................................................9• Minimum system requirements ...................................................................................9• Recommended system requirements .......................................................................9• Installation ............................................................................................................................9

i Amapi ProT M

Getting started

Ch 4 Quick Tour ...................................................................................................................... 13

Ergonomics............................................................................................................................. 13

Screen Layout....................................................................................................................... 18

Rooms........................................................................................................................................ 19

3D window, views and navigation ............................................................................ 20

Objects and 3D entities................................................................................................... 22

Selections ................................................................................................................................ 24

Working plane and ruler ................................................................................................. 24

Using tools............................................................................................................................... 26

Scene management .......................................................................................................... 27

Dynamic Geometry (DG)................................................................................................ 28

Entering values..................................................................................................................... 29

Modeling room tools palette......................................................................................... 29

Ch 5 Modeling tools description.......................................................................... 31

Toolkit ......................................................................................................................................... 32

Construction palette .......................................................................................................... 33

Modeling palette .................................................................................................................. 34

Assembly Palette ................................................................................................................ 35

Ch 6 Tutorials.............................................................................................................................. 37

A sphere, a 3D tube and a parallelepiped........................................................... 38

Creating an ashtray ........................................................................................................... 50

Creating a bottle .................................................................................................................. 59

Modeling a mouse.............................................................................................................. 68

Rooms common principles

Ch 7 The Rooms, Palettes and Tools............................................................. 77

The Rooms.............................................................................................................................. 77

The Tools palettes.............................................................................................................. 78• Three Tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit” .............................................................. 78

Reference Manualii

• Two interfaces ....................................................................................................................79

Using tools ...............................................................................................................................80

Ch 8 The tools options and accessories ...................................................83

The tool options ....................................................................................................................84• What is a tool option? ......................................................................................................84• Selecting an option ...........................................................................................................85

Tool accessories ..................................................................................................................85

Ch 9 The graphic environment...............................................................................87

The orthonormal base ......................................................................................................88• The origin ..............................................................................................................................88• The gradations ...................................................................................................................88• The constraints ...................................................................................................................88• The coordinates .................................................................................................................89

The working plane...............................................................................................................89

The orthogonal planes .....................................................................................................90

Ch 10 The objects ......................................................................................................................91

The Types of objects.........................................................................................................91• Curves ....................................................................................................................................91• Surfaces / Volumes ...........................................................................................................92

Object names.........................................................................................................................92• Default name .......................................................................................................................92• Changing the object name ............................................................................................92

Open / closed objects .......................................................................................................94

Entity............................................................................................................................................94

Displaying the objects.......................................................................................................95

Polygonal or NURBS Models.......................................................................................96• Change the construction mode ...................................................................................96• The Polyhedral models ....................................................................................................97• The NURBS models..........................................................................................................98

The objects with a grid-structure (Quad mesh) ................................................106

The clones ...............................................................................................................................107

Ch 11 Dynamic Geometry (DG) .................................................................................109

The concept ............................................................................................................................109

The DG Tree...........................................................................................................................111• The shapes hierarchy ......................................................................................................111• The notion of path and current shape ......................................................................112

iii Amapi ProT M

Manipulating DG.................................................................................................................. 115• The DG palette .................................................................................................................. 115• Browsing the palette ........................................................................................................ 116• Selecting the working level ........................................................................................... 116• Renaming a shape ........................................................................................................... 116• Showing/Hiding a level ................................................................................................... 117• Collapsing the DG ............................................................................................................ 118• Editing a DG level .............................................................................................................. 123• Deleting the highest DG level ...................................................................................... 125• Displaying the result in interactive / delayed mode ............................................. 125• The different levels of completion ............................................................................... 126• Behavior of the tools regarding the DG ................................................................... 128

Ch 12 The Navigation............................................................................................................ 135

The Navigation Palette .................................................................................................... 136• Viewpoint ............................................................................................................................... 137• View All ................................................................................................................................. 139• View Detail ........................................................................................................................... 140• Zoom In / Out ..................................................................................................................... 140• Pan the scene .................................................................................................................... 141• Rotate around the scene ............................................................................................... 141

The keyboard navigation................................................................................................ 142• Make a direct viewpoint change ................................................................................. 142• Progressive viewpoint tuning ........................................................................................ 143

Ch 13 Selection............................................................................................................................. 147

The concept of selection ................................................................................................ 147

The selection accessories............................................................................................. 148• The selectable entities..................................................................................................... 149• The selection methods .................................................................................................... 150• Default selection mode ................................................................................................... 157

Memo-Select.......................................................................................................................... 158

The selection cursors ....................................................................................................... 159

Ch 14 The Parameters.......................................................................................................... 161

To check the parameters ............................................................................................... 161

Editing the parameters .................................................................................................... 162• From the graphic workspace ....................................................................................... 162• In the parameter palette ................................................................................................. 163

Reference Manualiv

Ch 15 The Control panel ....................................................................................................167

Manage the optional palettes display .....................................................................168

Working in the view plane..............................................................................................169

Scene / orthonormal base toggling ..........................................................................171• Restore the conventional orthonormal base ...........................................................172• Toggle the orthonormal base ........................................................................................172• Toggle the scene and the orthonormal base ..........................................................172

Orthonormal base origin .................................................................................................173

Snapping...................................................................................................................................174

Alignment Guides ................................................................................................................175

Perspective..............................................................................................................................176

Simplified display ...............................................................................................................177

Simple-view / Multi-view..................................................................................................178

Enable/Disable the backface display ......................................................................179

Objects display......................................................................................................................180• The display modes ...........................................................................................................180• Transparency of the selected object .........................................................................181

Polygonal / NURBS............................................................................................................182

Working with or without Dynamic Geometry......................................................183

Hide, Show ..............................................................................................................................184• Hide .........................................................................................................................................184• Show .......................................................................................................................................184

Isolate .........................................................................................................................................185

Group, Ungroup....................................................................................................................186• Group .....................................................................................................................................186• Ungroup ................................................................................................................................186

Information...............................................................................................................................187• Information ...........................................................................................................................187• Functions ..............................................................................................................................188• Dynamic Geometry tree...................................................................................................189

Ch 16 The constraints...........................................................................................................191

Snapping...................................................................................................................................192• Snapping on ruler gradation .........................................................................................192• Snapping on particular points ......................................................................................192

Axis toggling ...........................................................................................................................193

Advanced constraints .......................................................................................................194

Alignment guides .................................................................................................................196

v Amapi ProT M

Ch 17 Scene management .............................................................................................. 197

The Layers .............................................................................................................................. 198• Select the receiving layer .............................................................................................. 199• Add a layer .......................................................................................................................... 199• Delete a layer of its contents ....................................................................................... 199• Merge two layers .............................................................................................................. 199• Show / Hide a layer .......................................................................................................... 199• Lock / Unlock a layer ....................................................................................................... 200• Move one object to another layer .............................................................................. 200

The Scene graph................................................................................................................. 201• Browse the scene graph ................................................................................................ 201• Selection using the scene graph ................................................................................ 202• Operations on the scene graph selection ............................................................... 202• Change the group, layer or material ......................................................................... 204

Ch 18 The Help.............................................................................................................................. 205

The assistant palette......................................................................................................... 206

The contextual help ........................................................................................................... 207

The tooltips.............................................................................................................................. 208

The cursor................................................................................................................................ 208

Ch 19 The Menus........................................................................................................................ 209

File................................................................................................................................................ 210• Opening/ Closing .............................................................................................................. 210• Saving files .......................................................................................................................... 211• Import-Export ...................................................................................................................... 212• Printing .................................................................................................................................. 212• Opening recent files ......................................................................................................... 213• Leaving the program ....................................................................................................... 213

Edit ............................................................................................................................................... 214• Basic commands .............................................................................................................. 214• Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 215• Deletion ................................................................................................................................. 216• Selection ............................................................................................................................... 216• The editing windows ........................................................................................................ 216

Scene.......................................................................................................................................... 218• Graphic display .................................................................................................................. 218• The objects .......................................................................................................................... 219• Rulers, working plane ..................................................................................................... 220• Constraints .......................................................................................................................... 221• Construction mode ........................................................................................................... 222

Reference Manualvi

Views...........................................................................................................................................223

Tools ............................................................................................................................................225• Advanced tools ...................................................................................................................225• Peripherals ..........................................................................................................................226

Window ......................................................................................................................................227

Rooms ........................................................................................................................................228

Ch 20 Import / Export.............................................................................................................229

Import ..........................................................................................................................................229

Export..........................................................................................................................................231

Ch 21 3D Digitizing ...................................................................................................................233

MicroScribe .............................................................................................................................233

Calibration ................................................................................................................................234

The tools which allow you to digitize.......................................................................234

AutoPlot Mode and Scaling factor ............................................................................235

Modeling room

Ch 22 Basic toolkit ..................................................................................................................241

Move ............................................................................................................................................242• The move tool .....................................................................................................................242• Moving when no tool is selected..................................................................................243• Additional information ......................................................................................................243

Rotate .........................................................................................................................................244• Methods of rotation ...........................................................................................................244• Rotation axis orientation .................................................................................................245• Rotation reference point repositioning .....................................................................245• Global / Local options ......................................................................................................246• Tuning the gradation accuracy ....................................................................................246• Magnetizing the rotation circle gradations ..............................................................246• Additional information ......................................................................................................247

Scale............................................................................................................................................248• Center / base reference point........................................................................................249• Customizing the reference point .................................................................................249• The constraints....................................................................................................................250• Global / Local options ......................................................................................................250

vii Amapi ProT M

• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 251

Stretch ...................................................................................................................................... 252• The selection ...................................................................................................................... 252• Movement modes options .............................................................................................. 253• Stretch NURBS objects .................................................................................................. 254• Stretch an object having a Deformer control box ................................................ 255• Control of the depth of a cut ......................................................................................... 255• Editing the tangents of the NURBS curves ............................................................ 255• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 256

Ch 23 Construction Palette............................................................................................ 257

Surface and volume primitives ................................................................................... 258• Cube........................................................................................................................................ 260• Sphere .................................................................................................................................... 263• Cone........................................................................................................................................ 266• Cylinder .................................................................................................................................. 267• Tetrahedron.......................................................................................................................... 268• Octahedron .......................................................................................................................... 268• Icosahedron ........................................................................................................................ 268• Dodecahedron..................................................................................................................... 269• Height-Fields........................................................................................................................ 272• Grid .......................................................................................................................................... 273• Text .......................................................................................................................................... 274

Line drawing........................................................................................................................... 277• Rectangle / Square ........................................................................................................... 279• Circle ....................................................................................................................................... 281• Arc ............................................................................................................................................ 284• Polyline................................................................................................................................... 286• Interpolated curve.............................................................................................................. 289• Curve....................................................................................................................................... 292• Helix......................................................................................................................................... 295• Symmetry .............................................................................................................................. 298• Reverse curve points ...................................................................................................... 299

Extract Lines .......................................................................................................................... 300• Creation methods ............................................................................................................. 300• Generation of NURBS or Polygonal lines .............................................................. 302• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 303

Extract Facets ....................................................................................................................... 304• Creation methods ............................................................................................................. 304• NURBS or Polyhedral facets generation ................................................................ 306• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 306

Sweep ........................................................................................................................................ 307

Reference Manualviii

• Section and Profile ...........................................................................................................308• Sweeping with the profile already drawn ................................................................311• Freehand sweeping ........................................................................................................314• Progressive scaling of the sections ...........................................................................317• Close the openings ...........................................................................................................318• Simplified display ...............................................................................................................318• Display the graduated axis ............................................................................................318• Sweep by Block .................................................................................................................318• Sweeping from an edge of a NURBS surface ......................................................319• Additional information ......................................................................................................320

Double-Sweep.......................................................................................................................321• Use ..........................................................................................................................................322• Base orientation options .................................................................................................322• Additional information ......................................................................................................323

Ruled Surface ........................................................................................................................324• Creating “Ruled Surface” ...............................................................................................325• Tangential connection .....................................................................................................326• Closing the surface on itself .........................................................................................330• Curve Inversion ..................................................................................................................330• Align the first border points ...........................................................................................330• Additional information ......................................................................................................330

Coons Surface.......................................................................................................................331• Surface creation .................................................................................................................332• Tangential connection .....................................................................................................333• Additional information ......................................................................................................333

Gordon surface .....................................................................................................................334• Surface creation .................................................................................................................334• Additional information .......................................................................................................335

Manifold .....................................................................................................................................336

Ch 24 Modeling palette........................................................................................................339

Smooth.......................................................................................................................................340• Smoothing options .............................................................................................................341• Tension control ...................................................................................................................343• Break control .......................................................................................................................344• Partial smoothing ...............................................................................................................345• Making convex surfaces .................................................................................................345• Additional information ......................................................................................................346

Chamfer.....................................................................................................................................347• Chamfer a volume ............................................................................................................347• Chamfer a polygonal line ...............................................................................................348• Radius Global setting ......................................................................................................348

ix Amapi ProT M

• Radius local setting on polyhedral objects ............................................................. 349• Range global setting on polyhedral objects ........................................................... 349• Shape of the chamfer for NURBS edges ............................................................... 350• Apply to all ........................................................................................................................... 350• Additional Information ..................................................................................................... 350

Thickness/Offset.................................................................................................................. 351• “Thickness/Offset” options ............................................................................................ 351• Changing the position of the thickness .................................................................... 352• Surface options .................................................................................................................. 353• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 353

Cut ................................................................................................................................................ 354• Cutting methods ................................................................................................................. 355• Additional information....................................................................................................... 363

Delete ......................................................................................................................................... 364• The current selection is a curve................................................................................... 365• The current selection is a surface............................................................................... 366• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 366

Tesselate.................................................................................................................................. 367• Tesselate a polygonal volume or surface ............................................................... 367• Tesselate a polygonal curve ........................................................................................ 369• Tesselate a NURBS object ............................................................................................ 370

Deform ....................................................................................................................................... 374• The options........................................................................................................................... 375• The meshed control box editing accessories ....................................................... 376• Action orientation options .............................................................................................. 377• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 378

Bend ............................................................................................................................................ 379• Bending along an existing profile ............................................................................... 379• Bending along a profile drawn with the tool ........................................................... 379• Additional information .................................................................................................... 380

Mold............................................................................................................................................. 382• Selection to pull ................................................................................................................. 382• Influence area .................................................................................................................... 383• Inertia ...................................................................................................................................... 384• Additional information ..................................................................................................... 384

Bump/Soften .......................................................................................................................... 385• Bump....................................................................................................................................... 385• Soften-Stress “Relax” method ...................................................................................... 385• Soften-Stress “Mid-mid” method ................................................................................. 385

Ch 25 Assembly palette ..................................................................................................... 387

Duplicate................................................................................................................................... 388

Reference Manualx

• The methods .......................................................................................................................388• Additional information ......................................................................................................397

Symmetry .................................................................................................................................398• Symmetry from an orthogonal plane .........................................................................398• From an orthogonal plane passing by a point to be selected .........................398• Clone the generated objects ........................................................................................399• Additional information ......................................................................................................399

Close ...........................................................................................................................................400• Close a polygonal surface .............................................................................................400• Edit the polylines closings .............................................................................................400• Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure object ...........................................401• Additional information ....................................................................................................402

Weld.............................................................................................................................................403• The options .........................................................................................................................403• Weld objects .........................................................................................................................403• Weld points onto an object .............................................................................................403• Weld points close to each other ...................................................................................403• Weld points of distant objects .......................................................................................404• Point selection when using weld points ...................................................................404• Weld NURBS objects ......................................................................................................404• Additional information ......................................................................................................405

Snap/Align................................................................................................................................406• Use ..........................................................................................................................................406• Align ........................................................................................................................................406• Some illustrated examples ............................................................................................407• Additional information ......................................................................................................407

Lay on .........................................................................................................................................408

Unfold..........................................................................................................................................409• Select the cutting edges .................................................................................................410• Select the starting facet ..................................................................................................411• Unfold .....................................................................................................................................412• Additional Information .....................................................................................................412

Wrap ............................................................................................................................................413• Options ..................................................................................................................................413• Spread management .......................................................................................................414• The Threshold accessory ..............................................................................................414• Additional information ......................................................................................................414

Measurements.......................................................................................................................415• The measurement tools...................................................................................................416• The dimensions-manipulating accessories ............................................................418• Additional information ......................................................................................................419

Decimate...................................................................................................................................420

xi Amapi ProT M

Rendering Room

Ch 26 Previewing and rendering............................................................................. 425

The rendering commands ............................................................................................. 426

Additional functions ........................................................................................................... 426

Ch 27 Materials............................................................................................................................ 427

Material catalog.................................................................................................................... 428• Open a directory ................................................................................................................ 429• Browsing the pages of the catalog ............................................................................ 429• Deleting a file from the catalog ................................................................................... 429• Applying a material .......................................................................................................... 430• Saving a new material in the catalog ....................................................................... 430• Organizing the catalog ................................................................................................... 430• Managing the favorites directory ................................................................................ 431

Material editor........................................................................................................................ 432• The editable material ....................................................................................................... 432• Editing..................................................................................................................................... 433

Ch 28 Lighting................................................................................................................................ 435

The different light sources............................................................................................. 436• Sun ......................................................................................................................................... 436• Bulb ........................................................................................................................................ 436• Spot ........................................................................................................................................ 436

Create a light source......................................................................................................... 436

Select a light source.......................................................................................................... 437

Set a light source ................................................................................................................ 437• Diffuse color ........................................................................................................................ 437• Shadow ................................................................................................................................. 437• Cut-off .................................................................................................................................... 438• Attenuation (dimming) .................................................................................................... 438• Repositioning ...................................................................................................................... 438• Orientation ........................................................................................................................... 438

Delete a light source ......................................................................................................... 438

Ch 29 Rendering parameters....................................................................................... 439

Anti-aliasing ............................................................................................................................ 439

Shadows................................................................................................................................... 439

Background............................................................................................................................. 439

Reference Manualxii

Environment............................................................................................................................440

Fog................................................................................................................................................440

Image format ..........................................................................................................................440

Catalog room

Ch 30 The Catalog .....................................................................................................................443

Open a directory...................................................................................................................444

Browsing the pages of the catalog ...........................................................................444

Edit the information of a file ..........................................................................................445

Deleting a file from the catalog ...................................................................................445

Deleting the entire scene................................................................................................445

Importing a file from the catalog into the scene ...............................................446

Saving the scene in the catalog .................................................................................446

Organizing the catalog .....................................................................................................446

Managing the favorites directory ...............................................................................447

Rebuilding the catalog......................................................................................................448

Import ..........................................................................................................................................448

Export..........................................................................................................................................448

Preferences

Ch 31 Preferences....................................................................................................................451

Preferences editor...............................................................................................................451• User interface.......................................................................................................................452• Graphic environment.........................................................................................................459• Scene display.......................................................................................................................465• Printing preferences ..........................................................................................................474• Import / Export ....................................................................................................................474• Units ........................................................................................................................................474• NURBS preferences..........................................................................................................476

Shortcuts Editor ....................................................................................................................478

xiii Amapi ProT M

Appendix

Ch 32 Glossary.............................................................................................................................. 481

Ch 33 Index........................................................................................................................................ 489

Reference Manualxiv

Introduction

1 Welcome

Amapi Pro is the creative tool par excellence for the design and realization of models and3D scenes for Product Design, Architecture and the creation of advanced 3D models. Inte-grating all the technologies of NURBS surface modeling, complete with an interface entirelydedicated to creation yet preserving the legendary creativity of the Amapi product,Amapi Pro is the first software package that offers such a high level of functionality, makingit a complete and unique tool in its category. Amapi Pro is a complete modeler at the leading edge of current performances, offeringadvanced functions such as the construction and editing of NURBS surfaces and volumes(multiple profiles, constrained volumes, cutting, boolean operators, surface joints, chamfers,thicknesses, etc.), and a full tools palette for polygonal modeling.

The second variation in the New Generation of the Amapi products, Amapi Pro is based onthe concepts and structures already implemented in Amapi Designer. Its resolutely creativeapproach and exceptional ergonomics give it an unequalled short training time and flexibil-ity of use. The perfect tool for Creative Designers, it is well suited for free-form research andideal for the precise execution and the finalization of projects.

All modeling can be realized with NURBS surfaces, the models created with Amapi Pro areprecise and directly manufacturable. Amapi Pro communicates easily with all CAD/CAMtools, through native imports/exports such as DWG (AutoCAD), IGES and STL. All other standard interchange formats are also supported: DXF, OBJ, VRML, EPS, etc.You will be able to communicate directly with other tools for the creation of images and 3Danimations, such as Shade, as well as with all the other high-level rendering and animationsoftware.

3 Amapi ProT M

Previous Amapi users will reach an unequalled working capacity with Amapi Pro.What is more, all your models can now be flawlessly exported to dedicated manufacturingsolutions.If you are new to Amapi Pro, this powerful modeling product will let you discover how tocreate exact high-end models while remaining highly intuitive and flexible, in short, a genu-ine tool for creation.

For all of the above reasons, you can be pleased with your choice and Amapi Pro wishes youa warm welcome into the world of creative modeling in 3 Dimensions.

Do not forget to register, by filling out and sending the Registration card included with thismanual, or by filling out our on-line registration form at the http://www.e-frontier.com/go/support/registration ‘Registration’ section.

Lastly, do not hesitate to contact us for any suggestions you may have or to forward usimages of your achievements!

Reference Manual4

2 How to use the Reference Manual?

It will not take you more than a few hours of training to become acquainted with the philos-ophy of this new software and only a few days for you to become a proficient user.

Initially, it is recommended to consult the first chapters of the manual for a quick and effi-cient start. You will find:

• The chapter #3 gives you detailed information to install and start the program (seedetails on page 7).

• In chapter #4, an Amapi Pro quicktour is designed for a better understanding of thespirit and the power of the software (see details on page 13).

• The chapter #5 presents a table summarizing the different modeling tools (see detailson page 31).

• The chapter #6 offers several exercises designed for progressive learning (see details onpage 37).

Once used to the program, you will be able to create your own models.

The following chapters will give you full details about each program function. The sequen-tial reading of this manual will appear superfluous if the suggested training has beenrespected. Indeed, you will already know what you can do with Amapi Designer and willonly have to refer to the reference manual corresponding to what you are trying to do.

5 Amapi ProT M

Each note is symbolized by a pictograph which allows you to quickly understand the kind ofinformation.

This documentation refers to the PC keyboard only. Macintosh users need to replace each instance of “Control” (Ctrl) with “Command”.

Additional information

Tips and tricks

Warning note

Restrictions

Note

Reminder

Reference Manual6

3 Installation

3.1 PCAmapi Pro works on any PC-compatible computer with at least the following configuration:

3.1.1 Minimum system requirements• Pentium III or Celeron 500 MHz or latest computer with a minimum of 128 MB RAM.• Microsoft Windows 98, ME, 2000 or XP.• 65 MB hard drive space.• 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.• CD-ROM drive.

3.1.2 Recommended system requirements• Pentium III 1 GHz or latest computer with a minimum of 256 MB RAM (more

recommended).• Microsoft Windows XP.• 65 MB hard drive space. • 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.• CD-ROM drive.

7 Amapi ProT M

3.1.3 InstallationWhen inserting the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into any PC running Windows, an Autorunwindow automatically appears. You can choose to install your Amapi Pro software or toexplore the other files on the CD-ROM.Alternatively, you can install Amapi Pro without using Autorun. Choose Start menu >Control Panels. Then double-click Add/Remove Programs from the Control Panel andfollow the instructions.

To install Amapi Pro:

1) Start Windows.

2) No other application should be running during installation.

3) Insert the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive and click the Install button.Windows locates the Amapi Pro installation program on the CD-ROM

4) Follow the instructions on the screen. Click Next to confirm each option and to move tothe next screen.You have the option to run a Typical, Compact, or Custom installation. Typical willinstall your software in a standard configuration appropriate for most users. Compactinstalls a minimum configuration.Choose Custom if you want to select individual files for installation. The installer proposes an installation directory and Program Folder.

5) Once you’ve made these selections you’ll be able to confirm your installation settings.Then click Start to install.

6) Once Amapi Pro has finished installing, click Finish.Follow the instructions on screen for electronic registration.

Reference Manual8

3.2 MacintoshAmapi Pro works on any Power Macintosh with at least the following configuration.

3.2.1 Minimum system requirements• G3 or G4 400 MHz or compatible model running system X.

Microscribe support does not allow the use of the program with OS 9.2.• 128 Mb of Physical RAM. • 65 MB hard drive space. • 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.• CD-ROM drive.• To use your Amapi Pro software with Type, you must have TrueType™ fonts.

3.2.2 Recommended system requirements• G4 1-GHz or compatible model running system X.• 256 Mb (or more) of Physical RAM. • 65 MB hard drive space. • 3D Graphics Accelerator card supporting OpenGL.• CD-ROM drive.• To use Amapi Pro with Type, you must have TrueType™ fonts.

3.2.3 Installation1) Turn off any virus protection and compression programs and close any other applications

currently open.

2) Insert the Amapi Pro CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

3) Double-click the Installer icon from the CD-ROM and follow the instructions on thescreen. The installer gives you the option of performing an Easy or Custom installation.Easy Install will install your software in a standard configuration appropriate for mostusers. Choose Custom if you want to select individual files for installation.

4) Choose the Install Location for the Amapi Pro folder and click Install.

5) Once Amapi Pro has finished installing, click Quit to quit the Installer.

6) Follow the instructions on the screen for electronic registration.

This documentation refers to the PC keyboard only. Macintosh users must read “Command” each time “Control” (Ctrl) is called upon.

9 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual10

Getting started

4 Quick Tour

4.1 ErgonomicsAmapi Pro is a 3D NURBS and POLYHEDRAL modeling package. This tool allows you todraw, build, and assemble scenes in 3 dimensions.

The ergonomics of Amapi Designer have been designed and tuned to give you the bestcomfort and productivity while working on your projects.

The understanding of volumes in space, the manipulation of 3D graphic objects, the toolsoptions and accessory accessibility have been designed to reduce as much as possible thenumber of manipulations and to maintain the consistency of the application.

You, undoubtedly, are accustomed to using many applications other than Amapi Pro andyou acquire specific ways of using these applications: window positions, keyboardshortcuts, and user interface colors. To allow you to integrate Amapi Pro into your working environment without having tochange your practices, we offer you an completely configurable environment. You can easily choose the position of the palettes, the color of each element, the function ofa key, all the way through the application’s operating mode. But, if you so desire, you canalso use Amapi Pro in the traditional Amapi mode - the one that has created the product’sreputation since its very first version.: an immersive framework where the tools paletteschange by means of sweeping the cursor out of edge of the principal window and back.

The configurations of the interfaces are accessible in the Amapi Pro preferences. You canalso use interface themes presets such as the "Pro" theme selected with first startup or the"With color gradient" theme which is Amapi Designer’s default theme or the "Immersive"theme which again uses specifics from the previous versions of Amapi.

These themes represent sets of preset preferences. You can easily modify the adjustments bychanging your desired preferences.

13 Amapi ProT M

(See “Preferences editor” on page 451).

The Pro theme proposes aninterface in which all thetools are visible in fixedpalettes located on the righthand side of the screen(“tool box” interface). Thepalettes on the left hand sidecan be hidden or moved.The colors were studied tocohabit as well as possiblewith other applications.

The Classic theme placesthe 3D window in the centerof a fixed frame, with thegraphic accesses to thefunctions and the workingtools. This theme is closerto interfaces that you willfind in other creativegraphic software. This inter-face remains of the “toolbox” type.

Pro interface theme

Classic interface theme

Reference Manual14

The Gradient theme issimilar to the Classic themebut displays the icons on acolor gradient background.

The Immersive themegives a maximum of spaceto the working window. Thebackground is black bydefault, but you will beable, at any moment tochange its color. All the pal-ettes are floating.

The interface remains of the“tool box” type.

Gradient interface theme

Immersive interface theme

15 Amapi ProT M

The Classic with tools pal-ettes theme is the themewhich is closest to the well-known and appreciated-byformer-users interface.

Like the “Immersive”theme, this theme gives amaximum of space to theworking window but dis-plays only one tools paletteat once (“tool box” inter-face). Switching from onepalette to another is done by“sweeping” the cursor outto the right hand side of thewindow and back.(See “Two interfaces” onpage 79).

The various possible presentations for the tools and accessories make it possible to adaptthe use of Amapi Pro to your practices. For example, Amapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to display the tools of themodeling room :With the “tool box” type interface, you will easily find the tool that you need in one of thefour tools palettes but you will need make sure to click on the correct icon because of theirsmall size. With the “tools palette” type interface, the tool icons are larger and only one of the threepalettes is displayed (the fourth, corresponding to the basic toolkit, is always visible). Youwill pick up tools without losing sight of your 3D models. This mode is particularlyappropriate to users working with matter as a sculptor would.

You will quickly be able to customize your own working environment by moving or closingthe different panels.

For instance, the help windows or the viewing tools are generally used only during thelearning steps. When beginning, you will make the Viewing manipulations by using thenavigation palette. Then, you will prefer to use shortcuts (the keyboard arrow keys andnumber pad keys).

Classic with tools palettes interface theme

Reference Manual16

The keyboard is an essential component that gives direct access to the most commonly usedfunctions. It helps to save time and allows you to work more efficiently.Amapi Pro uses (as much as possible) the most accessible keys: “Space bar”, “Escape”,“Enter”, “+/-”, arrow keys, numerical pad, “Shift”, “Control”, “Alt”. Keyboard shortcuts canbe set for most tools to accelerate their launching when they are often used. You areprobably already familiar with other software products that have standard shortcuts oncommon features like Cut, Paste, Undo and Open. Amapi Pro is set up by default to acceptthese standard shortcuts.

Finally, you are also able towork in single view or inmulti-view mode.

Immersive theme with 4 views

17 Amapi ProT M

4.2 Screen Layout

We have seen that Amapi Pro proposes several different interface themes corresponding todifferent user profiles. Testing and adopting one of them will save you invaluable timethrough using the interface the most suited to your work. It will always be possible to manually modify all the preferences by means of thepreferences editor.

The 3D graphic workspace appears in a large window. It can be split into two, three or fourviews of the same scene. The different panels are located around this area.

The control panel is located under this graphic workspace. It contains some generic toolsand accessories that can be useful during the modeling steps. (see details on page 167). Thecontrol panel can be hidden to have a larger workspace area.

Menu bar Assistant palette Access to

Rooms

Options and Toolaccessories Optional

palettes

Control panel

Graphic workspace

Tools palettes

One view interface, default theme

Current tool icon

Reference Manual18

The tools palette window appears on the right-hand side of the screen. There are twopossible interfaces (See “The Tools palettes” on page 78).

On the left-hand side of the screen, a set of optional panels are displayed. There, you canfind the help panel, the viewing panel, Dynamic Geometry panel, the parameter panel andthe selection panel. A set of small icons located in the left-hand side of the control panelallow you to show or hide these panels.

If you have selected the Pro or immersive Interface theme, these panels are floating panels.They are displayed on top of the graphic workspace. If you have selected the Classic theme,these panels are located in a window on the left-hand side of the graphic workspace. Youcan choose to hide this window from the preference dialog in order to increase the size of thegraphic workspace (See “Preferences editor” on page 451).

When launching the application, the area located just above the graphic workspace. isempty. When a tool is being used, this area will contain the current tool options (on theright) and the current tool accessories (on the left) (see details on page 83).The user can, on request, choose to display these options with a floating, mobile andremovable palette (See “Preferences editor” on page 451).

The Room icons are located at the top right-hand corner of the screen.

As in many other applications, the menu bar is located on the top left-hand side of thescreen.

4.3 RoomsAmapi Pro splits the features into three rooms. This splitting helps toreduce the number of tool icons displayed and to organize your

working process.

Click on the room icon to enter the room:

The Modeling room allows you to build, model, and assemble your objects (See“Modeling room” on page 237).

The Rendering room contains the tools to set up your materials and to render objects(See “Rendering Room” on page 421).

The Catalog room is useful to organize your files and save objects (See “TheCatalog” on page 443).

All rooms are built to the same layout but some areas are not displayed in all rooms. Forinstance, some rooms have several tools palettes, but others have no tools palette at all.

19 Amapi ProT M

4.4 3D window, views and navigationThe graphic workspace displays the current scene. A scene is made up of objects created inthe same working space. Inside each view, the ground is symbolized by a grid. A smalltrihedron displays the current orientation. The grid and the trihedron are useful forlocalizing the objects in the 3D space. However, they can be turned off (See “The graphicenvironment” on page 87).

Two additional grids can be added tovisualize the main planes of the 3Dspace. On each plane, you can displayan image that can be used as a supportfor modeling.

The 3D space dimensions are set inthe preferences. The dimension, scalefactor and units can be selected there.

The 3D window can contain up to four views of the same scene. A control panel icon allowsyou to select one of the view layouts. When in multi-view mode, a view is activated byclicking on it. Every action takes place in the active view.

Building an object from an image projected onto the grid planes.

Single view 3 views 4 views

Reference Manual20

The navigation palette contains several icons allowingyou to manipulate the active view. Some predefined viewslock the navigation in the active view, allowing you tostay in the left view for instance. (See “The Navigation”on page 135)

Amapi Pro displays the objects in perspective projection by default. This type of projectionsimulates human sight. It is possible to switch to orthographic projection by clicking onone of the control panel icon. This type of projection does not deform objects far from thepoint of view. (See “Perspective” on page 176).

Even in perspective mode, the screen of yourcomputer does not give you the stereoscopicview our eyes give us. Thus it is more difficultto understand the object shape on the screenthan in the real life. To limit this drawback, itis very important to be able to «move» aroundthe objects at any time, even during thecreation steps or while holding a mousebutton for stretching a point on a surface.

To do that, Amapi Pro uses the keyboardarrow keys to move around the point of viewand the number pad keys to zoom in/out, etc.without stopping the action in progress.

For a better understanding of the objectshapes, moving from one singular viewpointto another is made in animation mode. Thisimproves the feeling of moving smoothlywhile viewing the object.

Amapi Pro allows you to record up to tencustom viewpoints. You can then choose tolook at the scene from these viewpoints. (See“The Navigation” on page 135)

If the “shift” key is held down when using the arrow keys, the viewpoint will be successively switched to each main viewpoint, in the direction indicated by the arrow.

. : Zoom out0: View All1: View Detail 2: Front view3: Zoom in4: Left view 5: Top view6: Right view 7: Viewpoint customizing 8: Rear view9: Bottom view

Use the right, left, up, and down arrow keys to turn around the scene.

To have a panoramic view of the scene, press and hold the Control key and press on an arrow key.

21 Amapi ProT M

4.5 Objects and 3D entitiesAmapi Pro is a 3D NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) and polygonal modeler. Thisimplies that according to the mode you working in or according to the tool you use, you willhandle NURBS types or polyhedral entities. By default, Amapi Pro works in NURBS mode,the mode best adapted to object design.While modeling in polyhedral mode or when importing 3D object files, you will manipulatebasic entities that do not exist in real objects: the points, edges, lines, and facets. Amapi Prois a surface modeler. Every object is made up of a set of facets. This set can be opened orclosed. Each facet defines a planar surface delimited by a set of edges, each edge having one3D point at each end.

Creating objects consists of creating points, lines and facets in the 3D space to define theoutlines of the final polyhedron.

It is also possible to create parametric surfaces called NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) and to assemble them to obtain exact surfaces useful for advanced design projects.NURBS are displayed as lines or surfaces, however their editable construction points are notlocated on the surface but are a kind of magnet that attract the resulting surface.

Object Facets Edges Points

Simple curve Simple Surface

Reference Manual22

Displaying 3D objects consists of selecting the combination of point, edge and facet entitiesto be visualized as well as the specific parameters allowing to obtain a more or less realisticvisual effect.

The object display mode can be changed at any timefrom the control panel. The wireframe mode allowsperfect manipulation of edges and points. The solidfacetted mode gives a more realistic aspect. Edges canbe added to this mode. Finally, the smoothed mode isthe mode that gives the most realistic effect. Switchingfrom one mode to another allows the user to model inwireframe mode and then to select the solid mode tosee the final result.

NURBS lines and surfaces are not displayed the sameway as polyhedral lines and surfaces. The points on NURBS lines are not displayed and theedges on surfaces are limited to singular edges.

(See “The objects” on page 91).

NURBS curveand its control shape

NURBS Surface and its control shape

The «Wireframe» mode

The «Lit Wireframe» mode

The «Flat Solid» mode

The «WireShade Flat Solid» mode

The «Smooth Solid» mode

The «WireShade Smooth Solid» mode

23 Amapi ProT M

4.6 SelectionsAmapi Pro allows you to precisely select the entitiesyou want to work on. The current selection mode letsyou work on points, edges, facets or objects. A set ofselection tools are available to make the selectionprocess easier. You can select entities one by one oryou can use the lasso or selection rectangle tool. Youcan select according to an angular criteria and extendthe selection to neighboring entities. The currentselection can be saved to be used again later. The Shiftand Alt keys are used to add and suppress entities to/from the current selection. Whenentities are selected, most tools restrict their action to that selection. You will then be able tomanipulate sub-selections of objects with tools like “Rotate” or “Stretch”.It is also possible to change the current selection from within a tool without leaving that tool.

(see details on page 147).

4.7 Working plane and rulerDuring most of the actions in the 3D space, you will see a plane made up of two ruler axistaken from the trihedron axis: X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue). Each plane represents one ofthe three orthogonal planes.These planes are used to simplify the 3D input operations. To enter 3D points, you usuallyhave a 2D device: the mouse. As setting three values with this type of device is impossible,it is better to limit the input to predefined planes. By default, modeling is made in one ofthese planes. (See “The graphic environment” on page 87).

Amapi Pro selects the orthogonal plane which is the most perpendicular to the current pointof view to be used as working plane.

Reference Manual24

While using a tool, you will be ableto change the working plane byturning around your model.

It is sometimes necessary to model ina plane that is different from theorthogonal planes. The control panelcontains an icon allowing to select anew working plane. (See “Scene /orthonormal base toggling” onpage 171).

Finally, it may be useful to model inthe projection plane of the currentview. Although this method is lessaccurate, it gives much versatility tosome complex positioning operations.(See “Working in the view plane” onpage 169).

The origin of the rulers can be setusing a control panel tool. (See“Orthonormal base origin” onpage 173).The ruler axis displayed in theworking plane allows you toaccurately align points and to set simple constraints. The ruler accuracy can be tuned usingthe +/- keys. It is also possible to control the snap to the ruler grid from the control panel.Finally the space bar allows you to constrain the mouse movements along the currentlydisplayed axis.

y

xz

y

x

z

working plane

working plane

25 Amapi ProT M

4.8 Using toolsTools are operators allowing you create, manipulate, assemble, objects but also to manageviews, import files,...etc. Although they are very different, they are all built to the samecommon architecture. A tool is made up of a sequence of operations called steps.

Each step requires setting up one or several parameters (3D position, angle,...) in theparameter palette or directly in the 3D window.

A set of current options and accessories can be viewed in a panel located just under themenu bar. An option is, for example, the construction method for a sphere (From the base orfrom the center). An accessory lets you perform a particular operation in the current toolsuch as changing the rotation point of an object when using rotate tool. At each step, a helpmessage is displayed in the help window.

Tool options

Helppalette

Graphic workspace

Parameterspalette

Current tool icon

Useful elements when manipulating a tool

Tool accessory

Navigationpalette

Selectionaccessory

palette

Reference Manual26

The tool operation stops at the end of the last step or/and when the user clicks on theassistant palette validation icon or/and presses the Enter key. The selection of another toolwill validate the current tool before initializing the new tool. It is always possible to stop atool execution by pressing on the cancel button in the assistant palette or by pressing theEscape key.

Some accessories are in fact real tools. They contain several steps and achieve complexoperations but when they have completed, they restore the parent tool to the state it wasbefore launching the accessory. For instance, to punch a hole in a surface, one can use theCut tool and create a circle from within the Cut tool as an accessory. Once the circle iscreated, the Cut tool automatically starts the cut action.

(See “Using tools” on page 80)

4.9 Scene management Amapi Pro has several scene management tools.

The Layers allow you to group a set of objects by family, to lock them so that they cannotbe changed or to hide them completely. A layer is a very appropriate way to manage largelists of objects. The hide and show tools allow you to make objects visible or invisible. (See “The Layers” on page 198)

The scene tree view represents the current scene as a tree. Objects can be selected in the treeand moved into layers. A contextual menu makes it possible to carry out all possible basicoperations on objects such as hiding, showing, blocking, renaming or grouping... The object information panel displays the object characteristics: type, name, number ofpoints, size... but can also perform cleaning operations such as suppressing coplanar faces orremoving overlapping points. (See “The Scene graph” on page 202)

The Catalog, is a native file manager allowing you to preview objects as thumbnails. It canalso read, write, delete or rename files. Folders of favorites can be created. The catalog is aroom than can be accessible from the room icons located at the top right-hand side of thescreen. (See “The Catalog” on page 443)

27 Amapi ProT M

4.10 Dynamic Geometry (DG)Dynamic geometry is a concept that allows Amapi Pro to memorize the construction steps ofobjects. For instance, a curve extruded along a profile will create an object made up of two curvesand will have the extruded surface as the resulting shape.

Such objects can be edited afterwards. Manipulating their entities (points, edges or facets)means manipulating the basic shapes they contain (called the control shapes). The resultingshapes are automatically updated.

This concept allows a quick modification of the basic shapes without having to repeat theintermediate construction steps. One will be able to create several versions of a same objectby modifying a single construction point.

The Dynamic Geometry palette helps to manageDynamic Geometry, to select and to suppress levels.Its simplified presentation gives you a quickpreview of the current selection as an object list.

Most tools handle the dynamic geometry. However,when using a tool that converts a model topolygons, the dynamic geometry is not able to retainthe construction history of the model.

A global switch located in the control panel let you turn off dynamic geometry completely.

Work without dynamic geometry Work with dynamic geometry

(see details on page 135)

Step #1:Draw two construction curves.

Step #2:Extrude the section along the profile.Amapi Pro keeps the construction curves.

Step #3:Smooth the object.Amapi Pro keeps the extruded object.

Step #4:If the result is not satisfying, modify the shape of the profile curve. This modification automatically and interactively updates the extrusion and the smoothing.

Section

Profile Stretched Point

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweep 1

3. Smoothing 1

Reference Manual28

4.11 Entering valuesAt each step of object construction, it is important to be ableto enter exact values. Amapi Pro allows you to editnumerical values by clicking on the parameter palette or byhitting the Tab key.(see details on page 161)

4.12 Modeling room tools paletteThe modeling room contains three tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit”.

Amapi Pro gives you the choice between two tools palette representations (See “Toolbox”on page 456).The “Tool box” interface displays the four palettes in one.

The “Tools palette” interface displays the “Basic toolkit” and only one tools palette. Totoggle from one palette to another, just hit the right-hand side of the graphic workspace withthe mouse cursor.

The basic toolkit The construction palette

The modeling palette

The assembly palette

This palette is always visible. It contains the “Move”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Stretch” tools.

This palette contains basic line and surface drawing tools as well as advanced surface creation tools.

This palette contains modification tools that can edit existing objects.

This palette contains tools to carry out complex assemblies and a few generic tools

Parameter palette

29 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual30

5 Modeling tools description

In the modeling room, Amapi Pro displays only the tools likely to be necessary toeach step of modeling.

That is why they are divided in palettes:

• The “Basic toolkit”” (see details on page 32)

• The “Construction palette” (see details on page 33)

• The “Modeling palette” (see details on page 34)

• The “Assembly Palette” (see details on page 35)

Each tool is described in the following paragraphs. For detailed information, see theReference Manual.

31 Amapi ProT M

5.1 ToolkitAbove each main tools palette, a “Toolkit” is displayed. It contains tools which are alwaysavailable even while using a tool from the main palettes.

(See “Basic toolkit” on page 241)

Icon Tool name Description See

“Move” Use this tool to change the position of the current object. page 242

“Rotate” Use this tool to rotate the current object. page 244

“Scale”This tool changes the size of the current object, eitherkeeping its original proportions, or distorting it vertically orhorizontally.

page 248

“Stretch”The “Stretch” tool is used to move the current selection(facets, edges and/or points). The selected objects will bedeformed according to the cursor movement.

page 252

Reference Manual32

5.2 Construction paletteThis tools palette contains the tools used to draw the shapes that will be the basis for yourmodels.

(See “Construction Palette” on page 257)

Icon Tool name Description See

“Surface and volumeprimitives”

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 3Dshapes. page 258

“Line drawing”This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 2D or 3Dlines. page 277

“Extract Lines” This tool creates curve(s) from points selected on the current object orexisting objects of the scene. page 300

“Extract Facets” This tool creates an object made up of several facets. page 304

“Sweep” The basic use of this tool is to create sweeped shapes from curves.However, it can also extrude facets, edges or points page 307

“Double-Sweep” This tool creates a surface from a section and two profiles. page 321

“Ruled Surface” This tool lets you create a “skin” tightened between two or more 2D or3D curves. page 324

“Coons Surface” This tool generates a surface from connected curves drawing a closedperimeter. page 331

“Gordon surface” This tool creates a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface isgenerated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves page 334

“Manifold” This tool creates a volume from NURBS surfaces which will define thefuture volume page 336

33 Amapi ProT M

5.3 Modeling paletteThis tools palette contains the tools used to model the objects.

(See “Modeling palette” on page 339)

Icon Tool name Description See

“Smooth” This tool is used to control the number of facets defining a surface and thenumber of points defining a curve and to give them a smoother aspect. page 340

“Chamfer” This tool allows you to create internal or external bevels, depending onthe orientation of the model edges page 347

“Thickness/Offset”This tool offers two different options: - Creates a clone object parallel to the current object.- Gives a thickness to a curve, a surface or a volume

page 351

“Cut” Proposes several methods to cut one or several objects at the same time. page 354

“Delete” This tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge orpoint) from the selected objects. page 364

“Tesselate” This tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or avolume. page 367

“Deform” This tool lets you apply several kinds of deformations to the currentselection proposed as options. page 374

“Bend” This tool deforms the selection along a profile curve. page 379

“Mold” This tool allows you to pull on the current selection so that to the pointslocated in the influence area are moved with an inertia effect. page 382

“Bump/Soften” This tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection. page 385

Reference Manual34

5.4 Assembly PaletteThis tools palette contains the tools used to place and orient objects:

(See “Assembly palette” on page 387)

Icon Tool name Description See

“Duplicate” Allows you to create one or several copies of the current selection.Amapi Pro proposes several methods of duplication. page 388

“Symmetry” Creates a mirror image of the current selection. page 398

“Close” Lets you close the current selection, such as a curve or an opened surface. page 400

“Weld”This tool proposes several options to weld objects or points. If theseoptions generate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them(other points are deleted).

page 403

“Snap/Align” This tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along avector, the ends of which are defined by the user. page 406

“Lay on”Use this tool to lay a facet of the selected object onto a facet of anotherobject (center on center). page 408

“Unfold” Use this tool to create a 2D flat unfolded version of a 3D model. page 409

“Wrap” Allows you the deformation of an object by mapping it onto a surface(grid, cylinder or sphere). page 413

“Measurements”Displays the dimensions of an object. Amapi Pro allows you to displaythree types of dimensions: length, angle and volume/surface/circumference.

page 415

“Decimate” Allows a reduction in the complexity of an object. page 420

35 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual36

37 Amapi ProT M

6 Tutorials

These tutorials have been designed to quickly introduce the user to most of the navigationand manipulation principles that apply to Amapi Pro. It is advised to do these exercises intheir chronological order.

Once familiar with the software, the user will be able to create his own models and will onlyoccasionally need to refer to the Reference Manual. This chapter explains in detail how eachtool operates.

Of course, these exercises represent only some of the main functions of Amapi. You willfind detailed illustrations of modeling techniques and case studies on the www.e-frontier.com web site.

6.1 A sphere, a 3D tube and a parallelepiped

Here you are, comfortably seated in front of thescreen. You are going to begin by familiarizingyourself with the program interface. Let’s start bybuilding a sphere, a 3D tube and a parallelepiped.These shapes will be often used as the basis forfuture creations.

At the end of this exercise, you will know how to: • Select a display mode,• Change the construction mode (Polyhedral or

NURBS),• Navigate in the scene,• Change the working plane,• Toggle from one Room to another,• Change palettes,• Pick up and release a tool,• Edit a parameter in the graphic workspace and

in the parameter palette,• Control the precision of an action, • Apply a constraint to the cursor movement,• Use the “Sphere”, “Cube”, “Polyline” and

“Thickness/Offset” tools.

The graphic workspaceEntering the program:The software is now launched. The organizationof the screen has been explained in the “QuickTour” chapter (see details on page 13).The graphic workspace is still empty. Only a gridshowing the ground is displayed.

Reference Manual38

Modeling Room

Rendering Room

File Manager Room(The Catalog)

“ConstructionPalette”

“Assemblypalette”

“Modelingpalette”

“Basic toolkit”

Control panel extract

Building a sphereSelect the room:In order to reduce the number of tools visible atthe same time on the screen, Amapi Pro splits themain functions into three groups called “Rooms”. These are represented by a group of icons at thetop right of the screen. To toggle from one to theother, click on the icon showing the desired room.As a general rule, you will usually start workingin the modeling room. To start this exercise,make sure you are in the modeling room .

Select the palette:

The modeling tools are divided in palettes;

• “Basic toolkit”

• “Construction Palette”,

• “Modeling palette”,

• “Assembly palette”

They are displayed on the right side of the screen.You will chose the tools from one of thesepalettes.

Select the Polyhedral or NURBS constructionmode:Amapi Pro works indifferently in polyhedralmode or in NURBS mode. An icon of the controlpanel displays the current mode. The NURBSmode is the default mode. We will start this exercise by using the polyhedralmode. We will use the NURBS mode in the nextstep.Click on the icon (in the control panel) towork in polyhedral construction mode .

39 Amapi ProT M

“Construction Palette”

“Surface and volume primitives”palette

“Sphere” sub-tooloptions

Assistant Palette

Parameter palette

Select the “Surface and volume primitives” inthe “Construction Palette” :Click on the icon showing the “Surface andvolume primitives” tool in the “ConstructionPalette” .

Select the “Sphere” tool in the “Surface andvolume primitives” palette:The primitives construction palette is displayed;click on the “Sphere” tool .

Select the construction method:Amapi Pro proposes two “Sphere”. constructionmethods.Click on the icon corresponding to the desired“From the center” option or press both the“Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from oneoption to the other.

The gradated axis:The gradated axis X (red) and Y (green) of theorthonormal base are displayed. To increase ordecrease the gradation steps, click on theicons of the assistant palette (help palette forbeginners). This palette appears centered at thetop of the graphic workspace. Most users usuallyprefer using the keyboard shortcuts: instead ofclicking on the icons, use the “+/-” keys.

Setting the sphere’s center:

1) Move the cursor in the graphic workspace.The cursor position is interactively displayedin the parameter palette at the bottom lefthand side of the screen.

Reference Manual40

Control panel extract

Free cursor movement.

Cursor snapped to grid

# of Points =7 # of Points=8 # of Points=9

2) Click on the icon located in the controlpanel at the bottom of the screen. This will setthe cursor free from snapping to the gridgradations.

3) Move the cursor again, the parameter palettedisplays the cursor position with an accuracyof 1/1000.

4) Click as soon as the position is suitable.

Setting the radius:Move the cursor again. This time, the parameterpalette displays the value of the sphere radiuswhile it is being constructed.Click as soon as the value is suitable.

Determine the number of points defining thesphere:This (optional) step consists of modifying thenumber of sections defining the sphere. TheTuner indicates that a quick modification ispossible by clicking on the icons orpressing on the “+/-” keys.

Validate the operation:The beginner will validate the sphere creation byclicking on the validation icon of the assistantpalette (help palette for beginners).The user will probably quickly prefer to press the“Enter” key or to use an efficient feature ofAmapi Pro interface: the tool will be released bysweeping (moving) the cursor out the right side ofthe screen. The user will be able to continue hiswork with another tool in the “Surface andvolume primitives” palette.

41 Amapi ProT M

Control panel extract

The “Wireframe” mode

The “Lit Wireframe” mode

The “Flat Solid” mode

The “WireShade Flat Solid” mode

The “Smooth Solid” mode

The “WireShade Smooth Solid” mode

Navigation palette

Release the “Surface and volume primitives”tool:The tool will be released by moving the cursorout the right side of the screen. Work can then becontinued with another selection and/or anothertool.

The display modeWhen modeling, different entities can be handled,including points, edges, facets or objects.Amapi Pro has several display modes for theobjects in a scene in order highlight more or lessthese entities.Depending on the kind of manipulation to bedone, a specific display mode will be moreappropriate to identify the entities you areworking on. It is possible to change the displaymode at any time.The control panel (at the bottom of the screen)displays the icon showing the current displaymode. Click on it to display the entire list of theproposed modes, then click on the suitable one.Try all of them, then choose the “WireShade FlatSolid” mode .

NavigationThe navigation palette:Amapi Pro allows you to work on a model fromany viewpoint. The user will appreciate how easyit is to move around, towards or away from aviewpoint.

Amapi Pro proposes several kinds of interfaces toaccess the navigational functions:• “The Navigation Palette” • “The keyboard or the mouse-keyboard

navigation (the quickest)”

Reference Manual42

. : Zoom out0: View All1: View Detail 2: Front view3: Zoom in4: Left view 5: Top view6: Right view 7: Viewpoint customizing 8: Rear view9: Bottom view

Use the right, left, up, and downarrow keys to move around thescene.

To have a panoramic view of the scene, press and hold the Control key and press on an arrow key.

For your first creations, it is probably better touse the navigation palette icons.To continue this exercise, use the keyboardshortcuts in order to see just how efficient theyare.

The main viewpointsPress the “0” key to see the entire scene.Press the “5” key to view the scene from the top.Press the “4” key to view the scene from the leftside.

Zoom In / Out:Press the “.” key to zoom out of the scene, thenon the “3” key to zoom in.

Rotate around the scene:Use the right, left, up, and down arrow keys tomove around the scene.

Pan the scene:To have a panoramic view of the scene, press andhold the Control key and press on an arrow key.

View a detail of the scene:

1) Click on the “View detail” icon (or pressthe “1” key).

2) Move the cursor to the center of the area ofinterest, then click.

3) Move the cursor and click as soon as the areaof interest is surrounded.

Note: If the mouse has a wheel, you can use thiswheel to zoom in/out of the scene.

Front view all:Press the “2” key, then on the “0” key to see theentire scene from the front view.

43 Amapi ProT M

Control panel extract

Construction palette

“Line drawing” palette

Drawing a 3D tubeWith Amapi Pro, the construction of a tube isdone in two steps. We will first create the profileof the tube and then add a thickness to it.In this exercise, we will use the NURBSconstruction mode. It allows you to draw exactparametric surfaces ideal for exchanging datawith CAO/CFOAO software.

Select the NURBS construction mode:

Click on the icon in the control panel to gointo the NURBS construction mode .

Positioning in the scene:Zoom out (“.” key) and move the view toward theright side of the screen (“Ctrl”+ “right arrow”keys) so that the sphere is on the left side of thescreen, and the right side is free to draw theprofile of the tube.

Select the “Line drawing” tool in the“Construction Palette”:

Click on the “Line drawing” tool icon in the“Construction Palette”.

Select the “Curve” sub-tool in the “Linedrawing” palette:A construction primitives sub-tools palette isdisplayed, click on the “Curve” . sub-tool.This tool will be used to create the tube profile.

Reference Manual44

Begin drawing the first segment of the profile:

1) Move the cursor; its position is interactivelydisplayed in the parameter palette.

2) Click when the position is suitable.

3) Move the cursor to draw the curve’s firstsegment.

Changing the working plane when drawing:Because the mouse movement is restricted to asingle plane, working in three dimensions will beeasier if changing the working plane is fast andintuitive. For this reason, Amapi Pro uses theconcept of a “Working plane” which evolvesaccording to the active plane you are working in.To fully make use of the all the capabilities ofyour software, it is fundamental to understandhow this works.The “working plane” is the plane the cursor ismoving in. Thus it changes with the observer’sposition in the scene. The current working planeis the orthogonal plane which orientation is theclosest from the current view plane (the screenplane). So now, if the current view plane is the frontview, the (x,y) plane is the orthogonal plane theclosest from the screen plane. That will be theworking plane. The x axis is red and the y axis isgreen.

1) Move the cursor; its position is interactivelydisplayed in the parameter palette. Only the xand y coordinates are modified because thecursor doesn’t move in z.

2) Click when the cursor position is suitable, thefirst segment is now drawn in the (x,y) plane.

3) Move the cursor to draw the second segmentin the same plane.

4) Press on the “up” arrow several times to moveprogressively to a top view. Stop as the axis

45 Amapi ProT M

turns to blue: now the x axis (red) and the zaxis (blue) are displayed. This indicates thatthe working plane has changed.

5) Move the cursor; its position is interactivelydisplayed in the parameter palette. Only the xand z coordinates are modified because thecursor doesn’t move in y.

6) Click when the cursor position is suitable. Thesecond segment is now drawn in the (x,z)plane.

7) Move to a side view (“6” key) to work on the(y,z) plane. Now, only the y and z coordinatesare modified because the cursor doesn’t movein x.

8) Click when the cursor position is suitable Thethird segment is now drawn in the (y,z) plane.

9) Now, press the “2” key to see the entire scenein the front view.

Constraining the cursor movement:The cursor moves again on the (x,y) plane. To draw a perfectly horizontal segment:

1) Click on the icon located in the assistantpalette (beginners help palette). It forces thecursor movement to the horizontal axis.Check this by moving the cursor in thegraphic workspace.

2) Click to validate this fourth segment.

3) To draw a perfectly vertical segment: Clickon the icon located in the assistant palette.It forces the cursor movement to the verticalaxis. Check this by moving the cursor in thegraphic workspace.

4) Click to validate this fifth segment.

5) Click on the icon to free the cursormovement on the working plane.

Reference Manual46

“Modeling palette”

“Thickness/Offset”tool options

6) Click to validate this sixth segment.

Instead of clicking on one of these threeconstraint icons, it is faster to use the“Space-Bar” shortcut to toggle from onemovement constraint to another. Press the“Space-Bar” several times and move the cursor tosee the constrained movement.

Validate the polyline drawing:Amapi Pro proposes drawing a seventh curvesegment. But since we only want six points,validate the drawing by pressing the “Enter” key.

Navigate to view the 3D line:Use the navigation keys to circulate around thescene and see that the profile has been drawn inthree dimensions.

Release the “Curve” tool:The tool will be released by sweeping the rightside of the screen with the cursor. The user willbe able to continue his work with anotherselection and/or another tool.

Give a thickness to the tube:

1) Click on the icon showing the “Thickness/Offset” tool in the “Modeling palette”.

2) This tool has several options. Click on the“Give a thickness” option.The curve is transformed into a tube.

47 Amapi ProT M

“Construction Palette”

“Surface and volume primitives”palette

3) The tuner indicates that the + or - keyscan be used to quickly set the “Thickness”parameter corresponding to the tube diameter.

4) Validate the operation and release the tool bypressing on the “Enter” key.

Navigate to view the 3D tube:Use the navigation keys to circulate around thescene and view the tube that has been drawn inthree dimensions.

Building a parallelepiped Select the “Surface and volume primitives”tool in the “Construction Palette”:Click on the “Surface and volume primitives”icon in the “Construction Palette”.

Select the “Cube” subtool in the “ConstructionPalette”:

Click on the “Cube” tool.

Move to a front view:Press the “2” key to go to the front view.

Select the construction method:Just like with the sphere, Amapi Pro offers two“Cube” construction methods.Click on the icon corresponding to the “From thecenter” option .

Reference Manual48

Set the center of the cube:

1) Move the cursor in the graphic workspace.The cursor position is interactively displayedin the parameter palette at the bottom left sideof the screen. This time, the coordinates willbe entered from the keyboard.

2) Press the “Tab” key to activate the parametersedit mode.

3) Enter a value for x, y and z (use the arrowkeys to move from one field to another).

4) Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”key.

Set the size of the parallelepiped:

1) Move the cursor again. The parameter palettedisplays the same value for x, y and z for thecube currently in construction.

2) Press the “Space-Bar” once (shortcut totoggle from one movement constraint toanother). This forces the cursor movementonto the horizontal axis. The cube istransformed into a parallelepiped and thecursor movement controls the width (radiusx). The parameter palette now displays threevalues (x,y and z).

3) Press the “Space-Bar” once again. This nowforces the cursor movement onto the verticalaxis. The cursor movement now controls theheight (y) of the parallelepiped. Theparameter palette still displays threedimensions (x,y and z).

4) Enter three values, directly in the parameterpalette, as for the center setting.

5) Validate the dimensions by pressing the“Enter” key. This will automatically releasethe “Cube” tool.

49 Amapi ProT M

6.2 Creating an ashtray

In this exercise, we will see that with only a fewclicks, everyday objects such as a ashtray can becreated.This tutorial is designed to learn how to quicklywork with Amapi Pro and to demonstrate itsversatility. It is therefore possible to work insingle-view or multi-view.We consider here that the previous exercise havealready been done. Basic explanations willtherefore be skipped. At the end of this exercise, the user will knowhow to:• Work in single-view or multi-view.• Use the “Cube”, “Chamfer”, “Cut”, “Rotate”,

“Move” tools. • Save the current scene in the catalog.

Preparing the sceneCheck the default application modes:• the operating mode is already set to NURBS

(Control panel)• snap to grid is on (Control panel)

Make sure the scene is empty:If there are any objects in the scene, delete all ofthem by pressing the “Ctrl-Del” keys.

Reference Manual50

Work without Dynamic Geometry

Work with Dynamic Geometry

Control panel extract

Disable Dynamic Geometry :Dynamic Geometry” is a fundamental concept wewill see in the next exercise, but in this one wewill switch Dynamic Geometry off. Click on thetoggle-icon located in the control panel to togglefrom one working mode to the other. The iconmust show that Dynamic Geometry isdisabled

Setting a strategy:There are always several methods available tomake the same model when working withAmapi Pro. Determine a strategy beforebeginning the model. Some methods will be moreappropriate, depending on the work method orthe application domain. Very quickly, you will beable to use your own experience to define astrategyThe first modeling step generally consists ofdrawing curves or volumes as a constructionbasis. When looking at an ashtray, we can see that theshape is based on a parallelepiped. So, let’s startby building a parallelepiped.

Building a parallelepipedSelect the “Cube” tool:

1) Select the “Surface and volumeprimitives” in the construction palette.

2) Click on the “Cube” tool .

Select the construction method:Amapi Pro uses the last selected tool option forthe tool. Click on the icon corresponding to the“From the base” option .

51 Amapi ProT M

Set the base of the cube:

1) Move the cursor to set the base of the cube.Enter the x, y, z values as (0,1,0).

Set the size of the parallelepiped:

1) Move the cursor again. The parameter palettedisplays the same value for x, y and z for thecube currently in construction.

2) Press the “Space-Bar” once (shortcut totoggle from one movement constraint toanother).

3) Enter three values directly in the parameterpalette (x=20 ; y=5 ; z=20).

4) Validate the dimensions by pressing the“Enter” key. This automatically releases the“Cube” tool.

Creating the hole in the center of the ashtrayWe will create a sphere and cut the cube with thissphere to create the hole.

Creation and placement of a sphere:

1) Click on the “Sphere” tool icon in the“Surface and volume primitives” palette.

2) Make sure that the “From the base” option is selected.

3) Move the cursor to set the base of the sphereinside the cube just above the center of the topface (x=0 ; y=2 ; z=0).

4) Click to validate the position of the base.

Set the sphere size:

1) Move the cursor vertically to define thediameter of the sphere at 14 cm.

Reference Manual52

“Boolean” option

Current option

2) Click to validate the size.

3) The tuner indicates that you can refine thevisual appearance of the sphere (see thepreceding exercise). Since we aremanipulating NURBS objects, we don’t needto be concerned with that step, since the resultof the cut operation will be perfectly smooth.You can use, if you like, the « + » and « - »keys to smooth the sphere.

4) Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”key.

Cut the cube with the sphere to create thehole :We will now cut the cube by removing the spherevolume from it with the “Cut” tool.

1) Check that the sphere is the current object. (itmust have the section color).

2) Select the “Cut” tool in the modelingpalette.

3) Select the “Boolean” option.

4) Click on the cube to start the cut operation.

5) Once done, the Boolean operation optionpalette appears. This allows you to selectwhich type of operation you want to performamong several choices (union, difference,intersection,...).In this case, we will use the first option whichgives us the desired result. Validate the operation and release the tool bypressing the “Enter” key.

Creating the groovesWe will use this same method for creating thefour grooves. First, we will build a cylinder andthen cut the ashtray with this cylinder.

53 Amapi ProT M

Switch to 4 views:

1) Click on the “single view” icon in thecontrol panel. The view palette appears.

2) Select the 4 views icon . Note: only one view is a perspective view.The others are planar views.

3) Click on the top view to activate it.

4) Use the keyboard numerical keys ’.’ or ’,’ tozoom out a bit.

First groove

1) Click on the “Cylinder” tool in the“Surface and volume primitives” palette.

2) Move the cursor to set the center of the baseof the cylinder near the front face of theashtray and click or enter the values directlyin the parameters palette (x=0 ; y=0 ; z=13) .

3) Click in order to place the base of the cylinderand to begin construction.

4) Move the cursor to the right. A small cylinderappears. The mouse position defines itsdiameter.

5) When the diameter is close to 1 cm, click, orhit Tab and enter 1 in the parameter paletteand hit return to validate.

6) Now that the diameter is defined, moving thecursor sets the height of the cylinder. Movethe cursor upward. The cylinder grows.

7) Stretch the cylinder so that it completelycrosses the ashtray body and appears on theother side. The height should be about 26 cm.Click to validate. .

8) As soon as the height is set, the tuner appears and the two sides of the cylinder arehighlighted. Since we want to close the

Reference Manual54

cylinder, simply click on the accessory toclose the two sides.

9) Put aside the tool.

Positioning the groove cylinderYou can see that for now the cylinder iscompletely inside the ashtray body. We willmove it to the correct position.

1) Click on the front view.

2) In the “Basic toolkit” palette, choose the“Move” tool .

3) Hit the “Space-Bar” once: this will limit theaction of several tools (Move, Scale,Stretch,...) to a single axis. The first time youhit the “Space-Bar”, the red and green axisturns to a single horizontal red axis.

4) As we want to move the cylinder upward, hitthe “Space-Bar” again. The green vertical axisappears and the movement is constrainedvertically.

5) Click on the cylinder and move the cursorupward. The cylinder follows the cursor.

6) Move the cursor so that it appears partlyoutside the ashtray body. The translation is(x=0 ; y=4 ; z=0). You can either• Move the cylinder until seeing the correct

value in the parameter palette, thenclicking to validate.

• or hit the Tab key twice (the first edits thex, the second for y). Type 4 and hit Enter.

Create the second cylinderWe will now create another cylinderperpendicular to the first one to create thehorizontal grooves. To do that, we will create arotated copy of the first cylinder.

1) Switch to an top view by clicking on it.

55 Amapi ProT M

2) Press and hold the « Ctrl » key while clickingon the “Rotate” tool in the “Basic toolkit”palette. A gradated circle appears around thecylinder.Remark: Holding the « Ctrl » key whileselecting one of the basic tools lets you, ontools that accept this kind of operation, createa copy of the selected object before applyingthe tool’s action.

3) Click on the highest gradation on the circle.

4) Move the cursor to the right most gradation.The new cylinder rotates as you move thecursor.• Click again when on the right most

gradation. (The new cylinder isperpendicular to the original one)

Or• If you prefer, hit Tab and enter 90°. Then

hit Enter to validate • Hit enter again to leave the tool.

Switch to single-view :

1) Click on the «four-view» icon to open theview palette.

2) Click on the «single-view» icon .

Group the cylinders:We shall group the two cylinders to get only oneobject.

1) Click on the “Group” tool icon .

2) Click on each cylinder.

3) Put aside the tool.

Cutting the groovesWe will now create the cylinder holes by usingthe same method as for the center hole. This isdone using the “Cut” tool.

Reference Manual56

1) Click on the “Cut” tool in the modelingpalette. The cylinders must be the selected object.

2) Click on the ashtray to perform the cutbetween the current object and the ashtray.

3) Check that the current cut option is in theoption palette: the resulting object is theashtray body minus the cylinders.

4) Validate by hitting the enter key.

Chamfering the edges1) Pick up the “Chamfer” tool from the

modeling tools palette.

2) Click on the edges you want to chamfer. Notethat the edges appear highlighted when closeto the cursor. This allows you to perfectly seewhat the editable entities are and to be sure toselect the correct one.

3) The tuner indicates that you can use the +or - keyboard keys to quickly tune the radiusparameter (select 0,5).

4) Validate by hitting the enter key.

5) The ashtray is finished. You can turn itaround and look at it from differentviewpoints by using the keyboard arrow keysor the view icons of the view palette.

Rendered displaySet the viewpoint:

1) Use the navigation keys to see the ashtrayfrom any angle.

2) Find the best viewpoint.

57 Amapi ProT M

Modeling Room

Rendering Room

File Manager Room(The Catalog)

Rendering:Press the “Enter” key to display the renderedobject.

Save the fileNow, save the file in Amapi Pro’s file manager,called “The Catalog” which quickly and easilyallows you to store and retrieve Amapi Prodocuments just like in a library.

1) Click on Catalog room icon .

2) Click on the Catalog icon “Open adirectory”.

3) Select the directory. Amapi Pro displays theselected directory. Each file can be identifiedby a thumbnail which depicts the scene by itsname.

4) Browse the pages of the catalog, using the “+/-” keys, until finding an “Empty” location.

5) Click on an empty location. Amapi Pro savesthe file. A thumbnail depicting the scene isdisplayed in this location.

Reference Manual58

6.3 Creating a bottleThis new exercise is primarily intended tofamiliarize you with the manipulation of objectsusing dynamic geometry. Dynamic geometry isone of the points which contribute to the powerand flexibility of your program. It works according to the following principles: Each object of the scene keeps a trace of all thesteps of its construction. You can therefore ask torectify a curve or a volume resulting from aprevious step. Amapi Pro will reflect thismodification in all the steps separating it from thefinished model. Here, we will create a profile ofan extrusion and then manipulate this profile afterthe surface creation. Each manipulation will bereflected immediately on the result, thus enablingus to precisely set the aspect of the bottle.

At the end of this exercise you will know how to: • Use the gradated axis and the alignment

guides• Use the selection accessories• Use the dynamic geometry properties,• Use the “Circle”, “Curve”, “Scale”, “Sweep”,

“Stretch”, “Tesselate” tools.

Preparing the sceneMake sure the scene is empty:If you have just carried out the precedingexercise, objects remain displayed in the graphicwindow. Press on the key combination “Ctrl”“Del” to remove all of them.

59 Amapi ProT M

To work without Dynamic Geometry

To work with Dynamic Geometry

Work with dynamic geometry:In this exercise, we will work with DynamicGeometry.Click on the toggle-icon integrated into thecontrol panel which enables you to switch fromone working method to another. The icon mustshow that you are working with DynamicGeometry .

Defining a strategy:Note that a bottle consists of concentric circularsections more or less dilated. We thus will createa profile and a circle to use as a section. Then, wewill use the “Sweep” tool to create the surface.

Gradated axis and Alignment guidesYou already used the gradated axis in thepreceding exercises to precisely enter points.Here we will use alignment guides. These guidesare in fact straight lines passing through the lastpoint created and forming a preset angle with thehorizontal one. The cursor is automaticallymagnetized to these lines. It is possible to addreference points in order to create intersectionsbetween these alignment guides. We will beginby setting the values of the angles used for thealignment guides. Open the “Preferences editor”from the “Edit” menu or use the “Alt-P”keyboard shortcut. In the “Graphic environment”tab, click on “Alignment guides”. Check that theAlignment Guide mode is enabled and select 30to 45 in the list of suggested angles. The eightpossible angles are assigned to the correspondingvalues. You can also activate the alignmentguides from the Control panel. Validate.

Reference Manual60

“Line drawing” palette

Alignment guide at 45 degrees

Last point created

Drawing the bottle profileChanging the Viewpoint:Remember that the default “working plane” is theorthogonal plane to which the orientation isclosest to the plane of the screen. You willtherefore need to go to a face view to be able todraw the profile (press on the key “2”).

Drawing the Profile:

1) Select the “Line drawing” tool in theconstruction palette.

2) Select the “Curve”, tool in the “Linedrawing” palette.

3) Enter the first point. Then slowly move thecursor around this point. You will then see thealignment guides appear when the position ofthe cursor corresponds to one of the selectedangles. The last point entered is surroundedby a green rectangle.

4) Place the cursor on the horizontal axis goingthrough the point. The cursor is then guidedby a line of 0 degrees. It becomes very easy tofollow this line. Move the cursor 1 cm to theleft of the first point and click.

5) Move the cursor 1 cm to the left and 1/2 cmdown. You will see a guide appear at 30degrees. Click on this position.

6) Add a point 1/2 cm on the left.

7) Then go up vertically 8 cm.

8) Create a new point 1 cm above this.

9) Create a point 2 cm up and 1.5 cm to the right.

10)Create a last point 5 cm vertically above theprevious one.

11) The profile is finished. Validate.

61 Amapi ProT M

“Line drawing” palette

Draw the base of the circleChanging the Viewpoint:Remember that the default “working plane” is theorthogonal plane to which the orientation isclosest to the plane of the screen. You willtherefore need to go to a top view in order todraw the circle on the ground plane (press the key“5”). The circle will be automatically located onthe plane where you created the last point, that isto say on the top of the bottle. So that the circlepositions correctly compared to the profile, pressthe “left arrow” key several times. The profilecan then be seen as a vertical line.

Drawing the Base circle:

1) Select the “Line drawing” tool in theconstruction palette.

2) Select the “Circle” tool in the “Linedrawing” palette.

3) Select the «from the base» option.Position the center of the circle by clicking atthe center of the gradated axis in the graphicwindow or by entering a value of (0,0,0) inthe parameters window.

4) Move the cursor and see the circle beingformed. It must be created along the verticalaxis.

5) Click to validate the radius when it is at 0.75or enter this value directly in the numericwindow.

6) The tuner-cursor shows that you can presson the + or - keys of the keyboard to proceedto set the number of points. As we areworking in NURBS mode, the number ofpoints is used for visualization only. Leavethe default value. Press «Enter» to validate.

Reference Manual62

7) End by putting down “Line drawing” tool.

8) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).

Position the circle with the Snap/Align tool:It can be necessary to reposition the circle if itwas not created exactly at the right place. To dothis, use the “Snap/Align” tool.

1) Select the circle

2) Select the “Snap/Align” tool

3) Click on a point of the circle nearest to theprofile.

4) Click on the highest point of the profile. Thecircle is now placed correctly.

5) Release the tool.

Extruding the bottleFrom the profile and the section, you can nowgenerate the bottle’s surface.

1) Select the circle by simply clicking on it.

2) Select the “Sweep” tool in theconstruction palette.

3) This tool offers two options; choose the“Extruded sweep” option.

4) Click on the profile. The surface is created.

5) Two white circles appear at the two ends ofthe surface. If you click on them, you canclose each opening independently.Click on the bottom circle to close the bottomof the bottle.

6) Validate by pressing Enter twice. Yoursurface is created.

63 Amapi ProT M

Retouching the bottle’s shapeThe Dynamic Geometry palette:Since we are working with the DynamicGeometry (DG), Amapi Pro has kept a track of allthe steps of the modeling. You will observe thisby consulting the DG palette located on the left ofthe screen:• Level 1 corresponds to the polylines of

control for the circle and for the NURBSprofile.

• Level 2 corresponds to the NURBS circle andto the NURBS profile.

• Level 3 corresponds to the sweeping.

1) Click on the icon of the DG palette todisplay the polylines of control associated tothis dynamic geometry level. See right.

2) Click on the icon of the DG palette todisplay the NURBS curves of the profile andthe circle.

3) Click on the icon of the DG palette todisplay the sweeping.

Rectification of the profile:Let us suppose that you are not completelysatisfied with the results obtained. We cantherefore rectify the profile.

1) Select the “Stretch” tool (on the right-hand side of the screen).

2) The tool proposes to you to work on the firstDG level by default. A red frame indicates that this is the“Working level”. In the graphic window,Amapi Pro highlights the control shapes (thecircle and the sweeping profile).

3) Click on one of the points defining theextrusion profile and move the cursor to

Reference Manual64

deform it. You can see that Amapi Proreflects in real time the effects of thisdeformation on the extruded final shape.

4) Click again to validate the new drawing.

5) Repeat these two last steps until you aresatisfied with the results obtained.

6) Release the “Stretch” tool.

Retouching the bottle neckThe aspect of the bottle’s neck is not quitesatisfactory. We would therefore like to modifyits shape but we did not define enough points onthe profile for that. We can therefore add controlpoints to the profile with the “Tesselate” tool.

Add points to the profile:

1) Click on the icon of the DG palette todisplay the NURBS profile and the NURBScircle.

2) Click on the visibility icon on the linecorresponding to the extrusion in the dynamicgeometry palette . This lets you hide thesurface to better see the control curves. Thisicon appears only next to levels above theselected level.

3) Click on the curve profile in the 3D space toselect it. It becomes the active object.

4) Select the “Tesselate” tool in the modelingpalette. This tool, when it is applied toNURBS objects makes it possible to addcontrol points or to set the tesselationparameters. Red and yellow squares appear onthe profile.

5) Click on the profile four times to addregularly spaced points to make the neck.

65 Amapi ProT M

6) Release the “Tesselate” tool. The profile nowhas enough points to be able to modify thebottle’s neck.

7) Release the tool.

8) Click on the visibility icon on the linecorresponding to the extrusion in the dynamicgeometry palette . This lets you show thesurface.

Modeling the neck:

1) Select the “Stretch” tool

2) While holding the Shift key down, click onthe first point and the third point which youhave just added to the base of the top of theprofile. The two points are displayed in red.Only these two points will therefore beaffected by the action of the “Stretch” tool.

3) Release the “Shift” key.

4) Press the space bar to force the movement tothe horizontal axis. Click to begin themodification, the profile becomes deformedand this deformation is reproduced on thebottle.

5) Click again when the shape is appropriate foryou.

6) Release the “Stretch” tool. The bottle isfinished!

Reference Manual66

The selection accessories :In the preceding action we did a multipleselection by means of the Shift key in order toselect several of points. This action could havebeen done differently by using one of theselection accessories of the selection palette. “Select” consists of pointing out the element(s)concerned by the action you want to undertake.These elements can be objects, facets, edges orpoints.The Amapi Pro tools act on all of the selectedelements (this is called the “current selection”).The first line of icons in the selection palette letsyou to indicate the entity you want to select(object, facet, edge or point). The second line of icons allows you to indicatethe way in which you want to select: object byobject, with the assistance of the lasso or arectangle, 1 on N, by proximity or by angle.

To select the two points in the preceding exercise,we could have used the object by object selectionaccessory, in point mode, validating when theselection was finished before stretching the pointsthus selected.

Display in rendering mode and save the file1) Press the “Enter” key to display the object in

rendering mode.

2) To save your new creation, you will use thecatalog , as in the previous exercise.

67 Amapi ProT M

Curve 1

Curve 2

6.4 Modeling a mouse

This exercise shows the power and the speedwhen modeling complex models with Amapi Pro. This mouse will be made only with NURBSsurfaces, with the assistance of NURBS curvesand the “Sweep”, “Manifold”, “Cut” and“Chamfer” tools.This exercise supposes that you are accustomedto doing basic manipulations with Amapi Prosuch as moving, scaling up or down, or rotating.At the end of this exercise you will know how to: • “Sweep”,• “Manifold”,• “Cut”,• “Chamfer”

Preparing the sceneMake sure the scene is empty:If you just carried out the preceding exercise,objects remain displayed in the graphic window.Press on the key combination “Ctrl” and “Del” toremove them all.

Check that you are in NURBS mode:Check, in the Control panel that the workingmode is set with NURBS .

Drawing the construction curves1) First of all, you will draw the curves which

will help you build your mouse.

2) Go to a top view (press on the key “5”) Clickon the “Line drawing” tool.

Reference Manual68

Curve 1

Curve 2

Curve 3

Curve 4

3) Click on the “Curve” tool.

4) Draw the two first curves, and be careful thatthey cross close to their ends.

5) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).

6) Draw the curve 3.

7) Go to a side view (press on the key “6”).

8) Draw the curve 4.

Creating the construction surfaces

Construction of the side surface1) Click on the first curve to select it.

2) Then, click on the “Sweep” tool in themodeling palette.

3) Click again on the selected curve to start thedynamic sweep.

4) Your surface begins to be created, and followsthe cursor’s movement.

5) By briefly pressing the “Space-Bar” once, youcan force your extrusion to one axis oranother. Here, by pressing the “Space-Bar”once, you will force the extrusion to the axisy, that is to say the vertical axis.

6) Click to validate the extrusion.

7) Validate by pressing the Enter key threetimes.

8) Create the second curve in the same way.

Construction of the upper surfaceYou now will define the surface of the top of themouse, using the two remaining curves.

1) Click curve 3 to select it.

69 Amapi ProT M

2) Then click on the “Sweep” tool .

3) Click on the “Swept tubing” option.

4) Click on the curve 4: your surface isautomatically generated. You should obtain aresult similar to the in our illustration.

5) Validate by pressing the Enter key twice.

Construction of the base surface

1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”tools palette, and select “Grid”.

2) Go to a top view (press on the key “5”).

3) Draw the grid.

4) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).

5) Move the grid by using the “Move” tool .You should obtain a result similar to the inour illustration.

Setting up the volumeYou might have to move some surfaces. In orderfor the “Manifold” tool to work, it is imperativethat the volume enclosed by your surfaces is wellclosed. You should therefore obtain somethingsimilar to the illustration on the right.

1) Select the “Manifold” tool.

2) Click on surfaces one after the other. Theywill be progressively selected.

3) Validate with the Enter key: your volume iscreated!

Rectification1) Your mouse’s edges are a little sharp. We will

now soften them.

Reference Manual70

2) Select the “Chamfer” tool .

3) Click on all the edges of your mouse, whichthen appear highlighted in red. You also canuse the accessory which applies thechamfer to all the edges.

4) With the + and - keys of the numeric keypad,you can modify the radius of your chamfer.

5) When you are satisfied with the generalappearance of your mouse, validate with theEnter key.

Adding a wheelThe wheel cavity

1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”,tool and create a little sphere.

2) Go to a face view (press on the key “2”).

3) With the “Scale” tool, flatten the sphere onthe x axe.

4) Go to a side view (press on the key “4”).

5) With the “Scale” tool, flatten the sphere onthe y axe.

6) With the “Rotate” tool, apply a light rotationto it.

7) Place the flattened sphere on your mouse, sothat it intersects with the upper surface.

8) Click on the sphere to select it, then choosethe “Cut” (“Boolean”) tool.

9) Then click on the mouse, the sphere willperforate the surface of the mouse.

10)With the assistance of the + and - keys, youcan alternatively review all the possibleoperations between the two surfaces.

71 Amapi ProT M

Close up view of the wheel cavity

Close up view of the wheel during construction

Close up view of the wire connection

11)When you get a result similar to the figure tothe right, validate with the Enter key.

12)Select the “Sweep” tool.

13)Click on the ellipse cut out in the surface ofthe mouse: this is an edge, it appears inyellow. In NURBS mode, the extrusion toolcan detect an edge and extrude it directly.This is what we will do. As soon as you clickon this yellow ellipse, the surface is created.

Making the wheelYou then will add the wheel, by means of asimple sphere.

1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”,palette, then “Sphere”.

2) With the “Scale” and “Move” tools, you willflatten this sphere and place it in the correctplace.

Creating the wire connectionNow, you will create the mouse’s wireconnection.

1) Select the “Surface and volume primitives”.

2) Select the “Cylinder”.

3) Create a small cylinder.

4) After having defined the shape of thecylinder, Amapi Pro highlights the top andbottom ends of the cylinder. Amapi Pro asksyou if you want an opened or a closedcylinder. If you click on the ends, you willclose them, and this is what you will do here.With the “Rotate” and “Scale” tools, placethis cylinder in the correct place.

Reference Manual72

Close up view of the wire connection

5) With this cylinder selected, pick up the “Cut”(“Boolean”) tool and click on the body of themouse. You will get a cut out as on the right.

6) As you have previously done for the wheelcavity, pick up the “Sweep” tool and click onthe yellow cercle which appears at the edge ofthis hole to create a small surface which goestowards the interior of the mouse. Validate bypressing the Enter key.

Creating the wire1) Now, select the “Line drawing” tool.

2) Draw a “Curve” which will be the path foryour wire.

3) Then use the “Thickness/Offset”, tool andsimply determine the thickness of your wireby pressing on the + and - keys.

Creating the ball cavity1) You now will create the cavity for the mouse

ball. Pick up the “Surface and volumeprimitives” tool again, and create a sphere.Then place it so that it cuts into the lower partof the mouse.

2) With the sphere selected, pick up the “Cut”(“Boolean”) tool and click on the body of themouse: the cut-out is made immediately.

3) Just like for the other cavities which we usedon this mouse, pick up the “Sweep” tool and

73 Amapi ProT M

create this part with seven small mouse clicks.NURBS curves having a natural tendency tobe curved, to obtain sharper edges on thispart, you will need to click twice as manypoints that are closer together.

4) The new piece is now in place.

5) A simple sphere is added to make the mouseball

Adding feetTo improve this mouse, you may add four littlefeet and a spot to stick on the brand. To do this, 4 small closed and stretched cylinderswill be placed on the mouse body. This is not necessary to create 4 feet, but only oneand then copy it with the “Duplicate” tool.

1) Now you know how to do this part: drill theholes of the four feet one by one and the holefor the brand.

2) In the selection palette click on the edgesselection accessory icon.

3) Select the four yellow edges corresponding tothe holes for the feet.

4) Then pick up the “Sweep” tool and validatewith the enter key. You have created all 4 feetat the same time.

5) Do the same for the cavity for the brand.

6) Your mouse is finished!

Reference Manual74

Rooms common principles

7 The Rooms, Palettes and Tools

7.1 The RoomsIn order to reduce the number of tools visible at the same time on thescreen, Amapi Pro divides the main functions into three groups called

“Rooms”. To toggle from one to the other, click on the icon showing the desired room:

The Modeling room which allows you to build, model and assemble the objects (See“Modeling room” on page 237).

The Rendering room to set the materials and the lights (See “Rendering Room” onpage 421).

The Catalog room where you can record the objects or the scenes (See “TheCatalog” on page 443).

77 Amapi ProT M

7.2 The Tools palettes

7.2.1 Three Tools palettes and a “Basic toolkit”Each room offers different functions called “Tools”.

The tools of the modeling room have been dispatched inspecialized groups of tools called “Tools palettes”.

Amapi Pro will display only the tools needed for eachstep of work. This is why they have been divided intothree different groups. Each group, called “Palette”,corresponds to a modeling step:

• The “Basic toolkit”• The Construction palette• The Modeling palette• The Assembly palette

Constructionpalette

Assemblypalette

Modelingpalette

Reference Manual78

7.2.2 Two interfacesAmapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to display the modeling room tools:

You will be able to change this preference in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”>“Palettes display”> “Toolbox” (see details on page 456).

The “Toolbox” interface hasthe advantage of being familiaras it permanently displays allthe tools.

Amapi Pro displays four pal-ettes corresponding to the threetools palettes and the basictoolkit.

The “Tools palette” interface is particu-larly suited for 3D modeling as it closelymirrors the natural movement of thedesigner in front of his table or of the modelmaker in front of his workbench.

Amapi Pro will display only one toolspalette at a time, placing at your disposalonly the group of tools likely to be useful.The “Basic toolkit” will be displayedpermanently.You will have two methods to switch froma tools palette to the other:• by simply sweeping the cursor to the righthand side of the screen out of the windowand then moving it back towards the centerof the screen.•by clicking on the number sequence of thetools palette.

“Construction Palette”

“Modeling palette”

“Assembly palette”

By default, Amapi Pro displays the tools palettes on the right side of the screen. It’s also possibleto display them on the left side.’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “Right-handed palettes display” (seedetails on page 456).

79 Amapi ProT M

7.3 Using tools When to pick up a tool?A tool works on the current selection or on the selected objects (See “The concept ofselection” on page 147). It is often better to make the selection before picking the tool,although it is possible to change the selection while using the tool.

To pick up a tool, just click once on the icon which depicts the tool.

You will be able to pick up a tool from a tools palette only if there is not another tool in use.If a tool is in use, you will have to release this tool (see details on page 80) in order to beallowed to pick up a new tool.

If you choose the “Toolbox” interface (See “Two interfaces” on page 79):All the tools of the workshop are permanently at the disposal of the user, you will thereforebe able to pick up a new tool from any one of the four palettes (the three tools palettes andthe basic toolkit) at any moment.

If you choose the “Tools palette” interface (See “Two interfaces” on page 79):You might have to change the tools palette before picking up a tool.

On the other hand, you will be able to pick up a tool from the basic toolkit at any moment. Inthis case, the selection of a tool from the kit will automatically validate the tool in progress.

How to pick up a tool?Click on the icon showing the tool in the palette.

How to use a tool?• A tool is organized into a sequence of steps.

At each step, it is possible to tune some parameters (See “The Parameters” onpage 161). After validation, the tool switches to the next step.

• Some tools offer several working methods. They are called tool options (See “The toolsoptions and accessories” on page 83).

• Accessories are compliments to tools. They allow you specific -but not essential-operations (See “The tools options and accessories” on page 83).

• Amapi Pro can display a detailed help message explaining how to use the tool (See “TheHelp” on page 205).

How to end a tool action?• By validating the action (“Enter” key)Press the “Enter” key to validate an action. The tool will be automatically released and theuser will be able to continue his work with another selection and another tool.

Reference Manual80

• By releasing the toolThe tool will be released by hitting the right side of the screen with the cursor. The user willbe able to continue his work with another selection and another tool.

• By selecting another tool When selecting another tool, the current tool action is automatically validated.

• By cancelling (“Escape” key)It is possible to press the “Escape” key at anytime while using a tool. This action releases thetool and cancels the tool action. The scene will remain the same as before picking up thistool.

81 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual82

8 The tools options and accessories

When a tool is selected, Amapi Pro proposes, in a reserved area, a series of icons showingthe available options and accessories.

These are:

• “The tool options” (see details on page 84).

• “The tools options and accessories” (see details on page 83).

These options and accessories are proposed to theuser as a palette which can be repositioned. Thefirst icon of this palette depicts the current tool.

This options and accessories area can be hidden to free up more space for the graphicworkspace. See’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Tools options and accessoriesdisplay support area” (see details on page 455).

Current tool icon

Group of options

Accessory

83 Amapi ProT M

8.1 The tool options

8.1.1 What is a tool option?Tools are organized as a sequence of steps. Some of these steps allow you to select betweenseveral working methods or computing options. These methods or options are displayed onthe top right of the graphic workspace.

Some options can change the behavior and/or the number of steps:

In the following example, passing from one method-option to the other modifies thebehavior of the tool. The “Sphere” tool proposes two building methods:

“From the base”: At the first step of this method, the tool asks you to enter the

base point of the sphere, the diameter will then be set at the secondstep.

“From the center”:At the first step of this method, the tool asks you to enter the

center point of the sphere, the radius will then be set at the secondstep.

Other options do not change the behavior or the number of steps.Let's pick up the “Sphere” tool example again:

Pole sphere(default option)

Geodesic spherebased on a cube

Geodesic spherebased on

an icosahedron

Geodesic spherebased on

an octahedron

base

Dia

met

er

Rad

ius

Center

Reference Manual84

8.1.2 Selecting an optionFor each tool step, there is always a default option. There are several methods for selectinganother option:

• By clicking on the icon showing the desired option.This operation can be done at any step while using the tool

• It is possible to toggle quickly from one option to the other by pressing both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys. This operation can be made only when the options group ishighlighted as the current “options group”.

8.2 Tool accessoriesAccessories are not essential to the tools but are useful add-ons. They let you performparticular operations, such as:

Set a reference pointSeveral tools use a reference point. The rotation center, the reference point in thescale tool or for a symmetry axis are examples of reference points. Amapi Pro sets

them to a default position. The “reference point” accessory allows the user to set it.

Apply to allSeveral tools have an “Apply to all” accessory to apply the current operation to allelements. You can therefore automatically generate an action to close all facets,

group all displayed entities or apply a chamfer to an entire current object in just oneoperation. The shortcut is the “A” key.

Modify a particular parameterSome tools offer parameter setting accessories, such as the “spread” accessory in the“Wrap” tool which allows you to spread the projected surface in or out.

Turn off an actionSome tools have accessories that turn off a particular action.

85 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual86

9 The graphic environment

The user will work on the orthonormal base visualized as three gradated axis (see detailson page 88).

The working plane, on which the modeling will be done, (see details on page 89) is definedby the two axis the most parallels to the current view plane (see details on page 137). To create points in 3D, the user only has the use of a 2D mouse (or equivalent). He or shewill therefore have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See “TheNavigation” on page 135).

The orthogonal planes visualization will help for the orientation in the 3D graphicworkspace (See “The orthogonal planes” on page 90).

y

xz

y

x

z

Working plane Working plane

87 Amapi ProT M

9.1 The orthonormal baseOnly the two axis of the orthonormal base defining the current working plane are displayedwhile using the tools. They let you make precise alignments and simple constraints.Their color code is as follows: X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue).

9.1.1 The originIt is possible to move the origin of the orthonormal base at any time during modeling.This can be done by using the tool “Orthonormal base origin” (see details on page 173)located in the Control panel.

9.1.2 The gradationsIntervals can be set on the gradated axis of the orthonormal base.The interval can be increased or decreased by clicking on the assistant palette icons(keyboard shortcut: “+/-”) keys.

The interval of the gradation can be customized in the preferences menu:• The interval on the half axis length display (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic

environment”> “Rulers”> “Quarter axis (half-axis)” (see details on page 461).• Amapi Pro proposes two kinds of axis gradation: the complete or the limited axis

gradation (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Quarter axisgradation” (see details on page 461).

• The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base to have a betterunderstanding of the 3D space. A preference allows you to select:The location where it will be displayed (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”>“Rulers”> “Axis (Trihedron) size” (see details on page 462).The trihedron size (“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Display2D axis (2D Trihedron)”.or “Display 3D axis (3D Trihedron)” (see details on page 461)

9.1.3 The constraintsIt is possible to choose to snap or not to snap the cursor on the nodes of the virtual grid ofthe axis gradation (See “Snapping” on page 192). The toggling is set by clicking on the icon in the Control Panel.

Reference Manual88

While editing, Amapi Pro allows you to set movement constraints along one axis. Aconstrained movement allows you to restrict the action of the current tool on one of the twoaxis or set the action direction (See “Axis toggling” on page 193).The toggling is set by clicking on one of the icon in the assistant palette (keyboardshortcut: “Space-Bar”).

Amapi Pro proposes a series of “Advanced constraints” in a palette that the user canchoose to display or not by clicking on the toggle-icon integrated in the control panel.

(See “Advanced constraints” on page 194)

The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to create temporary alignment guides toconstrain the cursor while building 3D points. These guides are straight lines making

a singular angle (45 degrees, 90 degrees...) with the horizontal plane or a predefineddirection. These guides can be accumulated to allow singular line intersections. They canalso be oriented toward a specified axis. The control of these guides is entirely made withthe mouse. The guides disappear after each point created. The “Alignment guides” areenabled by clicking on a toggle-icon in “The Control panel”. (See “Alignment guides” onpage 196)

9.1.4 The coordinatesThe user can select to work in absolute mode, or in relative mode. (“Preferences editor”>“Units”> “Relative coordinates” (see details on page 474).

Amapi Pro proposes to display or not to display the cursor coordinates along the axis(“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Rulers”> “Local gradation” (see details onpage 461).

The current parameter value can follow the cursor movement if selected (“Preferenceseditor”> “Graphic environment” “Cursor”> “Cursor-parameter display” (see details onpage 463).

9.2 The working planeThe two axis the most parallel to the current view plane define the working plane, wherethe modeling will be done. The target is to create points in 3D with a 2D mouse (orequivalent). The user will have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See“The Navigation” on page 135).

89 Amapi ProT M

Sometimes, it could be necessary to work in a plane other than the standard planes. To dothis, click on the icon in the Control Panel to select a new working plane (See “Scene /orthonormal base toggling” on page 171).

In some cases, it can be interesting to work on the projection plane of the current view. Thismethod might make it easier to arrange objects in complex operations. To reach this, click onthe icon in the Control Panel (See “Working in the view plane” on page 169).

9.3 The orthogonal planesThe orthogonal planes displaying (xy), (xz) and (yz) can be useful for a better orientation inthe 3D graphic workspace. Specific preferences allow you to customize the display.It is also possible to map images in these planes to:

• Make a support for drawing construction curvesIt is possible to map an image of the object to be modelled on each plane, taken from twodifferent angles. Then, one would use the drawing tools to draw the object outlines oneach of the three planes. These curves can then be used to build the object in 3D.

• Place scenery to make an environment for the current scene.

(“Preferences editor”> “Graphic environment”> “Orthogonal planes”).

Construction of an object from its image projected onto the orthogonal planes.

Reference Manual90

10 The objects

10.1 The Types of objectsThere are two kinds of objects: “Curves” and “Surfaces / Volumes”.Each object created in Amapi Pro is represented graphically by curves or surfaces. Thisrepresentation is slightly different whether the object is a polyhedron or a NURBS so thatonly the editable elements of the object are shown.

10.1.1 CurvesA curve is an object made up of one or several lines. There are several kinds of lines.Generally, they are defined by a set of points. But some of them may include one or severalparameters. Lines can be drawn in two or three dimensions. Circles, arcs, rectangles,polylines, NURBS or interpolated curves are examples of lines (See “Line drawing” onpage 277).

Simple curve: Object made up of only one unique line.

Connected curves: Connected curves are several curves, where a curve has one end exactlysuperimposed with one end of another curve.

Composite curve: A composite curve is an object made up of a series of several lines with aconnection linking the ending points.

91 Amapi ProT M

10.1.2 Surfaces / VolumesA surface is made up of a set of facets. They can be drawn in two or three dimensions. Tubesand grids are examples of surfaces. Volumes are closed surfaces. Spheres and cubes areexamples of volumes.

10.2 Object namesAmapi Pro gives a default name to each object created by the user. The user can then changethis name at any time.

10.2.1 Default nameThe object default name is given by the tool it was built from followed by a creation ordernumber (See “The different levels of completion” on page 126).See the following example:

10.2.2 Changing the object nameThe user can change the name at anytime during modeling. The name change is done in theparameter palette when no tool is being used (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

Step #1:Draw a circle to be used as the section.

Step #2:Now, draw a path.

Step #3:The section is extruded following the path.

Step #4:Then, the object is smoothed.

The object’s default name is “Polyline 1”

The object’s default name is “Polyline 2”

The object’s default name is “Sweeping 1”

The object’s default name is “Smoothing 1”

Reference Manual92

Two cases can be defined:

The user works on the renamed object with a multi-operations tool. Some tools work onseveral objects (i.e: “Sweep”, “Cut”...).The generated object gets a default name.See the following example:

The user works on the renamed object with a one operand tool (except with dynamicgeometry). This is a tool works on only one object at a time (i.e: “Smooth”, “Chamfer”...):The renamed object transfers its name to the generated object.See the following example:

Step #1:Draw a circle to be used as the section.

Step #2:Now, draw a path.

Step #3:The section is extruded following the path.

Step #4:Then, the object is smoothed.

The object’s default name is “Polyline 1”.It is renamed “Section” by the user.

The object’s default name is “Polyline 2”.It is renamed “Profile” by the user.

The object’s default name is “Sweeping 1”

The object’s default name is “Smoothing 1”

Step #1:The user draws a circle to be used as the section.

Step #2:Now, he or she draws a path.

Step #3:The section is extruded following the path.

Step #4:Then, the object is smoothed.

The object’s default name is “Polyline 1”

The object’s default name is “Polyline 2”

The object’s default name is “Sweeping 1”It is renamed “Vase” by the user.

The object’s keeps its name “Vase”.

With Dynamic Geometry, the renamed objects will not transmit their name to the generatedobject.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

93 Amapi ProT M

10.3 Open / closed objectsThe difference between open objects and closed objects:

10.4 EntityAmapi Pro can works on the following entities:

Open curve Closed curve

Open volume: an open volume may haveone or several openings

Closed volume

object facets edges points

The notion of “group” notion can be added to the first four notions.A group is an element made up of 1 to n objects.A selected group has the same behavior as a selection of several objects.

In this example there is:- the “small-cube” object - the “Cylinder-cube” group made up of two objects (“Cylinder” and “cube”)

(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186)

It is possible to customize the display of the entities:’“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Entities display” (see details on page 465).

Reference Manual94

10.5 Displaying the objectsSeveral display modes can be selected from the control panel.

The “Wireframe” mode

The “Lit Wireframe” mode

The “Flat Solid” mode

The “WireShade Flat Solid” mode

The “Smooth Solid” mode

The “WireShade Smooth Solid” mode

Display with transparency effect

Display without transparency

For more details, see “Objects display” (see details on page 180).

The display mode of NURBS is different whether the application NURBS mode is set topolyhedral or NURBS. “Polygonal or NURBS Models” (see details on page 96):

When NURBS mode is on, points and edges cannot be edited, thus they are notdisplayed. A NURBS curve will be represented as a continuous curve. Isoparametric curves, contours and trimming curves will appear on NURBS surfaces. When NURBS mode is off, points and edges are displayed on NURBS curves andsurfaces. They can be used as reference points or edges for building new objects.However, they are not fully editable.(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

95 Amapi ProT M

10.6 Polygonal or NURBS ModelsAmapi Pro allows you to build curves, surfaces or volumes with either a polygonal or aNURBS method. It is important to understand the fundamental difference between these two kinds of modelsin order to select the construction mode which best fits the project.Polygonal modeling is fast and well adapted to modeling low resolution organic shapes usedfor illustration, video games, architecture. NURBS modeling allows you to create mathematically exact curves or surfaces independentof resolution. Although NURBS surfaces are more difficult to manipulate than polyhedralshapes, NURBS provide the accuracy necessary to the CAD or even CAM process.Most of Amapi Pro’s tools work in both modes almost transparently. • “The Polyhedral models” (see details on page 97).• “The NURBS models” (see details on page 98).Amapi Pro allows you to transform models NURBS to Polygons and inversely (see detailson page 105).

10.6.1 Change the construction modeThe construction mode defines:•The type of model to build (“Polygonal or NURBS Models”). •The display mode (see details on page 95)•The entity selection mode (See “Selection” on page 147)

The default working mode is the global construction mode (for all objects and tools). The user can change the construction mode while using a tool. This will be a local construc-tion mode.• Local switching will be done by clicking on the toggle-icon displayed in the tool option

panel of the tool that propose this option.• Global switching can be done:

• By clicking on the construction mode icon in the control panel. “Polygonal orNURBS Models” (see details on page 96).

• From the Tools menu. • By using the “Crtl-B” shortcut.A global switch while using a tool also forces the switch of the local mode.

Some tools create objects from existing objects. The result of such tools will be a NURBS only ifthe original objects are NURBS and if the construction mode is NURBS.

Reference Manual96

10.6.2 The Polyhedral models

10.6.2.1 What is a polyhedral model?A Polyhedral model is defined by a set of editable points, depicting the object topology.A polygonal curve is defined by a set of points connected by edges.A polyhedral surface is a set of adjacent planar polygonal facets. Each facet is delimited byits edges. Each edge is defined by its two points.An edge cannot belong to more than two facets. In such a case, the object is called“degenerated”.Each entity (point, edge or facet) can be edited directly. They can be moved, removed orsplit (edges and facets).

10.6.2.2 Create a polygonal modelThe user will select the polygonal mode when starting to draw curves or to buildsurfaces or volumes (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).

The tool will generate only one Dynamic Geometry level (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)”on page 109).

10.6.2.3 Edit a polygonal modelIn edit mode, the user will work directly on the points, edges or facets describing the object.

Polygonal curve Polygonal Surface

97 Amapi ProT M

10.6.3 The NURBS models

10.6.3.1 What is a NURBS model?A NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Spline) model is a parametric curve or surface definedby control points, a nodal sequence and a degree. The curve or surface is automaticallytesselated to give a smoothed shape. This shape is not editable. While moving the points ofthe “control” shape, the smoothed curve or surface aspect will change. This kind of model isvery often used in CAD/CAM because it allows you to create exact surfaces.

The tesselation is an operation consisting in creating a polygonal or polyhedralrepresentation of the theoretical NURBS model. This operation is performed automaticallyin two cases: during display (because graphic languages are not able to display NURBS) andduring export to file formats which do not support NURBS. A tesselation occurs also when aNURBS model is converted to a polyhedral model by hand.

NURBS curve and its control line NURBS surface and its control grid

Reference Manual98

10.6.3.2 NURBS CurveA NURBS curve is defined by its control points, a degree and a nodal sequence.

Control points are a set of 3D points createdby the curve creation tool. They act like mag-nets on the curve, but the curve does not passthough these points (except for the first andlast points and when the degree is 1). Thecurve’s shape can be changed by moving thecontrol points.

The degree of a NURBS curve is linked tothe number of control points having an effecton the curve at a given position. It defines thenumber of nodal points. A degree of 1 gives abroken line going through the control points.A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve movingslightly away from each control point. Thehigher the degree, the lower the influence ofeach control point. The curve will therefore besmoother as it moves away from the controlpoints.

The nodal sequence defines the influence of each control point on the curve. During thecurve creation, all points have the same influence except the first and last points. By addinga nodal point to the sequence, the curve can be adjusted locally or breaks can be added. Add-ing nodal points can be done using the “Polygonal or NURBS Models” (see details onpage 96) tool..

Control points (user defined) control polylineNURBS curve

Control points (user defined) NURBS curve of degree 1NURBS of degree2NURBS of degree 3

Curve with 4 nodal knotsDeformed Curve with 4 nodal knots

Control points Curve with 5 nodal knotsDeformed Curve with 5 nodal knots

Control points

Stretching the same NURBS curve with different nodal knots gives different result.

Stretched controlpoint

Stretched controlpoint

99 Amapi ProT M

The NURBS curve display mode depends on the global operating mode “Polygonal orNURBS Models” (see details on page 96).

When the global operating mode isNURBS, a NURBS curve is represented by asmoothed line. As opposed to polygonal lines,points are not displayed on NURBS curves. Infact, the NURBS curve can be «evaluated» byevery point of its curve.

When the global operating mode is Polyhe-dral, points are displayed on NURBS curves.These points can be used as constructionpoints for other operations but cannot beedited directly. The number of points dis-played depends on the range parameterdefined during the curve creation. The rangeis the number of edges displayed between twonodes (see details on page 293). The“Smooth” tool can be used to change therange of the curve and thus to change thenumber of points displayed.(See “Tesselation parameters of NURBS objects” on page 104).

The range is used only for :• Transforming a NURBS curve into a polygonal curve.• Displaying the curve.• Exporting the curve to polygonal formats. • Collapsing dynamic geometry.

Nodal pointsIntermediate points

Reference Manual100

10.6.3.3 NURBS SurfaceA NURBS surface is defined similarly to a NURBS curve by its control points, a degree anda nodal sequence.

A NURBS surface is always defined by arectangular control point grid. This grid isdeformed to fit the desired shape. Controlpoints act like magnets on the NURBS sur-face. By moving control points, the NURBSsurface can be deformed but the surface doesnot pass through the control points (except forextremities and when the degree is 1).

Obviously a grid cannot represent every typeof surface. Contours and holes are created byprojecting curves on the NURBS surface.These curves are called «trimming» curves.Amapi Pro’s cut tools are used to manuallycreate these trimming curves. Several toolswill automatically create the contours andtrimming curves on a surface.

The degrees of a NURBS surface are linkedto the number of control points that have aneffect on the NURBS surface for any given point. There are two degrees: one for the Udirection of the control point grid, the other for the V direction of the control point grid. Thisdefines the number of nodal points. A degree of 1 gives a broken line going through the con-trol points. A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve moving slightly away from each controlpoint. The higher the degree, the lower the influence of each control point and thus the curvewill be smoother as it moves away from the control points.

The Nodal sequence defines the influence of each control point on the surface. There aretwo knot vectors: one for the U direction of the control point grid and one for the V directionof the control point grid. At creation time, all the points have the same influence on the sur-face except border points. By adding a nodal point to the sequence, the curve can be adjustedlocally or breaks can be added.

NURBS Surface

Control points grid

Trimming hole

101 Amapi ProT M

The NURBS surface display mode depends on the global operating mode “Polygonal orNURBS Models” (see details on page 96).

When the global operating mode isNURBS, a NURBS surface is represented bya smoothed surface delimited by contour linesand two central isoparametric curves, allow-ing you to best view the surface shape. Onlythe contours can be edited. Isoparametriccurves cannot be edited. As opposed to poly-hedral surfaces, tesselation points and edgesare not displayed on NURBS surfaces.

When the global operating mode is Polyhe-dral, points and edges are displayed onNURBS surface. These points and edges canbe used as construction entities for other oper-ations but cannot be directly edited.

The number of points and edges displayeddepends on the range parameter defined dur-ing the curve creation. The range is the num-ber of edges displayed between two nodes(see details on page 293). The “Smooth” toolcan be used to change the range of the surface and thus to change the number of points dis-played.

(See “Tesselation parameters of NURBS objects” on page 104).

The range is used only for :• Transforming a NURBS curve into a polygonal curve.• Displaying the curve.• Exporting the curve to polygonal formats. • Collapsing dynamic geometry.

Isoparametric curves

Reference Manual102

10.6.3.4 BREP: «watertight» surfaces and volumesA BREP (Boundary Representation) is an object made up of one or several NURBS surfacesand topological links corresponding to the borders and intersections of these surfaces. ABREP can be open or closed. BREPs are useful for representing contiguous surfaces defining «watertight» or «crack-free»assemblies. This property allows you to export objects to CAD/CAM systems. SeveralAmapi Pro tools can create BREPs.

In fact, every NURBS surface in Amapi Pro is contained in a BREP.

Example of BREP.

10.6.3.5 Create a NURBS modelThe user will select the NURBS mode when starting to draw curves or to buildsurfaces or volumes (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).

The tool will generate two Dynamic Geometry levels corresponding to the object and itscontrol shape (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The BREP display is not «crack free». Holes may appear near the intersection of NURBSsurfaces of a BREP. Representing a crack-free BREP requires adapting the tesselation to thecurrent view. This action is time consuming and will significantly impact overall displayperformance.

BREPs with more than one face cannot be edited like simple NURBS surfaces. In fact,editing the control points of the contained NURBS surfaces would require recomputing thetopological links. This process is very time consuming, so it cannot be made in real time. Editingthe control points of a BREP requires dissociating its faces first.

103 Amapi ProT M

10.6.3.6 Edit a NURBS modelA NURBS is controlled by a control shape which is a polyline for a curve or a grid for avolume. This control shape level is just under the NURBS level in Dynamic Geometry hierarchy (seedetails on page 109). This level will be used to edit a NURBS object. The object deformation will follow the control shape modifications. The difference with the polygonal editing is that in NURBS mode the user doesn’t work onthe object itself, but on its control shape.

Nodal knots can be inserted, degrees can be changed and breaks can be created using thetesselation tool..

10.6.3.7 Tesselation parameters of NURBS objectsNURBS objects have several tesselation parameters used for display, transformation topolygonal objects and export to polygonal files formats. Two tesselation modes are availablefor the surfaces: • “Standard NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 370) with constant subdivisions

which creates regular polygons which are independent of the surface curvature. Thismethod is fast but does not keep the connection between adjacent surfaces. We say that itis not crack-free. We set a range in U and V which corresponds to the number of createdpoints between two nodal values. This is the default mode.

• “Adaptive NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 371) (crack-free) which createsmore polygons with strong curvatures and respects criteria for precise tolerance. Thismethod is slower than the preceding one but of better quality and the resulting surfacesare crack-free. You can set several parameters such as the maximum chord distance

BREPs with more than one face cannot be edited like simple NURBS surfaces. Actually,editing the control points of the contained NURBS surfaces would require recomputing thetopological links. This process is very time consuming, so it cannot be made in real time. Editingthe control points of a BREP requires dissociating its faces first.

Stretch a point on a polygonal object

Stretch a point on the control shape of a NURBS object(in NURBS mode)

Reference Manual104

between the theoretical surface and generated surface in order to guarantee a good sur-face approximation. You will also be able to specify geometric conditions defining thegeneral shape of the polygons created in order to obtain the most regular meshes possi-ble.

You can set the default tesselation and its parameters to create objects in Amapi Pro (See“Preferences editor” on page 451). You will also be able to configure tesselation parametersfor independent export. This will allow you to adapt the precision of the tesselation to theexport type. The tesselation of each object can be individually set with the “Tesselate” (seedetails on page 367) tool.

10.6.3.8 Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /a NURBS model into a Polygonal model

Transform a NURBS model into a Polyhedral modelIt is possible to transform a NURBS model into a polygonal model by collapsing itsDynamic Geometry (See “Collapsing a model built from NURBS” on page 120). Thistesselates the NURBS to create a polyhedral model by using the tesselation range.

Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS modelIt is possible to transform a NURBS model into a polyhedral model by creating, for eachfacet of the object, a NURBS surface while keeping the topological connections facet/edgesof the original surface. The resulting object is a BREP that can be used as input for complexNURBS operations.

This action can be accessed from the object information dialog (See “Information”on page 187)

If the object is a curve, Amapi Pro adds a Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to a 1degree NURBS curve above the original curve.If the object is a surface, the resulting object will be a BREP (see details on page 103) whichcan then be used for any complex operation on NURBS.When working in NURBS mode, all the basic primitives (cube, tetrahedron...) are all builton this model.This operation can be applied on DG operations such as boolean operations (See “Cut” onpage 354).

The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) : This tool adds a DG level to the object. The "Convert to NURBS" function adds a DG level labeled "Converted".(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

When applied to objects with many facets, this action can be very slow and create objects thatare difficult to manage.

105 Amapi ProT M

10.7 The objects with a grid-structure (Quad mesh)

An object with a grid-structure (Quad mesh) has been built from a deformed grid. This gridcan be open or closed.

A “Grid structure” object may be closed or not in U and/or in V:

The different kinds of closure can be:• The curves are closed in U or in V (such as Cylinder).• The curves are closed in U and in V (such as Torus).

The tools which generate grid-structure objects:• “Cone” (see details on page 266)• “Cylinder” (see details on page 267)• “Bump/Soften” (see details on page 385)• “Sweep” with “Section and profile from curves” (see details on page 310).

The tools which generate grid-structure objects create a first DG level labeled GridStructure. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The “Close” tool allows you to edit the connections and closures of the grid-structureobjects (see details on page 401).

The editor tools, which modify the object topology, destroy its grid-structure (See “Behaviorof the tools regarding the DG” on page 128).

Grid structurenot closed

Grid structureclosed in U(Cylinder)

Grid structureclosed in V

Grid structureclosed in U and in V

(Torus)

Reference Manual106

10.8 The clonesIn some tools (“Duplicate” and “Symmetry”...) Amapi Pro gives you the opportunity togenerate cloned objects.Clones are strictly identical objects which refer to one and only one unique geometry.Editing one of them automatically edits all of its clones.The difference between cloned or non-cloned objects will be fundamental as you begin amodeling operation.

Do not clone Clone

Option description

The tool generates independent objects. Each object has its own geometry (even if they are identical).

The tool generates objects which refer to the same geometry.

Illustration

To extract a cloned object from a group of clones:• Cut the cloned object (Ctrl+X) • Paste the object (Ctrl+V) (This kind of copy never generates clones)

Non-cloned objects

Deforming a non-cloned object.The other objects are not modified

Cloned objects

Deforming a cloned object.All the clones will have the same warping

107 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual108

11 Dynamic Geometry (DG)

11.1 The conceptDynamic Geometry is a concept that increases the power and the flexibility of Amapi Pro.Each step in the object's creation is saved. The user is able to edit any curve or surface it ismade up of. Amapi Pro will automatically reflect these changes up to the finished model.These curves or surfaces can be viewed as control shapes.

Dynamic Geometry with a simple example:

A toggle-icon from the Control Panel allows you to choose to work with or withoutDynamic Geometry:

Work without Dynamic Geometry Work with Dynamic Geometry

Step #1:Draw two construction curves.

Step #2:Extrude the section along the profile.Amapi Pro keeps the construction curves.

Step #3:Then smooth the object.Amapi Pro keeps the extruded object.

Step #4:If the result is not satisfying enough, modify the shape of the profile curve. This modification automatically and interactively updates the extrusion and the smoothing.

Section

Profile Stretched Point

109 Amapi ProT M

If the user chooses not to work with Dynamic Geometry, he or she will be able to edit acurve or a construction surface only after having cancelled all the modeling steps he or shehas performed since the creation of construction curves. He or she will have to resume hiswork of modeling starting from this step.

Same example as above but, this time, without working with Dynamic Geometry:

This short example shows how much DG can help to save time and improve quality andefficiency, when applied to much more complex models.

Step #1:Draw two construction curves

Step #2:Extrude the section along the profile.

Step #3:Then smooth the object.

Step #4:If the result is not satisfying enough, modify the shape of the profile curve. Cancel the action of the two last steps (Undo twice) to find the construction curves.

Step #5:Modify the shape of the profile curve.

Step #6:Extrude the section along the profile

Step #7:Then smooth the object.

Section

Profile

Stretched Point

Reference Manual110

11.2 The DG Tree

11.2.1 The shapes hierarchyWhen working with DG, Amapi Pro will record the modeling steps.

Dynamic Geometry can be represented as a tree where each node corresponds to an actionand each branch is an intermediate state of the final object (see details on page 126).

• The root of this tree is the finished object. • All the branches correspond to the intermediate states. • The leaves are the control shapes. • The DG level indicates the height in this tree, the highest level being the root of the tree.

Example of the DG levels for the vase:

The default name of a shape depends directly on the tools it has been built with. Itcorresponds to the name of its intermediate state followed by a number sequence. (See “Thedifferent levels of completion” on page 126). Obviously the user will be able to renameevery shape (See “Renaming a shape” on page 116).

Tools used

“Smooth” Level #3

Smoothing (finished object)

“Sweep” Level #2

Sweeping (intermediate shape)

“Polyline” Level #1

Polyline 1 (control shape) Polyline 2 (control shape)

111 Amapi ProT M

In our example Amapi Pro named the shapes by default:

11.2.2 The notion of path and current shapeThe complexity of this tree representing the DG of an object will depend on the complexityof the object. We will continue the example of the vase by adding a handle.

In our example Amapi Pro names the shapes as follows:

(See “The different levels of completion” on page 126)

the first line (the section) “Polyline 1”the second line (the profile) “Polyline 2”the shape resulting from thesweeping “Sweeping 1”the shape resulting from thesmoothing “Smoothing 1”

Step #1:Draw a circle.

Step #2:Add thickness.

Step #3:Smooth the object.

Step #4:Use of the Cut tool to make a Boolean operation on the two objects (vase and handle).

the circle “Polyline 3”the thick shape “Thickness 1”the smoothed shape “Smoothing 2”the cut shape “Cut 1”

Reference Manual112

Here is the tree corresponding to Dynamic Geometry of the new object:

Current path Other paths

In order to simplify the DG palette, Amapi Pro displays only the path of the tree passingthrough the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). It is called the“Current Path”. The shapes belonging to this path are called the “Current Shapes”.In the above example, the current shape of level #2 is “Thickness 1”.

Level #4 Cut 1

Cut 1

Level #3 Smoothing2

Smoothing 1 Smoothing 2

Level #2 Thickness1

Sweeping 1 Thickness 1

Level #1 Polyline 3

Polyline 1 Polyline 2 Polyline 3

Current selection

113 Amapi ProT M

For each level, the DG palette will display:

• The sequence level number.• A graphic label allowing the user to recognize the state

of completion of the shape. (See “The different levels ofcompletion” on page 126)

• The shape name of the current level.

In the preceding example the current selection is"Polyline 3" (the circle controlling the construction of thehandle) The DG palette will display the corresponding path.

If the current selection contains several objects belonging todifferent paths, Amapi Pro will be unable to choose acomplete "Current Path". In such a case the DG palette willdisplay "Multi-Selection" instead of the name of thecurrent shape.To illustrate this, we will suppose that, in the precedingexample, the shapes "Polyline 2" and "Polyline 3" are bothselected. Then the DG palette displays the correspondinginformation.

The user can view the complete tree by opening the object information window by pressing onthe icon from the control panel (See “Dynamic Geometry tree” on page 189).

1. Polyline 3

2. Thickness 1

4. Cut 1

3. Smoothing 2

Name of the shape

Number sequence of the level

Label

1. Multi-Selection

2. Multi-Selection

4. Cut 1

3. Multi-Selection

Reference Manual114

11.3 Manipulating DG

11.3.1 The DG paletteWe saw that Dynamic Geometry is a tree where the root is the finished object and the leavesare the control shapes (See “The shapes hierarchy” on page 111). We also saw that in order to simplify the display, the DG palette represents only the path ofthe tree passing through the current selection (See “The notion of path and current shape” onpage 112).

The DG palette corresponding to the vase example on page 111.

Available actions are;

• “Browsing the palette” (see details on page 116)• “Selecting the working level” (see details on page 116)• “Renaming a shape” (see details on page 116)• “Showing/Hiding a level” (see details on page 117)• “Collapsing the DG” (see details on page 118)• “Editing a DG level” (see details on page 123)• “Deleting the highest DG level” (see details on page 125)• “Displaying the result in interactive / delayed mode” (see details on page 125)

The display of Dynamic Geometry palette can be controlled from this icon located inthe Control Panel (See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

Name of the shape

Number sequence of the level

Label ofcompletion

Current level Deletes the highest level of DG

Interactive display of the result.

Delayed display of the result.

Visible

Hidden

Icons allowing to collapse the DG

115 Amapi ProT M

11.3.2 Browsing the paletteAmapi Pro does not limit the number of DGlevels but it displays only five levels at the sametime. In majority of cases this will be enough.In rare cases when the user will have generatedgenerated more than five levels, the palette willalways display:• the first and the last levels (in the example the

1st and 7th)• and three intermediate levels (in the example

3rd, 4th and 5th).A scroller allows you to go up or down in thehierarchy.

11.3.3 Selecting the working levelThe working level, highlighted by a red frame, corresponds to the level the user is workingon. Available actions are:• “Editing a DG level” (see details on page 123). • “Collapsing the DG” (see details on page 118).• “Renaming a shape” (see details on page 116).

Amapi Pro always sets a default working level. The user will be able to select another levelby clicking on the label corresponding to the selected level.

11.3.4 Renaming a shapeThe shape default name depends on the tools it was built with. It corresponds to thefinishing state followed by a number sequence (See “The different levels of completion” onpage 126).The user will be able to change the name of the object during any step of modeling. Editing the name is done in the parameter palette (See “The Parameters” on page 161).Notice that the parameter palette displays the name of the shape at the current working level.

1. Polyline

4. Twist

5. Cut

7. Smoothing

3. Sweeping

Reference Manual116

To rename a shape, make sure that:

• The shape to rename is the “current shape”(See “The notion of path and current shape”on page 112).

• The “working level” is set at the level of theshape to rename (See “Selecting the workinglevel” on page 116).

Editing the name is done in the parameters palette(See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

11.3.5 Showing/Hiding a levelAmapi Pro displays by default, in the graphic workspace, the finished shape and the controlshape only (See “Selecting the working level” on page 116).However, the user will be able to choose to hide or show intermediate shapes. A toggle-icon allows you to switch on/off the visibility.

Visible level Hidden level

If a real time display is selected, it should be noted that the fact of hiding one or more DGlevels can accelerate the display significantly.If, for particularly complex objects, the user considers that the display time is still too longhe or she can change the display up to the tool validation stage (See “Displaying the result ininteractive / delayed mode” on page 125).

3. Smoothing 1

2. Sweeping 1

In this example the user can rename the shape named by default “Sweeping 1”.

Name editing is done in the parameter palette

1. Polyline 2

Sweeping 1

117 Amapi ProT M

Once more, let us take the example of the vase as seen on page 111:

The working (current) level isthe level #1 (it is highlighted).Amapi Pro displays the firstand the last DG levels bydefault.

It will often be interesting todisplay all the shapescorresponding to the threelevels of DG.

In some cases it could beclearer to hide a level tosimplify the display. The userchooses to hide the level #3 ofDG.

In this last example, the userchooses to hide the levels #2and #3 of DG in order to seeonly the control shapes.

11.3.6 Collapsing the DGThe user will be able to choose to collapse the DG on a portion of the current path. Thepurpose of this operation is to make one of the intermediate shapes editable.It removes the DG levels under the selected shape. The shape corresponding to this levelwill simultaneously lose its dynamic characteristics and will become an editable controlshape (See “The first level of finishing (control shapes)” on page 126).

The user will indicate the level to collapse by clicking on the icon facing it.

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3.Smoothing 1

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

Reference Manual118

11.3.6.1 Collapsing a Polygonal modelonce more, let us take the example of the vase as seen on page 111:

1) All the objectscorresponding to thethree levels of DG aredisplayed.Only the curves oflevel #1 are editable

2) A DG collapse fromlevel #2 (Sweeping)has been requested.Level #1 (Polyline) isremoved.The shape correspond-ing to Sweeping losesits dynamic character-istics and becomes aneditable control shape(Structure of a grid) oflevel #1.

3) The DG has been col-lapsed from level #2(Smoothing).Level #1 (Structure of agrid) is removed.The shape correspond-ing to Smoothing losesits dynamic character-istics and then becomesan editable object(polyhedral Volume).

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

1. Sweeping 1

2. Smoothing 1

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

Clic

1. Smoothing 1

1. Grid structure

2. Smoothing 1

Clic

119 Amapi ProT M

11.3.6.2 Collapsing a model built from NURBSThe shapes generated with NURBS tools have a particularity explained in the examplebelow.

We will use the example of a vase again. But this time, it will be made starting from asection and a NURBS profile.Note that, in this case, the control shapes of the NURBS curves are editable.

Current path Other paths

Sweeping 1 Level #3

Sweeping 1(finished object)

NURBSCurve 2 Level #2

NURBS curve 1(intermediate shape)

NURBSNURBS curve 2(intermediate shape)

Polyline 2 Level #1

Polyline 1(control shape)

Polyline 2 (control shape)

Current selection

Reference Manual120

Amapi Pro creates, for this type of object, a NURBS control polygon.This NURBS control polygon does not appear in the DG tree.

The tree below represents the finished object (Sweeping 1) controlled by the control polygoncomputed by Amapi Pro.

The only way to control the object with the control polygon is to collapse the DG. The icon shows this possibility.

NURBS Volume 1 Level #2

Sweeping 1(finished object)

Grid Structure 1 Level #1

Grid Structure 1(control shape)

121 Amapi ProT M

We will illustrate this process with the preceding example:

1) All the objectscorresponding to thethree levels of DG aredisplayed.Only the curves oflevel #1 are editable.

2) A DG collapse fromlevel NURBS#3 hasbeen requested. Levels#1 and #2 are removedand replaced by aNURBS surface. Thisis the control shape ofthe final object.

3) Now, it is possible tocollapse the NURBSsurface by clicking onthe level correspondingto NURBS surface(level #2).Amapi Pro removeslevel #1 and theNURBS Surface istransformed into apolyhedral Surface(editable finishedobject).This second collapsingdeletes the NURBSproperties of the object.

1. Polyline 2

2. NURBS Curve 2

3. Sweeping 1

1. Grid-structure

2. Sweeping 1

1. Polyline 2

2. NURBS Curve 2

3. Sweeping 1

Click

Click

1. Grid-structure

2. Sweeping 1

1. Sweeping 1

Reference Manual122

11.3.7 Editing a DG levelIt is very important to understand that only the lowest level of DG (level #1) is completelyeditable by the editing tools. The higher levels carry out topological modifications. Theireffects will be reflected in all the higher levels and to the clones (See “The clones” onpage 107). The “Stretch”, “Mold”, “Weld”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Delete” tools areexamples of editing-tools. (See “Behavior of the tools regarding the DG” on page 128).To edit another level, the user will have to collapse the DG. The shape corresponding to thislevel will simultaneously lose its dynamic attributes and will become an editable controlshape (See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118).

1) Only the curves oflevel #1 are editable. Inthe example, polyline 3(construction circle ofthe handle) is scaled.The effects of theediting is automaticallyapplied to the finishedobjects.

2) A DG collapse fromlevel #4 (Cutting) hasbeen requested. Thelevel #1, #2 and #3 areremoved. The shapecorresponding toSmoothing loses itsdynamic attributes andthen becomes aneditable finished object(polyhedral Volume).

1. Polyline 3

2. Thickness 1

3. Smoothing 2

Editing of the circle with the “Scale” tool

4. Cut 1

1. polyhedral Vol

1. Polyline 3

2. Thickness 1

3. Smoothing 2

Click

Editing of the finished object with the “Mold” tool

4. Cut 1

123 Amapi ProT M

The “Snap/Align”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Move” tools can edit a shape at any level ofDG. Once more we will use the example of the vase. This time we will consider that the "currentselection" is the shape Polyline 1. The DG palette will thus display a different "current path"(see below).

3) Only the curves oflevel #1 are editable.The user clicks on theDG level #2 so that itbecomes "currentlevel".The shape Sweeping 1becomes thus editable.It is automaticallymade visible.

4) The user then asks toscale the shapeSweeping 1 vertically.The “Scale” toolapplies a scaling to theentire Sweeping 1shape.The effect of thescaling is automaticallyapplied up to thefinished object.

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

1. Polyline 1

4. Cut 1

1. Polyline 1

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

4. Cut 1

Click

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

Editing of level 2 of DG with the “Scale” tool

1. Polyline 1

4. Cut 1

Reference Manual124

11.3.8 Deleting the highest DG levelThis icon in thelower right corner of

the DG palette removes thehighest level of DG.

11.3.9 Displaying the result in interactive / delayed mode

When a shape is being edited by a tool such as the Stretch tool, Amapi Pro updates allthe levels of DG for any mouse event. For complex objects, this real time update may

become too slow. The following toggle-icon delays the updating until the first mouse releaseevent:

Interactive display of the resultDelayed display of the result

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

1. Polyligne 2

2. Tubage 1

3. Lissage 1

1. Polyline 2

2. Sweeping 1

3. Smoothing 1

Clic

While transforming

Before transformation

After validationof the transformation

Before transformation

While transforming

After validationof the transformation

Interactive display of the

Delayed display of the result

125 Amapi ProT M

11.3.10 The different levels of completionThe levels of completion informs the user of the type of object it is handling. It dependsdirectly on the tools that object was built with. It is identified by a graphic "label" and the"name".

11.3.10.1 The first level of finishing (control shapes)

The default name of an object depends directly on its state of completion (See “Object names”on page 92).

Labels and wordings Types of objects

Polyline •“Rectangle / Square”•“Circle” •“Polyline” •“Helicoid” •“Extract Lines”

Polyhedral Volume •“Sphere” •“Cube”•“Tetrahedron”•“Octahedron”•“Icosahedron”•“Dodecahedron”(See “The Polyhedral models” on page 97)

Grid structure

(See “The objects with a grid-structure (Quad mesh)” on page 106)

•“Cone”•“Cylinder”•“Bump/Soften”•“Grid”

Text “Text”

Deformation box The objects being deformed with the “Bend”, “Twist” or “Taper” options proposed in the “Deform” tool replace the DG of the object by a Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to “The meshed control box editing accessories” (see details on page 376)

Parameter(s) Editable parameters.

Reference Manual126

11.3.10.2 The intermediate levels of finishing

Labels and wordings Types of objects

NURBS curve “Curve controlled by a polyline

Interpolated curve “Interpolated curve”

Composite curve Curves them by composite connections:(See “Composite (curve)” on page 482)(See “Close” on page 400)

Arc “Arc”

Sweeping Object being extruded using the “Sweep” tool (Extrusion or Sweeping option).

Double Sweep Shapes obtained with the “Double Sweep” tool starting from a basic section and two profiles.

Ruled Surfaces “Ruled Surface”

Coons Surfaces “Coons Surface”

Gordon Surfaces “Gordon surface”

Manifold Volume Object obtained with the “Manifold” tool, starting from NURBS surfaces which delimits the future volume.

Deformation Objects being deformed with the “Deform” tool.

Smoothing Objects being smoothed with the “Smooth” tool.

Chamfer Result of one of the chamfers proposed by the “Chamfer” tool.

Bending Object bent with the “Bend” tool.

Thickness Object thickened with the “Thickness/Offset” tool and the “Give a thickness” option.

Cut Object changed by an operation of cutting with the “Cut” tool.

Height field Object transformed with the “Bump/Soften” tool.

Group Objects grouped with the “Group” tool located in the Control panel.A group will always be at the highest level of DG.

NURBS Volume NURBS shape obtained by DG collapse of a shape built starting from NURBS curves.

Poly-NURBS NURBS shape which can be manipulated like a polyhedron.The platonic NURBS (“Tetrahedron”, “Dodecahedron”, “Octahedron” and “Icosahedron”) and the polyhedral objects transformed in NURBS (see details on page 105) generate a “Poly-NURBS” DG level.

Multi-Selection If there are two selections not belonging to the same path, Amapi Pro is not able to choose a complete "current path". In such a case the DG palette will display "Multi-Selection" labels.

127 Amapi ProT M

11.3.11 Behavior of the tools regarding the DGOverview of the behavior of the tools regarding Dynamic Geometry for each palette.

There are five categories of tools:

• The tools that add a DG level.For example all the tools of the construction palette add a DG level.Some tools can insert a DG level between two existing levels.The “Smooth”, “Chamfer”, “Bump/Soften” tools add a DG level.

• The tools that transmit the DG to the generated object. “Duplicate”, “Symmetry” are examples of tools which transmit the DG.

• The tools which edit the 1st DG level.The edit-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at thehigher levels and to the clones.“Snap/Align”, “Delete”, “Mold”, “Weld”, “Rotate”, “Close”, “Scale” and “Stretch” toolsare examples of edit-tools. “Snap/Align”, “Rotate” and “Scale” tools edit the entire shape at any level of DG.(See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

• The tools which preserve the DG.“Move” and “Lay on” tools modify only the position of the shape, they thus do not makeany topological modifications. They can be applied to any DG level. Their effects will bereflected at the higher levels.

• The rare tools which collapse the DG (See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118). “Decimate” and some functions proposed by the “Information” tool are DG collapsers.

Reference Manual128

11.3.11.1 The tools of the construction palette

Tools Generates a DG levelLabels and wording

Other behaviors

“Surface and volume primitives”

Polyhedral “Cube”

Polyhedral “Cube” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Cube” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

NURBS Pole-“Cube” NURBS Volume

Grid structure

“Sphere”

Polyhedral “pole-sphere” polyhedral volume

NURBS “pole-sphere” NURBS volume

polyhedral volume

NURBS “geodesic Sphere” not available

“Cone”

Polyhedral “Cone” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Cone” NURBS volume

Grid structure

“Cylinder”

Polyhedral “Cylinder” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Cylinder” NURBS volume

Grid structure

“Tetrahedron”

Polyhedral “Tetrahedron” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Tetrahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Octahedron”

Polyhedral “Octahedron” polyhedral volume

129 Amapi ProT M

NURBS “Octahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Icosahedron”

Polyhedral “Icosahedron” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Icosahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Dodecahedron”

Polyhedral “Dodecahedron” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Dodecahedron” Poly-NURBS

polyhedral volume

“Bump/Soften” Grid structure

“Grid”

“Grid” polyhedral Grid structure

“Grid” NURBS NURBS volume

Grid structure

“Text” Text

“Line drawing”

“Rectangle / Square”

Polyhedral “Rectangle / Square” Polyline

NURBS “Rectangle / Square” NURBS curve

Polyline

“Circle”

Polyhedral “Circle” Polyline

NURBS “Circle” NURBS curve

Polyline

“Arc” Arc

Parameter(s)

“Polyline” Polyline

Polyhedral “Polyline” Polyline

NURBS “Polyline” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

Reference Manual130

11.3.11.2 The tools of the modeling palette

“Curve” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

“Interpolated curve” Interpolated curve

Polyline (of control))

“Helix” Polyline

Polyhedral “Helix” Polyline

NURBS “Helix” Not available

“Connexion composite” Composite curve

“Extract Lines”

Polyhedral “Extract Lines” Polyligne

NURBS “Extract Lines” NURBS curve

Polyline (of control)

“Extract Facets”

Polyhedral “Extract Facets” polyhedral volume

NURBS “Extract Facets” NURBS Volume

Grid structure

“Sweep” Sweeping

“Double-Sweep” Double sweeping

“Ruled Surface” Ruled surfaces

“Coons Surface” Coons surfaces

“Gordon surface” Gordon surfaces

“Manifold” Controlled volume

Tools Generates a DG levelLabels and wording

Other behaviors

“Deform”

“Stretch” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Bend”

“Twist”

“Taper”

Deformation

Deformation box

Replaces the DG of the object

131 Amapi ProT M

“Spherize” Deformation Replaces the DG of the object

“Smooth” Smoothing*

“Chamfer” Chamfer*

“Thickness/Offset”

“Give a thickness” Thickness*

“Create an offset copy” Transmits the DG

“Cut” Cut

“Tesselate” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Delete”

“Bump/Soften” Height field*

“Bend” Bending

“Mold” Edits the 1st level of DG

Reference Manual132

11.3.11.3 The tools of the assembly palette

11.3.11.4 The tools of the basic toolset

Tools Generates a DG levelLabels and wording

Other behaviors

“Duplicate” Transmits the DG

“Symmetry” Transmits the DG

“Close” Edits the 1st level of DG

“Weld”

“Weld objects” Edits partially the DG

“Weld points onto an object”

“Weld points close to each other”Edits the 1st level of DG

“Snap/Align” Edits the 1st level of DGCan be applied on all the levels. Preserves the DG

“Lay on” Can be applied on all the levels. Preserves the DG

“Wrap” Projection

“Unfold” Collapses the DG

“Decimate” Collapses the DG

Tools Generates a DG levelLabels and wording

Other behaviors

“Move” Can be applied to all the levels. Preserves the DG

“Rotate” Edits the 1st level of DG(Can be applied to all the levels on the entirety of a shape)

“Scale” Edits the 1st level of DG(Can act on all the levels on the entirety of a shape)

“Stretch” Edits the 1st level of DG

133 Amapi ProT M

11.3.11.5 The tools of the control panel

11.3.12 Error messages

11.3.13 The colour of the text labelsThe colour of the text labels in the dynamic geometry panelindicates warnings and errors on the corresponding shapes.

Error: The shape contains build errors and is not valid. Warning: The shape contains some build warnings. OK: The shape is correct

11.3.13.1 If Amapi Pro cannot build the geometryWhen an error occurs, ifAmapi Pro cannot build thegeometry, an error symboland an error message aredisplayed as in thefollowing example:

Tools Generates a DG levelLabels and wording

Other behaviors

“Group, Ungroup” Group A group will always be at the highest level of DG

“Information” : “Convert to NURBS” Poly-NURBS

Reference Manual134

12 The Navigation

Amapi Pro allows you to work on a model from any viewpoint at any time. The user willappreciate how easy it is to move around the scene: rotating around objects, zooming in andout on specific details.Amapi Pro offers several interfaces giving access to different navigational functions• “The Navigation Palette” (see details on page 136)• “The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142) (keyboard only or keyboard+mouse

combination).

Some navigation functions are not available in both interfaces!See the following table for details

“The NavigationPalette”(see details on page 136)

“The keyboardnavigation”(see details on page 142)

“Viewpoint” (see details on page 137)

“View All” (see details on page 139) (see details on page 142)

“View Detail” (see details on page 140) (see details on page 142)

View Selection (see details on page 142)

“Zoom In / Out” (see details on page 140) (see details on page 145)

“Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141) (see details on page 143)

“Pan the scene” (see details on page 141) (see details on page 144)

“Make a direct viewpoint change” (see details on page 142)

135 Amapi ProT M

12.1 The Navigation Palette

The Navigation Palette will allow you to see the scene from any viewpoint.

This palette allows you to:• “Set a viewpoint” (see details on page 138)• “Record the current viewpoint” (see details on page 138)• “Recall a viewpoint” (see details on page 139)• “Delete a viewpoint” (see details on page 139)• “View All” (see details on page 139)• “View Detail” (see details on page 140)• “Zoom In / Out” (see details on page 140)• “Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141)• “Pan the scene” (see details on page 141)

With a little experience the user will probably prefer using the keyboards shortcuts tonavigate with (See “The keyboard navigation” on page 142). This will also let you

free up space in the graphic workspace (See “Manage the optional palettes display” onpage 168). This icon allows you to hide the navigation palette.

Reference Manual136

12.1.1 ViewpointThe Viewpoint is what the user can see. It is defined by the user’s eye position, thetarget position and the orientation in 3D space.

• The eye position is the point that the scene is viewed from.

• The target point is the point the eye looks at. The Target Point is also the center ofrotation of the scene (when rotating the scene to change the viewpoint). It is also thecenter point for zooming the scene in and out of the scene. The “Viewpoint” tool allows you to set, record and recall a viewpoint.

• The view plane is perpendicular to the eye - target point axis.The view plane of the current view is projected onto the screen.

Viewpoint definition

View seen from the above viewpoint

Champ de vision

œil de l’observateur

Objets composant la scène Situés dans le champ de vision

P i t i é

Objet composant la scène Situé hors du champ de vision

View plane Field of view

Object in scene Out of the field of view

Objects of the scene In the field of view

Target Point

observer’s eye

137 Amapi ProT M

12.1.1.1 Set a viewpointSetting the current viewpoint consists of positioning the “eye” and the “target point”. Theseparameters can be set through the “Eye” and “Target point” options. Toggling from one tothe other option can be done through both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys shortcut or bysimply clicking on the icon showing the desired option.

12.1.1.2 Record the current viewpointIf a viewpoint is often used, it is possible to record it and to recall it when needed. Proceedas follows:

1) Set the current viewpoint as desired. To do this use either “The Navigation Palette” (seedetails on page 136), or “The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142), or use the“Viewpoint” tool for more precision (See “Set a viewpoint” on page 138)

2) When ready, set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel.Click on the right mouse button.

3) Click on “Save” to record the current viewpoint. Amapi Pro saves the viewpoints withthe name “view” followed by a number.

Target point Eye

Parameters editable in thegraphic area

and parameter palette

xyz

xyz

The setting of the viewpoint is a tool to position the eye and the target point. This is differentfrom navigating (see details on page 142) which moves them.

Keyboard shortcut: key “7”.

Keyboard shortcut: validate with Ctrl “Enter”.

Reference Manual138

12.1.1.3 Recall a viewpointTo recall a saved viewpoint (See “Record the current viewpoint” on page 138):

1) Set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel.Click on the right mouse button. The list of the saved viewpoints will be displayed.

2) Slide the cursor over the name of the viewpoint to be recalled and click. Amapi Pro willautomatically display the scene from this viewpoint.

12.1.1.4 Delete a viewpointViewpoints can be deleted as follows:

1) The viewpoint to be deleted must be the current one (see details on page 139).

2) Set the cursor on the “Viewpoint” icon in the control panel. Click on the right mouse button.

3) Click on: “delete” to eliminate this viewpoint.

12.1.2 View AllThis function recalculates the scene view, so that all objects are visible.

Keyboard shortcut: keyboard shortcuts are automatically created to access each viewpoint: • Ctrl+0 to see the scene from the first viewpoint in the list.• Ctrl+1 to see the scene from the second viewpoint in the list.• … and so on

Before “View all” After “View all”

“View all” automatically sets the target point position (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) at thegeometrical center of the scene.

Keyboard shortcut: key “0”.

139 Amapi ProT M

12.1.3 View DetailUse this function to zoom in a detail of the scene..

1) Click on the icon in the navigation palette, or click in the “1” key.

2) A rectangle is drawn around the cursor. Position it in the center of the area of interest,then click.

3) Move the cursor to surround the intended area, then click.

12.1.4 Zoom In / OutThis navigation icon zooms in on the scene. Click and hold down the left mousebutton on the icon. When moving the cursor upward, you will zoom in toward the

default target point located in the center of the scene, and if the cursor is moved downward,you will zoom out of the scene from the target point. When the correct view is displayed,release the mouse button.

Before “View Detail” After “View Detail”

View detail sets the target point position (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) at the geometricalcenter of the detail.

Keyboard shortcut: key “1”.

Zoom In Zoom Out

Keyboard shortcut: keys “3” and “.” or mouse wheel.

Reference Manual140

12.1.5 Pan the scene This navigation icon pans the scene. Click and hold down the left mouse button onthe icon. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the scene upward, moving the cursor

downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sideways scrolls the scene sideways.When the correct view is displayed, release the mouse button.

12.1.6 Rotate around the sceneThis navigation icon rotates around the scene. Click and hold down the left mousebutton on the icon. Move the cursor upward or downward, and the scene will rotate

step by step around the viewpoint of the scene. When the correct view is displayed, releasethe mouse button.

Sideway movement toward the left...

...followed byan upward movement

The Target point (See “Viewpoint” on page 137) is scrolled with the scene.

Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl-Arrow” or mouse central button.

Turn toward the right... ....then turn upward

Keyboard shortcut: “Arrow” keys.

141 Amapi ProT M

12.2 The keyboard navigation The “keyboard” navigation has the following advantage:• allows you to hide the navigation palette• makes manipulations easier• allows you to navigate the scene without stopping the current modeling action.

12.2.1 Make a direct viewpoint change

01

View All (see details on page 139)View Detail (see details on page 140)

.3

Zoom Out (see details on page 140)Zoom In (see details on page 140)

245689

Front View Left View Top ViewRight View Rear View Bottom View

Themain viewpoints

7 Viewpoint (see details on page 138)

Cycling around the main viewpoints: If the “shift” key isheld down when using the arrow keys, the viewpoint will besuccessively switched to each main viewpoint, in thedirection indicated by the arrow.

View selection: When pressing simultaneously the “Ctrl”+ “.” keys, Amapi Pro will center the view on the currentselection.

Current selection: two edges from the cube and one facet of the prism

The view after “View selection”

Reference Manual142

12.2.2 Progressive viewpoint tuning

12.2.2.1 To rotate around the scene

Using the arrows:

Using the keyboard and the mouse:

1) Simultaneously press the “Ctrl” key and the left mouse button.

2) Move the cursor to move the observer’s eye around the scene. The rotation will be madestep by step around the viewpoint.

3) When the correct view is displayed, release the keyboard and mouse buttons.

Turn toward the right... ....then turn upward

Use the right, left, up and down keyboard arrows to rotatearound the scene.The rotation will be made step by step around a targetpoint which by default is the center of the scene. Of course, the Left arrow key moves the viewpoint towardthe left, the Up arrow key moves the viewpoint upward,etc.

To change the position of the target point, please refer to the Section 12.1.1.1 “Set a viewpoint”on page 138.

143 Amapi ProT M

12.2.2.2 Panoramic view of the scene

Using the arrows:

Using the keyboard and the mouse:

1) Simultaneously press the “Ctrl+Alt” key and click on the left mouse button.

2) The scene scrolls around from side to side. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the sceneupward, moving the cursor downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sidewaysscrolls the scene sideways…

3) When the correct view is displayed, release the keyboard and the mouse buttons.

Using the mouse:

1) Click on the central mouse button.

2) The scene scrolls around from side to side. Moving the cursor upward scrolls the sceneupward, moving the cursor downward scrolls the scene downward and moving sidewaysscrolls the scene sideways…

3) When the correct view is displayed, release the mouse button.

Sideway movement toward the left....

...followed byan upward movement

To have a panoramic view of the scene (that is to sayscrolling around the scene from side to side), press andhold the “Control” key and use an arrow key as previouslyindicated.

Reference Manual144

12.2.2.3 Zoom In / Out

Using the numeric pad keys:

Using the mouse wheel:Rotate the wheel up to zoom in, down to zoom out.

Zoom In Zoom Out

3

.

Progressive Zoom In: Press the “3” key to zoom in.

Progressive Zoom Out:Press the “.” key to zoom out.

145 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual146

13 Selection

13.1 The concept of selectionSelection consists of marking a set of items beforeapplying an action to them (See “Entity” on page 94).

All tools have an effect on every selected element (wecall this the “current selection”), except for the “Linedrawing” and “Surface and volume primitives” tools.

It is recommended that you proceed to the selectionbefore picking up the tool. However, the selection can bemodified while using the tool.

A “selected object” is an object that has at least one of its elements marked as selected.

You will proceed to a selection by using:

• “The selection accessories” (see details on page 148).They allow you to graphically mark the elements to be selected.

• “Memo-Select” (see details on page 158).It allows you to save a selection and recall it later.

• “The Scene graph” (Alt-T) (see details on page 202).

• “Searching for objects (Alt+F)” palette (see details on page 217)

147 Amapi ProT M

13.2 The selection accessoriesAmapi Pro contains two kinds of selection accessories:

• “The selectable entities”: object, facet, edge or point.(See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

• “The selection methods” (See “The selection methods” on page 150).

The cursor shape will show the selectable entity type and the current selection accessory.

The selection feedback color can be customized from the “Preferences editor”(Alt-P)>“Entities display”> “Color of the selected object” (see details on page 467).

You will be able to personalize the display of the entities detected when you roll over themwith the cursor:’“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Entity highlight display (facet, edge or point)” (seedetails on page 469).

When a selection can be made?: a selection can be made before picking up a tool or frominside the tool.

Selection applies only on visible elements. In other words, it works in a transparent orwireframe display mode, the elements located on the back side of the object can be selected butthis will not be possible when using a solid display mode. (See “Objects display” on page 180).

Reference Manual148

13.2.1 The selectable entities Selectable entities are: objects, facets, edges or points (See “Entity” on page 94). Select an entity by clicking on one of the selection accessories. The shape of the cursor will show the selectable entity.

Entities Objects Facets Edges Points

Selection accessories icons

Cursors

Default selectable entity:By default, that is before selecting a tool and a selection accessory:• the default selectable entity is “object” and two selection modes are available at this step (See

“Default selection mode” on page 157)• clicking on a selection accessory will automatically switch to “Point”.Some tools force the selectable entity:• the selectable entity is switched to “Point” when entering into some tools such as (“Stretch”,...).• switched to selectable entity “Facet” when entering in certain tools such as (“Tesselate”,...).

Default selection accessory:When no selection accessory is selected and no tool used, click on one of the selectable entities“Facet” “Edge” or “Point” to be automatically switched to the “Single object selection”selection accessory (see details on page 151).

Selecting a group of objects behaves in the same way as selecting several objects (See“Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

149 Amapi ProT M

13.2.2 The selection methodsA selection accessory corresponds to a selection method. You will have the choice amongseveral selection accessories:

“Single object selection”

“The Personalized

Lasso Selection”

“The Rectangular

Lasso Selection”

“Select “1 over n””

“Extend/Restrict the selection”

“Select by angle”

“Deselect all”

(see details on page 151)

(see details on page 153)

(see details on page 153)

(see details on page 155)

(see details on page 155)

(see details on page 156)

(see details on page 157)

Default selection accessory:When no selection accessory is selected and no tool used, click on one of the selectable entities“Facet” “Edge” or “Point” to be automatically switched to the “Single object selection” (seedetails on page 151) selection accessory.

In NURBS mode, (see details on page 98), the selection of points is only possible by using the“Single object selection” method. Other selection methods do not apply.In fact, all the points of a NURBS curve or surface are defined and a point of a NURBS objectcan be evaluated anywhere. When the user wants to select a point on an object of this type,this point will be computed at the time of selection (and not taken among the ones computedfor the display). It is not possible to search all the points of a curve or of a surface in a givenspace (as made by the lasso or rectangular selection accessories) because they are at infinity.For the same reason, search by proximity does not exists in NURBS mode. In polyhedral mode, search by proximity allows you to click close to the point to be selected andthe tool will search and select the point of the object which is the nearest to the cursor. In thisway, the user is sure to select the point he wanted in one click.In NURBS mode, the selected point will be exactly the one aimed at by the cursor.The selection must be made precisely on the curve or on the surface to take effect. If thiscondition is not respected, no point will be selected.(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)

Reducing the selection palette:Amapi Pro has numerous keyboard or mouse shortcuts which allow you to switch quickly fromone selection method to another (see the paragraph dedicated to a method for a shortcuts list).Once familiar with the shortcuts, the user might choose to hide the icons showing the methodsaccessories to free graphic workspace.

Reduce the palette

Open the palette

Reference Manual150

13.2.2.1 Single object selectionWith this method, Amapi Pro detects and highlights the element of the currentobject that is closest to the cursor and matches the selectable entity (facets, edges or

points). The user can select or deny the detected element by using one of the followingmethods:

The reverse selection:

• add a new element to the currentselection (click on a not selectedelement).

• remove an element already selected fromthe current selection (click on a selectedelement).

The add selection: adds an element tothe current selection. Just hold the “Shift”key during the selection.

A shortcut launches the lasso and rectangle selection accessories. • From the “Single object selection” method the shortcut will switch to the “The Personalized Lasso

Selection” accessory.The transition will be obtained by clicking on the right mouse button.

• From all the other accessories, you will be switched to the “Single object selection” method.The transition will be obtained by clicking on the mouse right button.

• From the “The Personalized Lasso Selection” method the shortcut will switch to the “The RectangularLasso Selection” method Click and hold to obtain the transition.

When there are no selection accessory selected and no tool used, there are two selectionmodes available (See “Default selection mode” on page 157).

Click

Click

Shift Click

151 Amapi ProT M

The subtract selection: removes anelement from the current selection. Just holdthe “Alt” key before clicking on the elementto be deselected.

The substitute selection: replaces thecurrent selection by an element. Just hold the“Shift” and “Alt” keys simultaneously whileselecting the new element.

.

Select “by turns”: when several elements fill up the screen, it may be difficult to precisely selectone of them. In this case, when no tools are in use, use the “+” and “-” keys from the numerickeypad. Each key press will select one entity according to their order of creation. Stop when youhave selected the element you want.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:• Switch to “The Personalized Lasso Selection”: Click right mouse button.

(see details on page 153)• Switch to “Extend/Restrict the selection”: Keys “Page-up” and “Page-down”. (see details on

page 155) • Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys.

(see details on page 155)

Atl Click

Shift Alt Click

Reference Manual152

13.2.2.2 The Personalized Lasso SelectionThis selection lets you define apersonalized zone to add or

substract elements (objects, facets, edges orpoints) from the current selection.We call “lasso” the closed polyline used todefine the selection area. It is drawn bysuccessive clicks and is ended by pressingthe “Enter” key.The personalized lasso selection worksexactly on the same principle as the “TheRectangular Lasso Selection” (see details onpage 153) and has the same selection andoptions modes.

.

13.2.2.3 The Rectangular Lasso Selection This selection accessory lets you define a rectangular selection zone to add orsubstract elements (objects, facets, edges or points) from the current selection.

It is defined by two points representing two opposite corners of the rectangle. There are twoways of defining these points:• Click-Click• Click and hold - Drag the cursor - Release mouse button

For lasso selection, validation only takes into account the points that are clicked; Amapi Prodoes not take into account the cursor position at the moment of validation.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button.

(see details on page 151)• Switch to “The Rectangular Lasso Selection” method: Click and hold.

(see details on page 153). • Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys.

(see details on page 155)

Click

Click

Click

Click

Entry

Points selection

Edges selection

153 Amapi ProT M

The selection modesThe reverse selection:

(see details on page 151)

The add selection:(see details on page 151)

The subtract selection: (see details on page 151)

The substitute selection: (see details on page 151)

Options of the lasso selectionAmapi Pro has two selection options:

The lasso selection selects the elements which are completely within its limits only.

The lasso selection selects the elements which are completely or partially within itslimits.

Shortcuts to other selection methods:• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button (see details on page 151).• Switch to “The Rectangular Lasso Selection” method: Click and hold (see details on page 153).• Switch to “Select “1 over n”” method: “+” or “-” keys. (see details on page 155).

Click

Click

Shift

Click

Shift Click

Alt Click

Alt Click

Shift Alt Click

Shift Alt Click

Reference Manual154

13.2.2.4 Select “1 over n” The selection accessory “Select “1 over n”” easily selects one element (object, facet,edge or point) over “n” selectable elements. “n” is the offset value of the selection. A

null offset will give no selection. The cursor shows that the offset setting can be setusing the “+” or “-” keys of the numeric keypad, but a numeric value can be entered directlyin the parameters area.If, for example, with this selection method thesetting is “points selection” and the parametervalue is set to “5”, Amapi Pro will selectautomatically one point over 5 on each of theselected objects.

13.2.2.5 Extend/Restrict the selectionThis selection accessory allows you to extend or restrict the current selection to theelements close to the current one (closed topology). The cursor shows that the

offset setting can be set using the “+” or “-” keys of the numeric keypad, but a numeric valuecan be entered directly in the parameters area.

Shortcut for other selection methods:• For the “Single object selection” method: Click the right mouse button.

(see details on page 151)

The “1 over n” selection deselects all the previous selections on the current object.However, you may add new selections after a “1 over n” has been used

There are several setting methods for the active parameter:• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys on the numeric keypad.• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163)

There is no possible extension if the current selected items do not match the selectableentity (See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

Shortcut for other selection methods:• For the “Single object selection” method: Click the right mouse button.

(see details on page 151)

155 Amapi ProT M

13.2.2.6 Select by angleSelects, within the current selected object, the edges (if the object is a surface) or thepoints (if the object is a curve) corresponding to a selection by angle criterion. The

user would choose among two selection by angle options. You will toggle from the one tothe other by pressing both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys.

The cursor will point out that the offset setting will be made easily with the “+” or “-”keys of the numeric keypad, but you can also enter a numeric value in the parameters area.

The selected object is a curve:

The selected object is a surface:

Select the angles less than or equal to the limit

Select the angles strictly higher than the limit

Option description Selects all the points whose adjacent edges make a non oriented angle inferior or equal to the limit set by the user.

Selects all the points whose adjacent edges make a non oriented angle strictly higher than the limit set by the user.

Illustration

Limit = 90°

Editable parameter •Limit (Maximum angle) •Limit (Minimum Angle)

Select the angles less than or equal to the limit

Select the angles strictly higher than the limit

Option description Selects all the edges whose adjacent facets make a non oriented angle inferior or equal to the limit set by the user.

Selects all the edges whose adjacent facets make a non oriented angle strictly higher than the limit set by the user.

Illustration

Limit = 90°

Editable parameter •Limit (Maximum angle) •Limit (Minimum Angle)

Shortcuts to other selection methods:• Switch to “Single object selection” method: Click right mouse button. (see details on page 151)

Reference Manual156

13.2.2.7 Deselect allThis accessory allows you to deselect all the entity selections (facet, edge or point).Then, continue the modeling.

13.2.3 Default selection modeWhen there is no selection accessory activated and when there is no tool open, the currentitem for the selection is the object.

In this context you can select among several selection methods:

The replace selection (Click) This selection mode (default) allows you to replace the current selection. Just click on theobject to select.

The add selection (Shift-Click)In this mode you can add an object to the current selection by holding the shift key whileclicking on other objects to add them to the current selection.

The reverse selection (Alt-Shift-Click)This mode allows you to :• add a new object to the current selection like in the add mode (Alt-Shift-Click on an

unselected object). • unselect an already selected object (Alt-Shift-Click on a selected object).

The substract selection (Alt-Click)Use this mode to unselect an already selected object . Hold the “ Alt ” key while clicking onthe object to unselect it.

157 Amapi ProT M

13.3 Memo-SelectMemo-Select memorizes a named selection in order toreuse it later without having to do a new selection.Memo-Select is very useful in the case of meticulousselections.

The Memo-select panel contains several memory slots where selections can be stored. Thereare three settings:

Memo-select free: Empty circle, memory empty

Memo-select not free: A selection is memorized

Current Memo-select: A selection is memorized and it was the latest used selection. Itsname is displayed in the editable area located just above.

To Record the current selection, just click on an empty circle (which indicates it isfree).The icon changes too, so as to be found easily afterwards.

To Recall a previously saved selection, click its corresponding circle. It is marked as thecurrent selection and its name is displayed just above.

To Delete a saved selection, click its corresponding circle and click on the “Delete”icon .

Reference Manual158

13.4 The selection cursorsThe shape of the cursor gives some information about:

• The current selectable entity (see details on page 149)

• The selection mode corresponding to the current selection accessory (see details onpage 148).

Basic selection

Lasso selection

Entity:

Selection:

Object Facet Edge Point

Basic

Reverse

Add

Subtract

Substitute

Entity:

Selection:

Object Facet Edge Point

Reverse

Add

Subtract

Substitute

159 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual160

14 The Parameters

14.1 To check the parametersAmapi Pro displays the values of the currentparameters.

A parameter may be:• a name• a coordinate • an angle value• a distance• a coefficient• a quantity• a range…

There are two ways to check parameters:• The parameter palette:

This palette is displayed at the left side of the graphic workspace. You can edit it (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).You can hide it (See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).

• The cursor-parameters:The current parameters are displayed in the 3D space near the cursor. This type ofdisplay cannot be edited. The cursor-parameter can be hidden See chapter “Preferenceseditor”> “Graphic environment”> “Cursor-parameter display” (see details on page 463).

Parameters panel

161 Amapi ProT M

14.2 Editing the parametersTo modify the parameters displayed in the palette, you can use several methods:

• “From the graphic workspace” (see details on page 162)• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162)• “Using the Remote Control” (see details on page 162)

• “In the parameter palette” (see details on page 163)

14.2.1 From the graphic workspace

14.2.1.1 Using the mouseThis method is available from most of the modeling tools; you will appreciate it for itsversatility and its efficiency.Most modeling actions will be performed using the mouse.

How it works:

1) The mouse movement changes the displayed value(s) in the parameter palette.

2) Left click on the mouse button to validate the parameters’s values.

14.2.1.2 Using the Remote ControlThis mode of editing is available from select tools (“Stretch”, “Scale”, “Move” and“Rotate”). It allows a precise interactive control of the data. The current parameter value is changed as follows:• “Ctrl” “Shift” Left arrow > Increases the horizontal value• “Ctrl” “Shift” Right arrow > Decreases the horizontal value• “Ctrl” “Shift” Up arrow > Increases the vertical value• “Ctrl” “Shift” Down arrow > Decreases the vertical value.

The cursor movement is done on the most perpendicular plane to the current point ofview.When setting three dimensions, the mouse movement will modify only two values instead ofthree. You will have two possibilities to modify the third value:• To change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

It is possible to apply moving or positioning constraints to the cursor (See “The constraints”on page 191).

Reference Manual162

The increment is done step by step. The “step” value is tuned by pressing the “+” or “-”keys.For the “Stretch”, “Scale”, “Move” tools, the step value is the ruler. For the “Rotate” tool, itis the circle.

14.2.1.3 With a 3D DigitizerWith Amapi Pro, you can digitize your models in three dimensions using the MicroScribe3D digitizing system. The “Polyline”, “Curve”, “Interpolated curve”, and “Extract Facets” drawing tools willallow you to digitize 3D objects. See chapter “3D Digitizing” (see details on page 233) for more information.

14.2.2 In the parameter palette

14.2.2.1 Switch to the parameter edit mode Parameter values can be entered using the keyboard with one of the two following methods:

“Tab” key:This key allows you to access the first field of the parameter palette. It switches to editmode; the entire data field is automatically selected.

Click:On the parameter palette:• Directly in the data field to be edited: switches to edit mode.• Outside from a data field: the first field of the parameter palette is switched to edit mode.In both cases, the entire data field is automatically selected.

The cursor movement is done on the most perpendicular plane to the current point ofview.When setting three dimensions, the mouse movement will modify only two values instead ofthree. You will have two possibilities to modify the third value:• To change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

163 Amapi ProT M

14.2.2.2 Editing a parameterOnce a field of the parameter palette is in edit mode, there are several ways to modify thevalue of this field:

Fine tunings• The tuning arrows

The tuning arrows, which are beside the field will allow you to fine-tune interactively theparameter value:• A click on the up arrow _> Increases the value• A click on the down arrow_>Decreases the value

• The slider:When displayed, it works as follows:

1) Click and hold the slider

2) Move the mouse toward the right or the left to increase or decrease the parametervalue.

3) Release the mouse button at your desired value.

• The “+” and “-” keys of the numeric keypad (the tuner)You may use the + or - keys of the numeric keypad to quickly set the current parameter.• “+” key _> Increases the value• “-” key _> Decreases the value

Modifying a character stringConventional interface

14.2.2.3 Moving between parameters fields To edit another field of the parameter palette, use:

“Tab” key This key has the following functions:

1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made when pressing the“Enter” key (see details on page 165).

If all the characters of the field are selected, it is not possible to enter the’-’ sign.This key is reserved to the tuner (see details on page 164),All of the data in the data field has to be deleted or deselected before entering a negative value.

Reference Manual164

2) Application of the new parameter to the current selection and visualization of themodel’s initial state.

3) The cursor is moved to the next data field of the parameter palette.After the last field, the first field is selected.

The Up and Down arrows of the keyboardThese keys allow you to toggle from one field to the next or to the previous one in theparameter palette.This key has the following functions:

1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made when pressing the“Enter” key (see details on page 165)).

2) The cursor is moved to the next or to the previous data field of the parameter palette.On the last field, the first field is selected.

14.2.2.4 Validating or Canceling data input

ValidatingBy pressing the “Enter” key you will get the following:

1) The validation of the values displayed in each data field.

2) The application of the new parameters to the current selection and the display of themodified model.

3) The tool switches to the next step (the graphic workspace takes the focus).

CancelingBy pressing the “Cancel” key you will get the following:

1) The original values (before the parameter palette was set in edit mode) will be restored.

2) The application of these former parameters to the current selection and the display ofthe model like it was before the operation was cancelled.

3) The cursor is set on the graphic workspace without changing the step.

Unlike the “Tab” key, the arrow key delays the validation of the current value until Enter orTab keys are pressed. This is useful when the validation action may take a long time and whenseveral values must be edited “Validating or Canceling data input” (see details on page 165).

165 Amapi ProT M

14.2.2.5 Table of key actions in parameters edit mode

KEYS ACTIONS

“Enter”

1) Validates the values displayed in each data field.

2) Applies the new parameters to the current selection and displays themodified model.

3) Goes to the next step of the tool (the graphic workspace takes thefocus).

“Cancel”

1) Resets the original values for each data field like they were before theparameter palette was set in edit mode.

2) Applies the old parameters to the current selection and displays themodel like it was before the cancelled operation.

3) Returns to the graphic workspace without changing the step.

Arrows

• Left arrow > Move the cursor to the left• Right arrow > Move the cursor to the right• “Ctrl” Left arrow > Set the cursor at the beginning of the string• “Ctrl” Right arrow > Set the cursor at the end of the string• “Shift” Left arrow > Selection/Deselection on the left• “Shift” Right arrow > Selection/Deselection on the right

“+” and “-” • “+”> Increases the value• “-”> Decreases the value

“Tab”

In the graphic workspace, the “Tab” key gives the focus to the palette ofparameters; the first field is editable.Once in the parameter palette, it does the following actions:

1) Pre-validation of the entered value (the validation will be made whenpressing the “Enter” key.

2) Applies the new parameter to the current selection and displays themodified model.

3) Moves to the next data field of the parameter palette.When the last field is reached, moves on to the first field

Reference Manual166

15 The Control panel

The Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It is divided into two parts.

The optional palettes display management icons (see details on page 168).

The modeling help functions which help you to make the most of Amapi Pro’spossibilities.

Some of these functions are accessible as keyboard shortcuts.

The Control panel can be hidden to give more space in the graphic workspace. This option canbe set in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Control panel display”(see details on page 455).

167 Amapi ProT M

15.1 Manage the optional palettes displaySeveral palettes in Amapi Pro are optional. To free up space in the graphic workspace it isrecommended to display only the most useful palettes.The Control panel displays a set of icons that allows you to control the display of thesepalettes.Each icon shows or hides (toggles) the palette it controls.

Controls the display of the selection accessories palette (See “Selection” onpage 147).

Controls the display of the scene graph. It represents all the objects of the currentscene in the shape of a tree. You can carry out all the basic actions on each objectsuch as hiding, unhiding, locking or grouping,... (See “The Scene graph” on page 202)

Controls the display of the Dynamic Geometry levels palette (See “DynamicGeometry (DG)” on page 109).

Controls the display of the navigation palette (See “The Navigation Palette” onpage 136). With some practice, the user might prefer the keyboard shortcuts (See“The keyboard navigation” on page 142).

Toggle-icon controlling the display of the advanced constraints palette (See“Advanced constraints” on page 194).

Toggle-icon controlling the display of the Layer palette (See “The Layers” onpage 198).

Controls the display of the Help palette (see details on page 207) and of theassistant palette (see details on page 206). If this palette is not displayed, just slidethe cursor onto the icon to display a tooltip with a contextual help message.

The Information panel, onto which the optional palettes are displayed, can be hidden togive a larger graphic workspace. This option can be set in the “Preferences editor”> “Userinterface”> “Palettes display”> “Optional palettes display support area” (see details on page 455).

Reference Manual168

15.2 Working in the view planeModeling is done on a plane symbolized by a grid called the “ground”. While using tools, the “orthonormal base axis” (X is red, Y is green and Z is

blue) define the three conventional orthogonal planes.

The “working plane” is the plane onto which the cursor is moved. It is defined by the twoaxis the most parallel to the current view plane (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).

For modeling needs, the user may have to change the default working plane for a new one.He may want to work on the current view plane. The view plane will be reorientedaccording to the movement of the viewpoint in the 3D space. In fact, the working plane willalways be on the same plane as the screen.With these conditions, the cursor movement will modify its three coordinates.The Control panel displays an icon corresponding to the current mode. Click on it to switchfrom one mode to the other.

This tool is not the same as the “Scene / orthonormal base toggling” tool which allows youto change the working plane by temporarily reorienting the orthonormal base or the scene (seedetails on page 171).

The working plane

The ground

The scene

x

y

z

169 Amapi ProT M

Default working plane The working plane follows the view plane

The working plane becomes the orthogonal plane when the orientation is the closest to the current view plane.In this mode, the cursor motion will modify only two of the coordinates.

The working plane is in the current view plane With these conditions, the cursor movement will modify three coordinates.The view plane will be reoriented according to the movement of the observer’s eye in the scene.

The working plane is here (x,y) The working plane is orientedfollowing the current view plane

The working plane is here (y,z)The working plane is reoriented

according to the viewpoint movement

In this working mode, the cursor coordinates can be displayed:•Within the absolute orthonormal base•Within the relative orthonormal base (the working plane one).

“Preferences editor”> “Units”> “Relative coordinates” (see details on page 474).

x

y

z

x

y

z

y

x

Absolute orthonormal baseRelative orthonormal base

x

y

z

x

y

z

y

x

Absolute orthonormal baseRelative orthonormal base

Reference Manual170

15.3 Scene / orthonormal base togglingModeling is done on a plane symbolized by a grid called the “ground”. While using tools, the “orthonormal base axis” (X is red, Y is green and Z is

blue) define the three conventional orthogonal planes.

The “working plane” is the plane onto which the cursor is moved. It is defined by the twoaxis the most parallel to the current view plane (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)

For modeling needs, the user may have to reorient the orthonormal base to change theworking plane. Amapi Pro proposes several ways to proceed:

• Toggle the orthonormal base.

• Toggle the scene and the orthonormal base.

The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current orientation. Click on it todisplay a list of possible reorientations. Then click to select and follow the instructionsbelow:

The working plane

The ground

The scene

x

y

z

171 Amapi ProT M

Restore the conventional orthonormal base

Toggle the orthonormal base Toggle the scene and the orthonormal base

Amapi Pro restores automatically the conventional orthonormal base

The user must click on the facet of an object.The orthonormal base will be reoriented so the current working plane that is on the same plane as the selected facet

The user must click on the facet of an object.The entire scene will be reoriented so the selected facet that is on the same plane as the ground.

Before toggling Before toggling

Restored orthonormal base After toggling After toggling

With these working modes, the cursor coordinates can be displayed:•In the absolute orthonormal base.•In the relative orthonormal base (working plane).“Preferences editor”> “Units”> “Relative coordinates” (see details on page 474).

This tool is not the same as the “Working in the view plane” which allows you to orientatethe working plane according to the current view plane (see details on page 169).

x

Selected facety

z

x

Selected facety

z

x

y

z

x

y

z

y

zx

Absolute orthonormal baseRelative orthonormal base

x

y z

x

y

z

Absolute orthonormal baseRelative orthonormal base

Reference Manual172

15.4 Orthonormal base originWhen using some of the tools, the “graduate orthonormal base axis” aredisplayed X (red), Y (green) and Z (blue). They allow you to find a landmark and

make precise alignments in the graphic workspace. The default position of the orthonormal base origin is the center of the grid called the“ground”. It can be moved at any moment during modeling. To do this, click on the iconshowing the “Orthonormal base origin” tool in the Control panel, then select the point of thescene which will become the new orthonormal base origin or enter its coordinates in theparameter palette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

x

y

z

x

y

z

173 Amapi ProT M

15.5 SnappingThis mode-tool allows you to specify if the cursor is to be snapped or not onto the virtualgrid defined by the orthonormal base gradations.

The non magnetized cursor moves freely in the scene.

The magnetized cursor snaps to the grid intersection points.

It is possible to customize the gradation step at each display of the gradated axis. To increaseor decrease the gradation step, click on the icons of the assistant palette or use theshortcut: “+/-” keys.

Reference Manual174

15.6 Alignment GuidesThe “Alignment Guides” allow you to create temporary guides which will direct thecursor movement while building 3D points. These guides are straight lines and make

a right angle (45 degrees, 90 degrees...) to the horizontal plane or to a predefined direction.They can be accumulated to allow singular lines intersections. They can also be orientedtoward a specified axis. These guides are entirely controlled with the mouse. The guides dis-appear after each point is created. The “Alignment guides” are enabled by clicking on a tog-gle-icon in “The Control panel”.Refer to the “Alignment guides” (see details on page 196) paragraph for more information.

175 Amapi ProT M

15.7 Perspective This mode-tool allows you to toggle from one of two display modes of the scene:

The Perspective view (default option).

The Orthographic view (to see the scene without perspective). In some cases, this display mode can provide a clearer visualization of the scene or

facilitate certain manipulations.

To toggle from one mode to the other, simply click on the icon showing the tool in theControl panel.

Customizedviewpoint

Front view Left view Top view Right view Rear view

Perspectiveview

Orthogra-phic view

Reference Manual176

15.8 Simplified display In the case of complex scenes or objects, a simplified display can be used in orderto give a faster and clearer display.

To do so, select one of the following options:

Do not simplify the object display.

Simplify the display of deselected objects.

Simplify the display of selected objects.

Simplify the display of all the objects on the scene.

177 Amapi ProT M

15.9 Simple-view / Multi-viewAmapi Pro allows you to work in simple-view or in multi-view mode.

• The navigation's versatility allows you to work with efficiency and comfort in the single-view mode. The interface is specially designed to be as close to the movements of asculptor as possible while he or she is moving around his creation.

• The multi-view consists of simultaneously displaying the scene in several windows. Adifferent viewpoint corresponds to each window (See “Viewpoint” on page 137). One ofthese windows is selected as the “working window”. The user can pass from one toanother as needed. This principle gives you quick and precise control of the resultingmodel.

The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current option. Clickon it to display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the iconshowing the desired configuration.

The “current view” corresponds to the view which the user works on.Modifications are interactively shown in the other views.The current view is surrounded by a white frame.A click on a non-current view selects it as the current view.

It is possible to display or not specific information in each view: • The type of view (Perspective, Left, Right, Top...).• The number of images displayed per second.“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “View Informations display” (see detailson page 457).

Reference Manual178

15.10 Enable/Disable the backface displayA frontface is a facet of a model where the normal is oriented toward the observer.A backface is a facet of a model where the normal is not oriented toward theobserver. Disabling the backface display is one of the ways to optimize display time.

Backface display enabled Backface display disabled

179 Amapi ProT M

15.11 Objects display

15.11.1 The display modesWhile modeling, you will manipulate various entities: points, edges, facets or objects (See“Entity” on page 94).Depending on the kind of action to perform, select the display mode to best highlight theentities you want to work with. The display mode can be changed at any time.The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current display mode. Click on it todisplay the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon showing the desireddisplay mode.

The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects. Because this modedoesn’t display the facets, it has the advantage of showing the entire object withouthaving to navigate in the scene: it is possible to select the elements which would behidden in a non-wireframe mode.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a lit effect to the “Wireframe” mode.

The “Flat Solid” mode adds a more realistic appearance to the objects bydisplaying their facets. The “Flat Solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Flat Solid” mode.

The “Smoothed Solid” mode corresponds to the “Flat Solid” mode to whichsmoothing has been applied. This is the most realistic mode.The “Smoothed Solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “SmoothedSolid” mode.

In any desired display mode, Amapi Pro will be able to select any entity (points, edges orfacets). For example: when the “Flat Solid” mode is selected (displays only the facets of the objects) andthe user wants to select the “edges” entities “one by one”, Amapi Pro will highlight the closestedge to the cursor while it is moved. The user can then select it or not.

Reference Manual180

15.11.2 Transparency of the selected objectThis tools allows you to give or to not give a transparency effect to the selected objects.

Display “with transparency effect”

Display “without transparency effect”

If this option is activated, it will be effective in the following situations:

• When selecting edges or pointsThe transparency allows you to select the elements which would not otherwise be visible(and not selectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display” onpage 180).

The user can set the “Selection transparency level” (see details on page 466).

• When editing an object with several Dynamic Geometry levelsThe transparency allows you to display the Dynamic Geometry level corresponding tothe finished object while an intermediate level is edited. This kind of display gives youthe advantage of being able to manipulate very efficiently (See “Dynamic Geometry(DG)” on page 109). The user can set the “Transparency level when editing DG” (see details on page 471).

This effect is only effective when a “solid” display mode has been selected (See “Thedisplay modes” on page 180).

The NURBS objects display is different depending on the operating mode “Polygonal /NURBS” (see details on page 182):In the NURBS operating mode, the points and edges of the NURBS objects are noteditable and will not be displayed. A NURBS curve will be shown as a continuous line. Isoparametric curves, outlines and cutting curves will be shown on the NURBS surfaces.In the polygonal operating mode, points and edges are displayed. These can be used assupport for construction but are not directly editable.(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

Amapi Pro gives a transparency effect to selected objects if the selectable entity is the

edge or a point (See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

181 Amapi ProT M

15.12 Polygonal / NURBSToggles on the NURBS displayToggles to the NURBS / Polygonal operating mode

(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)

Reference Manual182

15.13 Working with or without Dynamic Geometry

Dynamic Geometry is one of the points which makes the versatility and the power of thissoftware. It works on the following principle: All the modeling steps of each object on the scene is stored. When modifying a curve or avolume, Amapi Pro can interactively apply this modification to all the steps up to thefinished model. These curves or volumes are used as control shapes.

It is recommended to see the chapter “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109, for a betterunderstanding of this subject.

Amapi Pro proposes working with Dynamic Geometry as the default option. A toggle-iconin the Control panel allows you to work with or without Dynamic Geometry:

Work without Dynamic Geometry Work with the Dynamic Geometry

183 Amapi ProT M

15.14 Hide, ShowUse the Hide tool to make some objects of the scene invisible and the Showtool to display them again.

These tools are useful to temporarily hide an element and facilitate manipulation.They are also used to display elements automatically hidden by some tools such as thecurves used with the “Sweep” tool (see details on page 307) as profile or section.

15.14.1 HideThere are two cases:

• If several objects in the scene are selected, Amapi Pro hides them and automaticallyreleases the tool and modeling will immediately continue.

• If only one object is selected in the scene, the objects to be hidden must be selected. Theobjects will be hidden upon validating or releasing the tool.

15.14.2 ShowWhen opening this tool, Amapi Pro displays all the hidden objects and temporarilyhides the non-hidden objects. Select the object(s) to be shown, knowing that

Amapi Pro will then show them once the tool is validated or released. All the non-hiddenobjects of the scene will automatically reappear.

When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all thedisplayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.

Shortcut: “A” key.

To temporarily hide the unused objects, use the “Isolate” tool (see details on page 185).

When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all thedisplayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.

Shortcut: “A” key.

Reference Manual184

15.15 IsolateThe “Isolate” mode-tool allows you to work with the current selection without displayingthe other objects of the scene.

If the tool is activated, Amapi Pro automatically hides all the not selected objectson the scene.

All the non-hidden objects (See “Hide, Show” on page 184) of the scene aredisplayed when this mode is deactivated.

The Hide an Show tools are not available in “Isolate” mode.

Do not confuse the “Isolate” which temporarily hides objects without hiding them using “Hide,Show” (see details on page 184)

185 Amapi ProT M

15.16 Group, UngroupUse the Group tool to make several objects behave as a single object forthe following tools: “Scale”, “Rotate”, “Stretch” and “Move”. By grouping

objects or groups of objects together, the scene can be organized hierarchically (groups andsub-groups).

15.16.1 GroupThere are two cases:

• If several objects are selected in the scene, Amapi Pro groups them, then automaticallyreleases the tool. The modeling will continue immediately.

• If only one object is selected in the scene, the objects to be grouped must be selected. Theobjects will be grouped upon validating or releasing the tool.

15.16.2 UngroupUse this tool to ungroup all the objects belonging to the same group. When openingthe tool, Amapi Pro highlights all the groups and sub-groups of the scene and hides

temporarily hides the objects not belonging to any group. Select the object(s) to beungrouped. All the objects of the scene then automatically reappear upon validating orreleasing the tool.

This tool must not be overlapped with the “Weld objects” option of the “Weld” tool (see detailson page 403).• A group of objects:

• can be organized into a hierarchy (notion of sub-group)• keeps the integrality of the points of each object.• can be ungrouped at any time thanks with the Ungroup tool• is displayed with its entire bounding box.

• An object made from weld objects:• does not contain overlapping points after welding.• can not be unwelded (except with Ctrl-Z).• is displayed with its partial bounding box.

When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro makes the operation on all thedisplayed entities before automatically releasing the tool.

Shortcut: “A” key.

Reference Manual186

15.16.3 Enter / leave a groupIt is possible to edit the objects of a group without having to ungroup and group them again. To do that, click on the group icon of the control panel with the right button. A context menucontaining Enter a group and Leave a group appears. Select Enter a group then select thegroup to be edited. When done select Leave the group.

187 Amapi ProT M

15.17 InformationThe “Information” tool displays all the information about the current object. Thisinformation is displayed in a floating palette which can be edited at any time

during modeling.This tool has several action-buttons which apply functions based mainly on modeloptimization or on problem resolution if the file was imported. The Dynamic Geometry hierarchy of the object is also displayed.The information palette of any object can be displayed by double-clicking on this object.

15.17.1 Information

Label Nature of the information Editing

Thumbnail Displays a small image of the object.

Name Name of the current object(See “Object names” on page 92)

Click on the name’s display area to edit it.

Type of modelNature of the object

Displays if this is a NURBS or Polygonal object.Gives additional information if it is a NURBS object.(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96).

Displays if the object is a curve, a surface or a volume.(See “The Types of objects” on page 91).

Layer status Gives information about the status of the layer it belongs to:Locked/Unlocked (See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on page 200).

Number of points Displays the number of points of the finished object.

Number of edges Displays the number of edges of the finished object

Number of facets Displays the number of facets of the finished object

Dimensions Displays the x, y and z dimensions of the bounding box.

Reference Manual188

15.17.2 Functions

Label Function Description

Hidden faces Do not show hidden facesShow hidden faces

Convert to NURBS If the model is Polygonal, Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to convert it to NURBS.(See “Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /a NURBS model into a Polygonal model” on page 105)

Triangulate non planar faces

Amapi Pro proposes triangulating the non planar faces of the current object.Click on this button to triangulate(See “Non planar facets” on page 485)

Triangulate faces with more than 4 points *

Amapi Pro proposes triangulating the faces with more than 4 points. Click on this button to triangulate.

Remove equal points *

Amapi Pro proposes optimizing the model by removing overlapping points.Click on this button to launch the action.

Remove coplanar faces *

Amapi Pro proposes optimizing the model by replacing the coplanar facets by a unique facet.Click on the button to launch the action.(See “Coplanar” on page 483).

Destroy Dynamic Geometry

Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to completely collapse the Dynamic Geometry of the object. Click on the button to launch the action.(See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118)

reorienting the normals

Amapi Pro gives you the possibility to modify the orientation of the normals to the facets.Click on this button to activate the tool. (See “Orient Normals” on page 190)

Create an object for each NURBS face of the object

This function is enabled if the current object is a BREP (See “BREP: «watertight» surfaces and volumes” on page 103).It explodes the object in as many objects as it has faces.This operation is a means to edit NURBS faces.The user will be able to weld these faces by using the “Weld objects” (see details on page 403) option of the “Weld” tool

Create an edge for each nodal break

Replaces the broken nodal lines into BREP edges.

* This function completely collapses the Dynamic Geometry (DG) (See “Collapsing the DG”on page 118). After this operation, the object will only keep one DG level.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

189 Amapi ProT M

Orient NormalsThis tool has two main options:

Reverse normals (default option in polyhedral mode)This option behaves like a tool qhere you can :

• Visualize each facet normal : The path of each facet normal is indicated by agrey arrow when the cursor is over the facet.

• Toggle facet normal path : Depending on the type of object you can:• Surfacic objects ; Several selection methods are available :

Replace selection (Click) : click on a facet to toggle the normal path.Add selection (Shift-Click or lasso) : Select a group of facet and hit Space

bar to toggle the normals all at once.Substract selection (Alt-Click): Unselect a group of facet; toggle like in

previous mode.

Reverting normals implies to collapse the Dynamic Geometry. A messagewindow asking to perform this operation will appear when validating the tool.

• For curves, hitting the space bar toggles the curve path. Clicking on another curve will change the current selection.

• This option has no effect in the following cases:• NURBS mode.• Some shapes requiring unified normals (control shapes of some

dynamic geometries).

Unify normals (default option in NURBS mode)This option activates a dynamic property of the selected object that has the

following effect ; • All the normals of the seleted objects are oriented in the same direction. We call

this a unified normals facets.• If the selected object is made up of several groups of adjacent facets (adjacent

facets are facets sharing one common edge), unifying normals is made indepen-dently for each facet group. The orientation of each group of unified normalsfacet can be different from each other.

• A yellow arrow indicates, for each group of adjacent facets, the unified orienta-tion. This normal can be toggled by clicking on any facet of the group.

• This property will remain active whatever transformation is made to the object.• This option has no effect on curves.

Reference Manual190

15.17.3 Dynamic Geometry treeWhen working with Dynamic Geometry, Amapi Pro stores all the modeling steps.

The information palette displays the integrality of the hierarchy of the shapes correspondingto the object finishing steps.

In the example of a vase made from a boolean operation (“Cut” tool) between two smoothedobjects (“Smooth” tool): the vase body was made from the extrusion (“Sweep” tool) of acircle and the handle made from the thickness (“Thickness/Offset” tool) of a circle.

Current path (path of the current selection) Other paths

Cut 1

Smoothing 1 Smoothing 2

Sweep 1 Thickness 1

Polyline 1 Polyline 2 Polyline 3

Current selection

191 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual192

16 The constraints

By default, the cursor movement constraint is snapped on the ruler gradation grid. In somecases, the cursor can be set free from any constraint or other kinds of constraints can beapplied to it.

Amapi Pro has several kinds of constraints:

“Snapping” (see details on page 192).

“Axis toggling” (see details on page 193).

“Advanced constraints” (see details on page 194).

“Alignment guides” (see details on page 196).

The gradated rulers of the orthonormal base shows that the user can use the cursor movementand position constraints

191 Amapi ProT M

16.1 Snapping

16.1.1 Snapping on ruler gradationThe cursor movement can be snapped on: • The nodes of a virtual grid, the cross-ruling of which is defined by the rulers gradations

(See “The orthonormal base” on page 88).• The rotation circle gradations (See “Rotate” on page 244).

Toggle from one mode to the other by clicking on the toggle-icon in the Control panel (See“The Control panel” on page 167).

The cursor is free from any constraint and moves freely in the scene.

The cursor movements are snapped on the ruler gradations or on the rotation circle

gradations.

16.1.2 Snapping on particular pointsIt is possible, while working, to snap the cursor on particular points.

The object’s particular points are:• the points defining the objects• the middle of the segments• the center of the objects.

To do this, press the “Shift” key while moving the cursor.

The longer the gradation step is, the more the cursor movement is jerky. It is possible tocustomize the gradation step size (increasing or decreasing it) by clicking on the iconsof the assistant palette. Shortcut: “+/-” keys when the rulers are displayed.

Cursor

Snap on point Snap on middle of segment Snap on center of object

CursorCursor

Reference Manual192

16.2 Axis togglingWhile editing, Amapi Pro allows you to set the movement constraints along one axis (See“The orthonormal base” on page 88). A constrained movement allows you to restrict the action of the current tool on one of thetwo axis or set the action direction.

Amapi Pro has three kinds of constraints.

No constraint

Horizontal constraint

Vertical constraint

To toggle from one to the other, use the icons of the “The assistant palette” (see details onpage 206), or press the “Space-Bar”.

The axis toggling allows you to; • Draw a polyline segment horizontally or vertically from the last drawn point (See

“Polyline” on page 286).• Draw an ellipse with the tool “Sphere” (See “Sphere” on page 263).• Stretch a selection horizontally or vertically (See “Stretch” on page 252).• Scale a selection horizontally or vertically ((See “Scale” on page 248).• Sweep a radial or an axial tube (See “Sweep” on page 307).

Horizontal constraintconstraint horizontal axis (red)

is displayed.The cursor can move along this

axis only.

No constraintThe cursor movement is free

Vertical constraintconstraint vertical axis (green)

is displayed.The cursor can move along this

axis only.

Cursor Cursor Cursor

193 Amapi ProT M

16.3 Advanced constraintsAmapi Pro has a set of advanced constraints enclosed in a palette which may or maynot be displayed by clicking on this icon of the Control panel (See “The Control

panel” on page 167).

The advanced constraints allow you to move or position the cursor following the constraintlines desired by the user.

How to proceed:

1) Click on the icon corresponding to the desired constraint.

2) Select the entities to be used to draw the constraint lines (point, edge(s) or segment(s)).

3) Move the cursor (constraint movement) and click as it reaches the right location.

Icons Constraints Illustrations

Cancel all the constraints (free moving).

Moving along an axis passing through thelast drawn point and a point “P” to bespecified.

Moving along an axis passing through thelast drawn point and parallel to an edge or asegment “S” to be specified.

Moving along an axis passing through thelast drawn point and perpendicular to anedge or a segment “S” to be specified.

Cursor

Cursor

P

Cursor

S

CursorS

Reference Manual194

.

Moving along a vertical axis passing througha point “P” to be specified.

Moving along a horizontal axis passingthrough a point “P” to be specified.

Moving along a line passing through an edgeor a segment “S” to be specified

Positioning at the intersection of the edges orsegments extension “S” and “S’” to bespecified

The selection of a constraint is valid for only one positioning, the cursor movement is set freeafter each positioning.

This palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.

Horizontal display of the palette.

Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.

Palette unlocked: it appears only in the current tool.

Cursor

P

CursorP

Cursor

S

S

S’

195 Amapi ProT M

16.4 Alignment guides The “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily guide the movement of thecursor when creating 3D points. These guides are lines forming a singular angle (45

degrees, 90 degrees...) with either a horizontal or a preset direction. These guides can beaccumulated to make it possible to materialize singular line intersections. They can also bedirected along a specified axis. The control of these guides is entirely carried out with themouse. The guides disappear after each created point. The activation of the alignment guidesis done by clicking on a toggle icon integrated in the “The Control panel” (see details onpage 167).

“Alignment guides” enabled

“Alignment guides” disabled

There are three types of alignment guides:

The last point created automatically becomes a guide until the next point is created. It is thenreplaced by the new point. The guide point is framed by a small white square. By movingthe cursor, lines are displayed when the conditions of alignment are found. For example,when the cursor is close to a horizontal line going through the guide point.

Points selected by Ctrl-Shift-click (left mouse button) on a point are added to the list ofthe guide points. You can add as many as you like but two to three points are sufficient tocarry out the majority of alignments.

The guide edges indicated by Ctrl-Shift-click (left mouse button) on an edge define aguide point in the center of the edge and the guide lines aligned on the edge. This makes itpossible to position guides with a particular direction.

The preset angles for which lines are displayed can be set by the “Preferences editor” in“Graphic environment”>“Alignment guides” (see details on page 462). You can set up toeight angle values simultaneously.

When several guide lines are intersected, the intersection is materialized. Then, just click onthe point to be sure it is at the intersection of the lines.

The guide lines can become fixed movement constraints by clicking on Ctrl-Shift-Click(right mouse button) on a singular line. The line remains displayed and the displacement isdone along this line. Defining two lines intersecting themselves will block the movement ofthe cursor at the point of intersection of the curves.

Reference Manual196

17 Scene management

Amapi Pro has several tools to manage the scene.

The layers allow you to put sets of objects together, to lock them so that they can not bemodified and to make them invisible. The layer is a very useful way to manage largequantities of objects. The hide and show tools make it possible to quickly select the objects you want to work on. (See “The Layers” on page 198)

The scene graph represents the current scene in the form of a tree, the objects associatedwith each material and the objects included in each layer. All the basic actions can be doneto objects such as hide, show, lock, group...

Object Information makes it possible to know object characteristics such as the type ornumber of points as well as to carry out geometry cleaning actions in order to deletecoplanar faces and overlapped points. This function is integrated into the Control panel (See “Information” on page 188)

The catalog is a native file management system. It allows you to visualize directories ofobjects as thumbnails. It is possible to read, write, delete and rename files. It is also possibleto create favorites directory. The catalog is a room accessible by an icon located on the topright-hand side of the screen. (See “The Catalog” on page 443)

197 Amapi ProT M

17.1 The LayersThe Layer manager allowsyou to arrange objects or

groups of objects depending on adesired criteria. When the Layermanager is open, Amapi Prodisplays all the layers of the sceneas thumbnails. It is possible to:• Select the current layer into

which the next objects that arecreated will be put.

• Hide one or several layers towork efficiently with the rest ofthe scene.

• Lock one or several layers toprevent modifications of thecorresponding objects.

• Create a new layer.• Delete the current layer.• Move objects from one layer to another.

The toggle-icon located in the scene manager controls the layers display.

This palette can be located anywhere in the graphic workspace and displayed horizontallyor vertically.

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.

Horizontal display of the palette.

The number of layers is not limited.

Reference Manual198

17.1.1 Select the receiving layerThe layer selected as the receiving layer is where the next created objects will be housed.You will recognize it thanks to its particular markings (Different background color). Toselect a layer as the receiving layer, just click on the thumbnail of the target layer.

17.1.2 Add a layerTo add a new layer click on the icon of the layers palette.

17.1.3 Edit a layer namesClick on the layer name and type a new name to rename it.

17.1.4 Delete a layer of its contentsSelect the layer to be deleted (See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199) and click on theicon of the layers palette.

17.1.5 Merge two layersMerging two layers consists of moving the content of one layer into another layer. To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:

1) Slide the cursor over a layer to be merged.

2) Click on the left mouse button and hold it. The cursor icon changes to indicate that thetransfer to another layer is allowed.

3) Move the cursor over the receiving layer.

4) Release the mouse button.

A locked or hidden layer can not be selected as the receiving layer.(See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on page 200)(See “Show / Hide a layer” on page 200)

Attention! This operation cannot be undone.

199 Amapi ProT M

17.1.6 Show / Hide a layerWhen hiding a layer, all the objects included in this layer are hidden. This method can be very useful to hide unwanted objects in order to work on other complexobjects. A toggle-icon allows you to switch from visible to not visible.

Visible layer

Invisible layer

17.1.7 Lock / Unlock a layerLocking a layer turns the objects on that layer into not editable objects. No action performedon these objects will have any effect. These locked objects can be used for reference whilemodeling one object belonging to another layer.

Unlocked layer

Locked layer

17.1.8 Move one object to another layerTo move an object, a selection or a group of objects from one layer to another, you can:

By moving the selection toward another layer:The designation of the receiving layer will be done by a simple click on the icon corresponding to the receiving layer.

This function is close to “Hide, Show” which allows you to select the objects to hide in the scenewithout any layer concept. (See “Hide, Show” on page 184).

Hiding the receiving layer automatically selects the first visible not locked layer as the receivinglayer.(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

Locking the receiving layer automatically selects the first visible not locked layer as the receivinglayer.(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

It is possible to Lock/Unlock only one object of the scene without isolating it in a layer. Thisoperation will be made by using the scene graph. (See “The Scene graph” on page 202)

Reference Manual200

Use the "Scene graph" method:The changing of a layer is done by choosing the receiving layer in the list of the layersproposed in the contextual menu related to the object.(See “The Scene graph” on page 202).

201 Amapi ProT M

17.2 The Scene graphThe scene graph is a hierarchical representation of the objects, the groups, the layersor the materials. This presentation allows you to browse and to organize the

hierarchies and to modify the objects attributes: it is possible to create groups, layers, toassociate an object to a material, to rename objects, to hide them or to lock them...

17.2.1 Browse the scene graphThe scene graph can be launched trough the Editmenu or by clicking on its icon in the control panel.The default display is a tree showing the graph of theobjects of the scene. The graphs of the groups, layersor the materials can be displayed by clicking on theirrespective thumbnails.

The objects are represented by their names associ-ated with a letter showing their type: • N for node (basic objects), • G for group, • L for layer,• M for material.

Objects including sons (groups or dynamic geometries) have a sign + or - to the left of theirnames allowing you to open or close their sons list.

The names list is ordered alphabetically.

The sons of the dynamic geometries are their control shapes.

The groups are composed by nodes, the materials contain a material list which includesobjects which use this material. Each layer contains the objects which belong the layer.

Graph of the objects of the scene

Graph of the groups of the scene

Graph of the materials of the scene

Graph of the layers of the scene

Reference Manual202

When opening the scene graph, all the objects are open. To close them, just click on the -sign displayed at the intersection of the branches of the tree. Inversely, to open a closedobject, click on the sign +. You can also use the keys +/- or the keyboard arrows.

17.2.2 Selection using the scene graphIt is possible to select one or more objects in the scene graph in order to apply to them one ofthe operations described in the following paragraph. For this use one of the following meth-ods:

Simple selection: click on the name of the object in the scene graph with the left mouse but-ton. The name of the object is highlighted.

Multiple selection, element by element: Keep the “shift” key pressed while successivelyclicking on the elements to be selected in the scene graph. The elements are highlighted.

Multiple selection by list: Keep the “shift” key pressed and click on the first element of thelist in the scene graph, then click on the last element. These two elements and all the ele-ments in between them are highlighted.

Selection by name: Type the first letters of the name of the required object with the key-board. The selection is set on the first corresponding object starting from the current selec-tion.

17.2.3 Operations on the scene graph selectionA pop-up menu will appear when the cursor is positioned on the selection and the rightmouse button is clicked.

This menu will propose several operations depending on the number and the type of theselected element (Scene, Group, Node, Material or Layer).

Operations for node (N) or group (G) elements:The node would be a simple graphic object with or without dynamic geometry

• Select/Unselect in the view the scene graph selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147)

Do not confuse: “Select in the scene graph” with “Select in the view”.The selection in the scene graph will be selected in the view only if the user chooses “Select” inthe pop-up menu (right mouse click).(See “The concept of selection” on page 147)

203 Amapi ProT M

• Display the properties of the selected element (simple selection only) (See “Information” on page 188)

• Delete the selection(See “Deletion” on page 216)

• Rename the selected element (simple selection only) (See “Object names” on page 92)

• Hide/Show the selection(See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

• Lock/Unlock the selectionThis operation consists of making the selection uneditable. In other words, any actionwill remain without effect on this object.

• Group the selected elements(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186)

• Collapse the Dynamic Geometry of the selection(See “Collapsing the DG” on page 118)

• Create a new layer(See “The Layers” on page 198)

• Move to a layer(See “The Layers” on page 198)

Operations for material (M) elements:• Display the properties of the material by displaying its parameters in the rendering

room(See “Material editor” on page 432)

• Delete a material(See “Deleting a file from the catalog” on page 429)

• Rename a material

• Create a new material(See “Saving a new material in the catalog” on page 430)

Reference Manual204

Operations for layer (L) elements:• Select the receiver layer (layer in which all the new objects will be created)

(See “Select the receiving layer” on page 199)

• Display the properties of the layer by displaying its preview thumbnail in the layerspalette.

• Delete the layer. The contents of the layer is deleted.(See “Delete a layer of its contents” on page 199)

• Rename the layer

• Hide/Show the layer(See “Show / Hide a layer” on page 200)

• Lock/Unlock the layer(See “Lock / Unlock a layer” on page 200)

• Create a new layer(See “The Layers” on page 198)

• Move to a layer(See “The Layers” on page 198)

17.2.4 Change the group, layer or materialIt is possible to reorganize specific elements with the assistance of the scene graph. To put one or more objects or groups in another group, select the objects to be moved, clickon this selection and move them while keeping the mouse button down. Release it as soon asthe cursor is over the group.In the same way, to change the material of a selection of objects, deposit the selection ontothe new material. If the selection contains a group, all the objects of the group will undergothe material change. Finally, to change a group of objects from one layer to another, proceed in the same way byreleasing the mouse button over the desired layer. The destination layer can be a layerrepresented in the scene graph or the thumbnail preview of a layer in the layers window. Ifthe selection is a layer, all the elements of this layer will be modified. The original layer willbe empty. If the selection is a group, all the objects of the group will undergo this layerchange.

205 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual206

18 The Help

Amapi Pro has several kinds of help for using the program. They were created to meet thedifferent users’s requirements depending on their habits, their working methods and on howthey use the program.Three help methods are available:

• “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206)

• “The contextual help” (see details on page 207)

• “The on-line help palette” (see details on page 207)• “The on-line help icon” (see details on page 207)

• “The tooltips” (see details on page 208)

• “The cursor” (see details on page 208)

205 Amapi ProT M

18.1 The assistant palette

The assistant palette is a functional help palette for beginners that appears in the centerabove the graphic workspace; it aims at guiding the beginner by graphically highlighting thefundamental actions he or she may perform.The trained user might prefer to use the keyboard shortcuts and choose to free the spacetaken by this palette to increase the graphic workspace (See “Manage the optional palettesdisplay” on page 168).

Increases the value of the current parameter. Keyboard shortcut: “+” key.

Decreases the value of the current parameter. Keyboard shortcut: “-” key

Constrains the cursor to move only on the horizontal axis.(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)Keyboard shortcut: press the “Space-Bar” once.

Constrains the cursor to move only on the vertical axis.(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)Keyboard shortcut: press the “Space-Bar” twice.

Frees the cursor from any movement constraint.(See “Axis toggling” on page 193)

Cancels the last operation.(see details on page 214).Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl Z”.

Redoes the last cancelled operation.(see details on page 214).Keyboard shortcut: “Ctrl R”.Cancels all the operations performed within the current tool. The tool is released; you may pick up another tool. Keyboard shortcut: “Escape”.

Validates the current operation.Keyboard shortcut: “Enter”.

Reference Manual206

18.2 The contextual helpThe on-line help palette function is useful to guide the user by pointing out the operations heor she can carry out during each modeling step. The on-line help is available within two options:

The on-line help paletteThis palette is displayed in the left-hand part of the screen. Youmay hide it to increase the graphic workspace by clicking on the

icon in the control panel.

(See “Manage the optional palettes display” on page 168).

The on-line help icon

When the cursor is slid over this icon in the control panel, a tooltip displays a contextualhelp text. With this mode, the help text can be accessible when needed, while saving spacein the graphic workspace.

Amapi Pro displays the help tooltips by default, but this option can be disactivated.This option is accessible in the “Preferences”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Tooltipsdisplay” (see details on page 456).

207 Amapi ProT M

18.3 The tooltipsWhen sliding the cursor over an icon, Amapi Pro displaysinformation about the functions corresponding to the icon.Tooltips can be hidden in the Preferences menu (See in chapter“Preferences editor” section “Tooltips display” on page 456).

18.4 The cursorThe shape of the cursor also gives you some information:

The selectable entity and the selection mode corresponding to the current selectionaccessory (See “The selection cursors” on page 159).

The Tuner-cursor shows that a quick parameter setting can be done by usingthe icons or the “+” or “-” keys.

The cursor can have a particular shape while using some tools to show the specificsof the current operation.

Reference Manual208

19 The Menus

The upper left hand part of the screen is dedicated to the menu bar. Here you will find all the common classic functions included in most programs as well asthe functions specific to Amapi Pro.

As soon as you start manipulating, you might prefer accessing Amapi Pro’s functions byusing the Amapi Pro interface.

209 Amapi ProT M

19.1 FileThis paragraph shows the “classic” File menu manager accessible from the menu bar in theupper left hand part of your screen.Amapi Pro contains another File menu manager system, which is more visual, simpler andfaster: the “Catalog” (See “The Catalog” on page 443).Most of these functions are also available using keyboard shortcuts.

19.1.1 Opening/ Closing

New (Ctrl+N)This command of the File Menu creates a new Amapi Pro blank document. The new document's default name is “untitled” followed by a numbered order.By default, it is displayed at the top left hand side of the screen (See “Display the file name”on page 457).It is possible to rename the file when saving it (see details on page 211).Note that you may have several documents opened at the same time and toggle from one tothe other by:• Using the “Window” (see details on page 227) menu.• Using the “Ctrl -Tab” keyboard shortcut.

Open (Ctrl+O)This command of the File Menu displays an opening file window. The Open dialog window allows you to specify the file to open. You may select a format in the proposed list (See “Import” on page 229). If the currentdocument is not empty, the scene corresponding to the file open will be displayed in anotherdocument.

Merge (Ctrl+M)This command of the File Menu allows you to open a file and merge the objects contained inthis file into the current scene.

Close (Ctrl+W )This command of the File Menu closes the current document. If your document contains unsaved modifications, Amapi Pro will ask you: “Would you liketo save the changes?”.If so, click:• “Yes”, if you want to save the latest changes.

Reference Manual210

• “No”, if you want to close the document without saving the changes.• “Cancel”, if you decide to not close the document.If another document was open, it becomes the current document. If there is no documentopen, the program remains ready to open another document or to create a new one.

19.1.2 Saving files

Save (Ctrl+S)This function takes effect only if the scene has been saved at least once.• If this is the case, the scene is saved under the same name as the previous one (the former

file version is lost).• If it is not the case, it automatically opens the “Save as (Ctrl+E)” dialog box (see details

on page 211).

Save as (Ctrl+E)This command of the File Menu opens a dialog box. You are then allowed to:• Name the document• Select an output format• Specify the folder to save the file in.

Amapi Pro does not perform automatic file saving while modeling. Many valuable workinghours can be lost because of a power cut or a false maneuver. It is very important to save anobject (possibly under an other name) before making a complex modification. Thus, if you arenot satisfied with the result, you can return to the preceding step. However, you will have to closethe document without saving it.

With each request for saving a scene in the Amapi Designer format, the program will update theassociated file with the “.png” suffix. This file corresponds to a small thumbnail of the scene,used by the Amapi Pro catalog (See “The Catalog” on page 443).

You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See“The Catalog” on page 443).

With each request for saving a scene in the Amapi Pro format, the program will update theassociated file with the “.png” suffix. This file corresponds to a small thumbnail of the scene,used by the Amapi Pro catalog (See “The Catalog” on page 443).

211 Amapi ProT M

19.1.3 Import-Export

ImportThis function allows you to specify the kind and name of file you want to import.You will find the complete list of formats in the “Import” paragraph (see details onpage 229).

ExportThis function allows you to export the current document to the format you want to select.You will find the complete list of formats in the “Export” paragraph (see details onpage 231).

Import/Export preferencesOpen the “Import / Export” preferences window (see details on page 474).

19.1.4 Printing

Print: (Ctrl+P)Launches the wireframe printing of the entire scene or a part of it. If you are printing for the first time, Amapi Pro requires that you define the printing format(page feed, page format, margins, printer).

Printing configuration (Ctrl+Shift+P)A dialog box allows you to set the printing characteristics of your document. Depending on your printer, you will see a dialog box with the parameters you need to set forpage feeding, page size and orientation and margins values.

Printing preferencesOpens the printing preferences window (see details on page 474).

You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See“The Catalog” on page 443).

You may save a file from the “Catalog” room, using Amapi Pro’s File management tool (See“The Catalog” on page 443).

A dialog window from the Preferences /Printing menu, allows you to set the printingparameters. You may choose to print the measurements, in hidden line mode or to give a scalingfactor (“Preferences”> “Printing preferences”)

Reference Manual212

Printing a Postscript fileOpens a printing preferences window where you can select the destination folder and thename of the postscript (.ps) file.

19.1.5 Opening recent files

Opening recently opened files:At the bottom of the “File” menu, Amapi Pro lists the names of recently opened files. Thislist is useful to reopen a recent file from this list.

19.1.6 Leaving the program

Quit (Ctrl+Q)This command in the File Menu closes and quits Amapi Pro. If one of the open documentscontains unsaved modifications, Amapi Pro will ask you if you want to save them.

213 Amapi ProT M

19.2 EditThis paragraph shows the functions present in the editing menu. However, Amapi Pro hasseveral palettes which will give you an easier, faster and a better visual access.• “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206)

• “The Control panel” (see details on page 167)

Most of these functions are also available through keyboard shortcuts.

19.2.1 Basic commands

Undo (Ctrl+Z)Cancels the last operation.It is accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

• When you are not using a tool, it cancels all the operations carried out by the morerecently used tool.

• When you are using a tool, it cancels the last operation carried out with the tool in use. Cancel no longer has any effect when all the operations have been cancelled with aspecific tool.

Redo (Ctrl+R)This command of the File Menu restores the last undone action. Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

Validate (“Return key”)Validates the current action. Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

The number of possible successive cancellations is defined by the user in the preferencesmenu. You can have access to this option in the “Preferences editor” (Alt-P)> “User interface”>“Maximum undo levels” (see details on page 456).

Reference Manual214

Cancel (“Escape key”)Cancels all the operations made with the current tool. The tool is dropped so that youcan select another one.Accessible from the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206).

19.2.2 Copy

Cut (Ctrl+X)This command in the File Menu deletes the selected elements from the current scene andcopies them into the clipboard where they are stored until they are pasted.

Copy (Ctrl+C)This command in the File Menu places a copy of the selected elements from the currentscene into the clipboard without deleting them from the original scene.

Paste (Ctrl+V)This command of the File Menu will paste a copy of the current clipboard content in thegraphic workspace.

Duplicate (Ctrl+D)Duplication creates a clone of the selection and locates it in the same place (See “Theclones” on page 107).

Amapi Pro has a “Duplicate” tool (see details on page 388) which might be more suitable forthe kind manipulations you will do with this program.

Amapi Pro, pastes an object in the exact position (from the point of origin of the working space)where it was cut from, even if you have opened another document. If you paste the copy into theoriginal document, keep in mind that your copy will be superimposed onto the original object.

This kind of copy never generates a clone (See “The clones” on page 107). You could use it to take an object out of a group of clones:• Cut the cloned object (Ctrl+X) (see details on page 215)• Paste the object (Ctrl+V)

215 Amapi ProT M

19.2.3 Deletion

Delete (“Delete”)This command in the File Menu deletes the current selection. The difference with the “Cut”command is that nothing is saved in the clipboard.

Delete all (Ctrl+“Delete”)This command in the File Menu deletes all the objects of the current scene, including thehidden objects (See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

19.2.4 Selection

Select All (Ctrl+A)This command in the File Menu selects all the objects of the current scene.

Deselect All (Ctrl+Shift+A)This command in the File Menu deselects all the objects of the current scene. (See “Deselect all” on page 157).

Select next (“+”)This command in the File Menu selects the next object of the current scene. The order of theselection will follow that of the object creation.

Select previous (“-”) This command in the File Menu selects the previous object of the current scene. The order ofthe selection will follow that of the object creation.

19.2.5 The editing windows

Editing the object information (Ctrl I)Use the Information command if you want to see and/or modify the information about thecurrent selection.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel (See “Information” onpage 188) or by double-clicking on the object.

Reference Manual216

Editing the preferences (Alt+P)Open the “Edit preferences” palette.To get more information about this, see the “Preferences” paragraph (see details onpage 451).

Editing a shortcut (Alt+K)The “Edit a shortcut” tool can be very useful, because it allows you to set your own shortcutsand to get to your preferred tools or functions faster (See “Shortcuts Editor” on page 478).

Editing the scene graph of the scene (Alt+T)See “The Scene graph” paragraph on page 202.

Searching for objects (Alt+F)The “Search for objects” palette allows you to make a list of the objects in the scene accord-ing to the criteria you have selected. The available search criteria are:• Name of the object• Curves/Volumes• Polyhedral• NURBS• Groups• Text• Dynamic• Visible

The icon on the left hand side of the text editing area will launch the search.Amapi Pro will then list the name of the objects corresponding to the criteria.

You can select one or several objects in that list. They will become the current selection (see“The concept of selection” on page 147).

217 Amapi ProT M

19.3 Scene

19.3.1 Graphic display

Objects displayWhile modeling, you will manipulate various entities: points, edges, facets or objects (See“Entity” on page 94).Amapi Pro has several display modes for the objects of the scene which will allow you tobest highlight the entities you want to work with. This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see “The display modes” paragraph on page 180.

The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a lit effect to the “wireframe” mode.

The “Flat solid” mode gives a more realistic aspect to the objects by displaying thefacets of the objects. The “Flat solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Flat solid” mode.

The “Smoothed solid” mode correspond to the “Flat solid” mode on which anoperation of smoothing have been applied. This is the most realistic mode.The “Smoothed solid and edges” display mode adds edges to the “Smoothedsolid” mode.

TransparencyYou can add a transparency effect to the “solid” display modes. This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see “Transparency of the selected object” paragraph onpage 181.

The edge display is different depending on the operating mode “Change theconstruction mode” (see details on page 96):In NURBS operating mode, edges are not editable and they will not be displayed.Amapi Pro will display isoparametric curves, outlines and cutting curves instead of theedges. (See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

Reference Manual218

Display “with transparency effect”

Display “not transparent effect”

Simplified displayIt is possible to display the objects in a simplified way. In the case of complex scenes orobjects, a simplified display can be used in order to give a faster and clearer display. Youwill be able to choose between a simplified display of the entire scene and a simplifieddisplay of one or more objects indicated in the scene.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “Simplified display” paragraph onpage 177.

Enable/Disable the backface displayA frontface is the facet of a model where the normal is oriented toward theobserver.A backface is the facet of a model where the normal is not oriented toward theobserver.

Disabling the backface display is one of the ways to optimize display time.

19.3.2 The objects

Hide (Ctrl+H)Hide the selected objects.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.For more information, refer to the “Hide” paragraph on page 184.

Show hidden objects (Shift+H) Opens the function allowing you to indicate the objects to show.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,

refer to the “Show” paragraph on page 184.

Show selection (Alt+H)The “Isolate” mode-tool allows the user to work on the selection in progress without beingobstructed with the display of surrounding objects.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,refer to the “Isolate” paragraph.

219 Amapi ProT M

Group (Ctrl+G)Groups selected objects.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,refer to the “Group” paragraph on page 186.

Ungroup (Ctrl+Shift+G)Opens the function allowing you to indicate the groups to be ungrouped.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,refer to the “Ungroup”paragraph on page 186.

LayersOpens the layer window. Classification by layer enables you to arrange your objects orgroups according to the criteria of your choice. You will be able to hide one or more layers.You will also be able to lock one or more layers to allow modeling only on "active" layers.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel. For more information,refer to “The Layers” paragraph on page 198.

Working with or without the Dynamic Geometry Work without Dynamic Geometry Work with Dynamic Geometry

19.3.3 Rulers, working plane

Working in the working planeFor your modeling needs, you might want to work on a different working plane from the oneset by default.Indeed, you might want to work according to the current plane view. The working plane willbe reorientated according to the displacement of the point of view in the graphic workspace.In fact the working plane will always be on the same plane as the screen.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “Working in the view plane” paragraph

on page 169.

Toggle the scene / the axisYou might also want to reorientate the axis temporarily so as to change working plane whilemodeling. Amapi Pro proposes several ways to proceed:• Toggle the axis.

Reference Manual220

• Toggle the scene and the axis.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “Scene / orthonormal base toggling”

paragraph on page 171.

“Orthonormal base origin”Amapi Pro sets the origin of the rulers by default to the position at the center of the gridcalled “the ground”. You can constantly move it while modeling.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “Orthonormal base origin” paragraph

on page 173.

PerspectiveThis mode-tool allows you to toggle on one of two scene display modes:• The Conical Perspective is set by default. • The Orthographic Perspective allows you to observe the scene without perspective.

This display mode can, in some cases, allow a clearer visualization of your work and tomake easier some manipulations.

This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “Perspective” paragraph on page 176.

19.3.4 ConstraintsBy default, the cursor movement is free from any constraint. For some manipulations, cursormovement constraints or cursor positioning constraints can be set. See “The constraints” onpage 191.

Advanced ConstraintsThe advanced constraint tool permits moving or positioning the cursor according to con-straints defined by the user. They are located in a palette which can be toggled on and off.

This function is accessible through the control panel.(See “Advanced constraints” on page 194)

Constrains the cursor movement to a horizontal axisKeyboard shortcut: one pressure on the “Space-Bar”.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information about this, see the “The assistant palette” on page 206paragraph.

221 Amapi ProT M

Constrains the cursor movement to a vertical axisKeyboard shortcut: two pressures on the “Space-Bar”.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information, see “The assistant palette” paragraph on page 206.

Release the cursor from constrained movementThis function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information, see “The assistant palette” paragraph on page 206.

Snap to the gridThis mode-tool allows you to specify if the cursor is to be snapped or not onto the virtualmagnetism of the grid.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.To get more information, see the “Snapping” paragraph on page 174.

The not magnetized cursor moves freely in the scene.

The magnetized cursor snaps to the grid intersection points, defined by the gradationof the rulers.

Alignment GuidesThe “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily guide the cursor movement whencreating 3D points (See “Alignment guides” on page 462).

“Alignment guides” disabled

“Alignment guides” enabled

19.3.5 Construction modeAmapi Pro has two creation modes for the elements used as a basis for modeling:• “The Polyhedral models” (see details on page 97)• “The NURBS models” (see details on page 98)You will constantly be able to toggle from one construction mode to the other with the(Ctrl+B) keyboard shortcut.

Reference Manual222

19.4 ViewsThis menu gives access to the main navigational functions; however Amapi Pro has othervery effective interfaces:

“The Navigation Palette” (see details on page 136)

“The keyboard navigation” (see details on page 142) (keyboard only orcombination keyboard+mouse)

View all (shortcut: 0)(See “View All” on page 139)

View Detail (shortcut: 1)(See “View Detail” on page 140)

Zoom Out (shortcut: .)(See “Zoom In / Out” on page 140)

Zoom In (shortcut: 3) (See “Zoom In / Out” on page 140)

Make a direct viewpoint change (shortcut: Ctrl .)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

223 Amapi ProT M

Progressive tuning of a viewpoint (shortcut: 7)(See “To rotate around the scene” on page 143)

Viewpoint(See “Record the current viewpoint” on page 138)(See “Delete a viewpoint” on page 139)

Front view (shortcut: 2(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Left view (shortcut: 4)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Top view (shortcut: 5)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Right view (shortcut: 6)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Rear view (shortcut: 8)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Bottom view (shortcut: 9)(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142)

Reference Manual224

19.5 ToolsWe saw that the tools that are specific to each Room are arranged in palettes.

The Modeling room has many tools. For more clarity, Amapi Pro displays only the tools thatyou will most likely need at each stage of your work. That is why they were split in three palettes:• The Construction palette• The Modeling palette• The Assembly paletteEach one of these main palettes has a “Basic toolkit” composed of the fundamental toolsyou always have at hand, at every modeling step.

The "Tool" menu gives access to each tool existing in the modeling palette. For more detailson the use of each one of them, refer to the corresponding paragraph in “Modeling room” onpage 237.

19.5.1 Advanced toolsThis menu contains some special tools which are not present in the four tools palettes. Theyare accessible either from the Control panel or from the Information on the current object.

The basic toolkit The construction palette

The modeling palette

The assembly palette

This palette is always

visible. It contains the “Move”, “Rotate”, “Scale” and “Stretch” tools.

This palette contains basic line and surface drawing tools as well as

advanced surface creation tools.

This palette contains modification tools that can edit existing objects.

This palette contains tools to carry out complex assemblies and a few

generic tools

225 Amapi ProT M

19.5.2 PeripheralsThis menu contains the management functions for input peripherals.

19.5.2.1 MicroScribeSetting the digitalization of the 3D MicroScribe device (See “3D Digitizing” on page 233).

Connect: enables the MicroScribe device

Disconnect: disables the MicroScribe device

Calibrate: MicroScribe device working planes initialization sequence

Reference Manual226

19.6 WindowThis menu is divided into two parts:

WindowThis function gives you the possibility of working in single-view or multi-viewwindow.This function is also accessible through the Control Panel.

For more information on this subject, consult “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page178.

DocumentsThis part of the menu allows you to move from one open document to another. It lists theopen documents. A check mark precedes the name of the current document.To move from the one to the other, click on the name of the document you wish to work on. The combination of the “Ctrl-Tab” keys allows you to pass quickly from one document tothe other (in the order of appearance on the list).

227 Amapi ProT M

19.7 RoomsAmapi Pro does not limit you to use a specific procedure, but it does propose to lead youthrough a choice of specific steps, depending on the result you wish to obtain.A "Room" corresponds to each one of these steps.The “Tool” menu gives access to the Rooms. To obtain more details on the use of each oneof them, refer to the paragraph which is devoted to it:

• The Modeling Room allows you to build, model and assemble your model (See“Modeling room” on page 237).

• The Rendering Room is where you will develop textures and lighting (See “RenderingRoom” on page 421).

• The Catalog Room in which you will insert objects or will save your creations (See “TheCatalog” on page 443).

You can also go from one Room to the other by clicking on the iconcorresponding to the desired Room (on the top right of the screen).

Reference Manual228

20 Import / Export

20.1 ImportList of import file formats supported by Amapi Pro:

Programs Suffixes Comments

3D Studio 3ds Autodesk file format.This format is becoming a standard for 3D files.

Amapi Pro a3p Amapi Pro native format

Amapi Designer a3d Amapi Designer native format

DWG dwg Autocad binary native format by Autodesk. Compact and complete, it isvery useful to communicate with Autocad.

DXF dxf The most well known PC and Mac graphic file type. Used by all the 3Dprograms.

IGES igs Industry standard, used by CATIA, Pro Engineer, Euclid…

Illustrator 3.0 ai Well-known 2D format for graphical artists.

Open Inventor iv CAD format file (was used as a base for the VRML format).

STL stl Stereolitography file format

229 Amapi ProT M

There are several ways to import a file:

• Use the File > Import menu• Use the File > Open menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-O).• Use the File > Merge menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-M).• Click on the icon of the “The Catalog” (see details on page 443).

VRML 1/97 wrl The most commonly used 3D format on the Web !

WaveFrontObj obj Allows exchange with programs such as:• Shade• Archicad• Alias / Wavefront• Bryce• Carrara• Electric Image• Maya• Nendo• Poser• Softimage• Vue d’Esprit

Some imported files may have topology problems. The “Information” tool can help to solvethese problems.(See “Information” on page 188).

Reference Manual230

20.2 ExportList of export file formats supported by Amapi Pro:

Programs Suffixes Types of supported objects

Comments

3D Studio 3ds Polyhedral Autodesk file format.This format is becoming a standardfor 3D files.

Amapi Pro a3p PolyhedralNURBS

Amapi3D files

Amapi Designer a3d PolyhedralNURBS

BREPs and some dynamic geometries are reduced tobasic primitives before exportation.

Carrara Studio car Polyhedral Carrara Studio files

DXF dxf Polyhedral The most well known PC and Mac graphic file type. Usedby all the 3D programs.

DWG dwg Polyhedral Binary Autocad format, very well known on PC and Macgraphic stations

IGES igs PolyhedralNURBS

Industry standard, used by CATIA, Pro Engineer,Euclid…

Illustrator ai Used to export a file compatible with Illustrator (See“Printing a Postscript file” on page 213).

Open Inventor iv PolyhedralNURBS

CAD format file (was used as a base for the VRMLformat).

STL stl Polyhedral Stereolitography file format

231 Amapi ProT M

There are several ways to export a file:

• Use the File > Export menu• Use the File > Save as menu (keyboard shortcut Crtl-E).• Click on the icon of the “The Catalog” (see details on page 443).

VRML 1/97 wrl Polyhedral The most commonly used 3D format on the Web !

WaveFrontObj obj PolyhedralNURBS

Allows exchange with programs such as:• Shade• Archicad• Alias / Wavefront• Bryce• Carrara• Electric Image• Maya• Nendo• Poser• Softimage• Vue d’Esprit

Reference Manual232

21 3D Digitizing

Amapi Pro allows you to model using the digitizing devices to create a numeric model froma physic model. For example, you may use a 3D digitizer to create a car from a model. Thedigitizing process is used to create lines or facets and assemble them to realize a completemodel.

21.1 MicroScribeA MicroScribe 3D digitizing system is a preciseand easy to use device, commonly used for thiskind of work. It is built by Immersion Corp. To use the MicroScribe in Amapi Pro, you justhave to connect it and calibrate it. After that all ofthe functions that create 3d points (using the linedrawing tools) or facets will use the 3d digitizersinput. To come back to a classic modeling mode,just disconnect it. Use the Tools/Peripheralsmenu to connect, disconnect and calibrate it.Amapi Pro automatically detects the MicroScribedevice when it is connected to a serial port or anUSB port. It is not necessary to install a driver. Amapi Pro includes the MicroScribe drivers.

233 Amapi ProT M

21.2 CalibrationThe calibration process consists of defining thetrue working space of the digitizer. Thisoperation must be made each time Amapi Pro islaunched or when the object or the digitizer ismoved. Use the Tools/Peripherals menu to dothe calibration.

Amapi Pro asks you to define the followingpoints:• xmin, xmax: the X axis digitizing domain

limits.• zmin, zmax: the Z axis digitizing domain

limits.• y0: the working plane vertical position in Y

The X,Y and Z axis correspond to the axisdisplayed in Amapi Pro.

These points define a plane from the center of the base of the digitizer. Generally, thesepoints will be taken on the table where the object to be digitized is placed.Once the calibration is done, you can perform the digitizing operation.

21.3 The tools which allow you to digitizeThe “Polyline”, “Curve”, “Interpolated curve”, and “Extract Facets” drawing tools allowyou to digitize 3D objects. Connect the 3D digitizer before using it with these tools and disconnect it to be able to usethe mouse again. Use the Tools/Peripherals menu to connect, disconnect and calibrate it.

To digitize a line on a 3D object:

1) connect the 3D digitizer (Tools/Peripherals menu), after having calibrated it.

2) click on the polyline tool.

3) place the digitizer’s head on the first point to be captured.

4) press on the left pedal digitizer.

5) move the digitizer’s head to a new point on the object.

6) repeat the operation as many times as necessary to get a line.

y

x

z

Reference Manual234

7) End the drawing by pressing on the digitizer’s right pedal or by pressing the Enter key ofthe keyboard.

21.4 AutoPlot Mode and Scaling factorThe AutoPlot mode can be accessed from the preferences dialog “Preferences editor” onpage 447, allowing you to digitize in continuous mode by moving the digitizer’s head on thesurface. In this mode, a point is automatically created after the digitizer’s head covers adistance defined by the AutoPlot Distance parameter.A scale factor can be applied to the points generated by the digitizer to make them in aspace which will be consistent with the rest of the scene. Adjust the Scale parameter in thepreferences dialog.You can have access to this option in the “Preferences editor” (Alt-P)>“Graphicenvironment”> “MicroScribe” (see details on page 464).

235 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual236

Modeling room

In the modeling room, Amapi Pro displays only the tools likely to be necessary foreach step of modeling.

That is why they are divided into three palettes:

Each room offers different functions called “Tools”.

The tools of the modeling room have been separatedinto specialized groups of tools called “Toolspalettes”.

Amapi Pro will display only the tools needed for eachstep of work. This is why they have been divided intothree different groups. Each group, called a “Palette”,corresponds to a modeling step:

• The “Basic toolkit”• The Construction palette• The Modeling palette• The Assembly palette

The general operation of a modeling tool is based onthe same principle as the tools of the other rooms (See“Using tools” on page 80).

Constructionpalette

Assemblypalette

Modelingpalette

239 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual240

241 Amapi ProT M

22 Basic toolkit

Above each main tools palette, a “Toolkit” is displayed. It contains tools which are alwaysavailable even while using a tool from the main palettes.

Icon Tool name Description See

“Move” Use this tool to change the position of the current object. page 242

“Rotate” Use this tool to rotate the current object. page 244

“Scale”This tool changes the size of the current object, eitherkeeping its original proportions, or distorting it vertically orhorizontally.

page 248

“Stretch”The “Stretch” tool is used to move the current selection(facets, edges and/or points). The selected objects will bedeformed according to the cursor movement.

page 252

22.1 MoveThe “Move” tool allows you to move aselected object in the scene (See “The

concept of selection” on page 147).

22.1.1 The move toolThere are several ways to move objects:

• By moving the object “by hand” in the graphic workspace. There are two possibleinterfaces:

• A short click followed by a cursor motion moves the selection. A second click locksits position.

• A long click allows you to move the selection. It will follow the cursor motion. Justrelease the mouse button to lock its position.

You are allowed to give positioning or moving constraints to the cursor with “Theconstraints” (see details on page 191).

• By entering new coordinates directly in the data window (see details on page 163).

• By using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): this edit mode allows a fineand interactive tuning of the numerical parameters (see details on page 162).

Now, you may move the selection again or leave the tool by putting it beside or by pressingthe “Enter” key.

Reference Manual242

22.1.2 Moving when no tool is selectedWhen no tool is selected, you can move any object in the scene, even if it is not the currentobject (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).A long click allows you to move any other object in the scene. That one will follow thecursor motion. Just release the mouse button to lock its position.This kind of moving does not allow editable parameters.

22.1.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool can be applied at any DG level. Its effects willbe reflected at the higher levels. “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” (see details on page 109).

The cursor motion follows the working plane (see details on page 488)The motion of the mouse will modify two out of three displayed values (x, y and z) only. There are several possibilities to modify the third value:• Change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Automatic duplication:If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while selecting the “Move” tool, Amapi Pro will automatically generatea copy of the current object.

Change current object: .This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”accessory.

This tool must be distinguished from the “Stretch” tool (see details on page 252) whichmoves the current selection while the “Move” tool moves the selected object(s).

243 Amapi ProT M

22.2 RotateThe “Rotate” tool rotates the current selection(See “The concept of selection” on page 147)

on an axis passing by its geometric center (default) andperpendicular to the working plane.This tool allows you to rotate according to a givenangle, or rotate an object to align one point of theobject and one point selected in the scene. In bothcases, the position of the center and the rotation planecan be customized.

22.2.1 Methods of rotationThe operation can be made using one of the two following methods. toggle from one to theother by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the correspondingicon.

22.2.1.1 Rotate by a given angleThe gradations of the “rotation circle”can be used as a help to rotate the

selection. Select a method to set the “rotation angle”parameter:• The “freehand” method in the graphic

workspace:• A first click to start the action: the

selection rotates on its rotation referencepoint, depending on the cursor movement. A second click sets the position.

• Or, click and hold down the mouse button to rotate the selection which rotates on itsrotation reference point, depending on the cursor movement. Releasing the mousebutton sets its position.

• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163).• Using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): This edit mode allows fine and

interactive tuning of the numeric parameters (see details on page 162).

1- click

2- click

Reference Manual244

22.2.1.2 Rotate to alignThis method allows you to rotate an object, on its rotation reference point, to alignone point of the object and one point selected in the scene using:

• A gradation from the “rotation circle”. Click on the point to be aligned, then click onthe desired gradation.

• A point to be selected in the scene. Click on the point to be aligned, then pressand hold the “Shift” key and click on thedesired point.

22.2.2 Rotation axis orientationA rotation is always done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The two axis that parallels the current view plane the most define the working plane, wherethe modeling will be done. The user will have to change the viewpoint to change theworking plane (See “The Navigation” on page 135).It is also possible to “Working in the view plane” (see details on page 169) or to “Scene /orthonormal base toggling” (see details on page 171).

22.2.3 Rotation reference point repositioningThe rotation reference point is a pointlocated on the rotation axis. The

default center is the geometric center of theselection. To change it, use the “Change therotation center” accessory (See “Toolaccessories” on page 85), then select the pointof the object which will be the new rotationpoint.

1- click

2- click

1- click 2- Shift+click

245 Amapi ProT M

22.2.4 Global / Local options

22.2.5 Tuning the gradation accuracyThe “+” or “-” keys will increase or decrease the number of gradations of the “rotationcircle”.

22.2.6 Magnetizing the rotation circle gradationsYou can choose to magnetize or not to magnetize the cursor on the rotation circle gradation:You will toggle from one mode to the other by clicking on the toggle-icon in the optionspalette.

Rotation is continuous and follows the cursor movement.

The rotation undergoes an attraction to the gradations of the rotation circle, turning toeach angle of the gradation steps.

When launching the tool, this option is initialized with the current magnetic value of thegrid, controlled by the toggle-icon integrated into the Control panel (See “Snapping” onpage 174).

Global rotation Local rotation

Optiondescription

The complete selection rotates on a unique rotation point ( ).

Each element of the selection rotates on its own rotation point ( ).

Illustration

Reference Manual246

22.2.7 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at

higher levels.• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the

entire shape(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Automatic duplication:If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate theentire objects selection. The tool action will then be made on this copy

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107): • If the current selection is a part of a cloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will get the same

transformation.• If the current selection is a cloned object, it will not be deformed. None of the clones will be rotated

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Change the current object: .This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”accessory.

247 Amapi ProT M

22.3 ScaleThis tool is used to change the size of the current selection, keeping its originalproportions or distorting it vertically or horizontally (See “The concept of

selection” on page 147). A scaling percentage, a dimension, a surface or a volume can alsobe set.

There are three ways of scaling:

• “by hand”, using the object bounding box (click to start the action, move cursor, thenrelease the mouse button to validate).

• By entering a value (dimension, percentage surface or volume) in the parameter palette(see details on page 163).

• Using the “Remote Control” (“Ctrl”+“Shift”+Arrow): This edit mode allows a fine andinteractive tuning of the numerical parameters (see details on page 162).

Original object Proportionally scaled object Vertically scaled object

Not proportional scaling: the “manual” scaling uses the constraints set by the user. A cursormovement without any constraint makes a proportional scaling in the three dimensions. But acursor movement with constraint (see details on page 250) or values entered through thekeyboard allows a different scaling in the three dimensions.

Reference Manual248

22.3.1 Center / base reference pointThe reference point is the point the scaling will be made from. Amapi Pro gives the choicebetween two points:

The geometric center of the object

The center of the base of its bounding box

Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking onthe corresponding icon.

It is also possible to select a point on the object to define the reference point (See“Customizing the reference point” on page 249).

22.3.2 Customizing the reference pointThe reference point is the point the scaling will be made from.

It is also possible to select a point on the object to define the reference point. To do this, usethe “Change the scale center” accessory, then select the point of the scene which will be thenew reference point.

The reference pointis the center of the object

The reference pointis the center of the base

of the bounding box of the object

249 Amapi ProT M

22.3.3 The constraintsAmapi Pro proposes three types of constraints. Toggle from one to the other by using theicons located in “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206); or by pressing the “Space-Bar”

22.3.4 Global / Local options

Proportionalscaling

Horizontalscaling

Verticalscaling

Editableparametersin the graphicworkspace

Editableparametersin the parameter palette

•X (Width)•Y (Height)•Z (Depth)

•X (Width)•Y (Height)•Z (Depth)

•X (Width)•Y (Height)•Z (Depth)

•Scale factor •Surface•Volume to reach

•Scale factor x•Scale factor y•Scale factor z

•Scale factor x•Scale factor y•Scale factor z

Global scaling Local scaling

Optiondescription

The entire selection is scaled from a common reference point.

Each element selected is scaledfrom its own reference point.

Illustration

Reference Manual250

22.3.5 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at

higher levels.• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the

entire shape(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Automatic duplication:If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate theentire objects selection. The tool action will then be made on this copy

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) to set a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Change current object: .This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”accessory.

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107): • If the current selection is a part of a cloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will get the same

transformation.• If the current selection is a cloned object, it will not be deformed. None of its clones will be

transformed

251 Amapi ProT M

22.4 StretchThe “Stretch” tool allows you to move the current selection (facets, edges and/orpoints). The selected objects will be distorted depending on the cursor movement

(See “The concept of selection” on page 147).

Illustration: Stretch a set of points to make the groove in an apricot

22.4.1 The selectionThere are two cases;

• The elements have been selected (facets, edges and/or points) before picking up thetool or the selection was changed inside the tool: a click in the graphic workspace willstart the stretch action.

• The elements have not been selected (facets, edges and/or points) on the currentobject(s): before starting the action, a click in the graphic workspace will start theselection of the closest elements corresponding to the selectable entity (See “Theselectable entities” on page 149).

The object before using the tool

The object after using the tool

Reference Manual252

22.4.2 Movement modes optionsThis tool has several movement modes as options:• An absolute movement mode.• A movement mode along the normal.Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking onthe corresponding icon.

Stretch the selectionAll the selected elements are

moved while keeping their relative position.

Stretch each element of the selection following the normal.

All the selected elements are moved the same distance but not in the same direction. Each one is moved following its own normal from the original object.

Illustration:

Editableparameters

• • Move x• Move y• Move z

• •Length

253 Amapi ProT M

22.4.3 Stretch NURBS objectsNURBS objects have a Dynamic Geometry level corresponding to their control polygon.When working at that Dynamic Geometry level, the “Stretch” tool will work just like onpolygonal models but on the control polygon and not on the object itself.(See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Polygonal object NURBS objectand its control polygon

Stretch a pointon a polygonal object

Stretch a pointon the control polygon

of a NURBS object

Stretch a pointon a polygonal object

Stretch a pointon the control polygon

of a NURBS object

Reference Manual254

22.4.4 Stretch an object having a Deformer control box

The “Deform” (see details on page 374) tool adds aDynamic Geometry level corresponding to a Deformercontrol box (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The object itself will be transformed following the actionsmade on this “Deformer control box”. The use of thiscontrol box works as on the NURBS objects control box(See “Stretch NURBS objects” on page 254).

The “Deformer control box” accessory from the “Deform”tool allows you to modify the mesh density in x,y and/or zto work more or less precisely (See “The meshed controlbox editing accessories” on page 376).

22.4.5 Control of the depth of a cutThe “Stretch” tool allows you to control the depth of a cut made with the“Punch” tool.

(See “Punch” on page 357)

22.4.6 Editing the tangents of the NURBS curvesThe “Stretch” tool allows you to edit the tangents of the NURBS curves to modifythe shape of a curve after it is built. To do this,

• Select the tangent control accessory. • Click on the curve at the place you wish to modify it.• A line depicting the tangent appears.

The same object and the line allowing you to set the depth of the cut

in the “Stretch” tool

The cut depth line while setting it with the

“Stretch” tool

Object cut with the“Punch” tool where

the depth has been reduced

Object cut with the “Punch” tool.

The object is drilled from a face through the

other one

255 Amapi ProT M

• By moving its ends you will adjust the tangent.• It is possible to add as many tangents as necessary..

22.4.7 Additional information

These tangents are temporary and will not be saved when leaving the tool.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool able to edit the first DG level bycarrying out topological modifications. Their effects will show at higher levels.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Automatic duplication:If the “Ctrl” key is pressed while picking up the tool, Amapi Pro will automatically duplicate theentire objects selection. The tool action will then apply to this copy

The motion of the cursor follows the working plane (see details on page 488)The motion of the mouse will modify two out of three displayed values (x, y and z) only. There are several possibilities to modify the third value:• Change the point of view (See “The Navigation” on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

While using this tool, the gradated axis of the orthonormal base (X is red, Y is green and Z isblue) will be displayed. They will help to make accurate positioning and can work together withthe cursor movement and position constraints (See “The constraints” on page 191).

This tool must be distinguished from the “Move” tool (see details on page 242) which movesthe selected object(s) while the “Stretch” moves the current selection.

The tool and the clones (See “The clones” on page 107): If the current selection is a part of acloned object, it will be deformed. All its clones will undergo the same transformation.

Change current object: This tool allows you to change the current object by using the “Change the current object”accessory.

Reference Manual256

257 Amapi ProT M

23 Construction Palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to draw the shapes that will be the modeling base.

Icon Tool name Description See

“Surface and volumeprimitives”

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 3Dshapes. page 258

“Line drawing”

This tool displays a sub-tools palette to quickly draw numerous 2D or 3Dlines. page 277

“Extract Lines” This tool creates curve(s) from points selected on the current object orexisting objects of the scene. page 300

“Extract Facets” This tool creates an object made up of several facets. page 304

“Sweep” The basic use of this tool is to create sweeped shapes from curves.however, it can also extrude facets, edges or points page 307

“Double-Sweep” This tool creates a surface from a section and two profiles. page 321

“Ruled Surface” This tool lets you create a “skin” tightened between two or more 2D or3D curves. page 324

“Coons Surface” This tool generates a surface from connected curves drawing a closedperimeter. page 331

“Gordon surface” This tool creates a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface isgenerated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves page 334

“Manifold” This tool creates a volume from NURBS surfaces which will define thefuture volume page 336

23.1 Surface and volume primitivesThis tool displays a sub-tools palette which allows you to quickly build many 3Dshapes.

These shapes are called primitives as they will often be used as building blocks for theconstruction of your models. Sphere, cube, cone, cylinder are examples of primitives. Click on the icon depicting the desired primitive then follow the specific instructions.

• “Cube” (see details on page 260)

• “Sphere” (see details on page 263)

• “Cone” (see details on page 266)

• “Cylinder” (see details on page 267)

• “Tetrahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Octahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Icosahedron” (see details on page 268)

• “Dodecahedron” (see details on page 269)

• “Height-Fields” (see details on page 272)

• “Grid” (see details on page 273)

• “Text” (see details on page 274)

It is possible to make several drawings before releasing the palette.

Reference Manual258

For most surface and volume primitives, the creation can be done in polygonalmode or in NURBS mode. It must be specified if an object will be polygonal or

NURBS while creating it (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Prodisplays a toggle-icon in order to switch from one construction mode to the other. Check thatthe button corresponding to the desired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the(Ctrl+B) shortcut.

This palette can be floating or fixed. This option can be found in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Sub-tools floating palette display” (see details on page 455).• If the palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.

Horizontal display of the palette.

Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.

Palette unlocked: it appears when using the current tool.• If the palette is fixed, it will be displayed in the tools palette area.

259 Amapi ProT M

23.1.1 CubeAmapi Pro offers several methods to create a cube. It can be created by setting itscenter or its base. You will be able to choose between two NURBS cube construction

modes. It is also easy to create a rectangular parallelepiped.

23.1.1.1 Creation MethodsClick on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the centerWith this method, the tool will first ask you to set the position of the center point ofthe parallelepiped. Then it will ask you to set the size of the cube. Click on an icon to

put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from oneoption to the other:

Cube Horizontal rectangle parallelepiped

Vertical rectangle parallelepiped

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Radius (r) •Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Z

•Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Z

r

r

r

Radius X

Rad

ius

Y

Reference Manual260

From the baseWith this method, the tool will ask you to set the position of the base point of theparallelepiped. Then it will ask you to set the size of the cube. Click on an icon to put

a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option tothe other:

23.1.1.2 NURBS cubesIf you are working in the NURBS construction mode (see details on page 98) Amapi Prooffers you two options for NURBS cube construction.

Cube Horizontal rectangle parallelepiped

Vertical rectangle parallelepiped

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Dimension (d)If d<0, the cube will be drawn below the base point

•Dimension x•Dimension y•Dimension z

•Dimension x•Dimension y•Dimension z

NURBS cube(NURBS BREP with six faces)

NURBS pole-cube(NURBS BREP with only one surface)

|d| |d|

d Dimension x

Dim

ensi

on y

261 Amapi ProT M

23.1.1.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level of which the label isdepending on the object type.

• A polyhedral “Cube” will generate a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume

• A “NURBS cube” will generate a first DG level labeled polyhedral volume and a second level

labeled Poly-NURBS

• A “NURBS pole-cube” will generate a first DG level labeled Grid structure and a second level

labeled NURBS volume(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Reference Manual262

23.1.2 SphereAmapi Pro offers several methods to create a sphere. It can be created by setting itscenter or its base. It is also possible to easily create an ellipsoid and set the number of

points of the generated mesh. Finally, geodesic spheres can be built.

23.1.2.1 Creation MethodsClick on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the centerWith this method, the tool requires setting the center point of the sphere’s positionbefore the next construction step, setting the radius.

Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other.

Sphere Horizontal ellipsoid Vertical ellipsoid

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Radius (r) •Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Z

•Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Z

rr

r

r

Radius X

Rad

ius

Y

263 Amapi ProT M

From the baseWith this method, the tool will ask you to set the base point of the sphere’s positionbefore the next construction step, setting the diameter.

Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other.

23.1.2.2 Geodesic spheresSeveral options are available. toggle from one to the other by clicking on the correspondingicon or by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys.

Sphere Horizontal ellipsoid Vertical ellipsoid

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Diameter (d)If d<0, the sphere will be drawn below the base point

•Diameter x•Diameter y•Diameter z

•Diameter x•Diameter y•Diameter z

pole-sphere(default option)

Geodesic spherebased on a cube

Geodesic spherebased on

an icosahedron

Geodesic spherebased on

an octahedron

|d|

d

|d|

Diameter x

Dia

met

er y

Reference Manual264

23.1.2.3 Setting the number of pointsOnce the sphere is drawn, Amapi Pro suggests setting the number of points that define thesphere. The greater is the number of points, the smoother is the sphere. The tuning can bemade with the +/- keys.

23.1.2.4 Additional information

No points=7 No points=8 No points=9

Only the pole-sphere can be built in NURBS. The geodesic spheres are only polygonalshapes.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a DG label depending on the typeof sphere:

• The polygonal spheres are labeled Polygonal volume.

• The NURBS pole-sphere generates a NURBS volume, controlled by a polygonal volume. Thus, itadds two DG levels labeled NURBS volume and Polygonal volume.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

265 Amapi ProT M

23.1.3 ConeThis tool allows you to quickly create a cone. First of all, the position and dimensionsof the base will be set, then the height and finally the section size. A cone can be

eventually truncated; to do this, give a non null value to the last section radius. The +/- keysallow you to quickly tune the number of intermediate sections and the number of pointsdefining the sections. Then, Amapi Pro will suggest closing the openings before validatingthe operation.

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):

• The polygonal cone adds a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume.

• The NURBS cone generates a NURBS volume, controlled by a grid Structure. Thus, it adds two DGlevels labeled NURBS volume and Grid Structure.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Cone: made from 4 intermediate sections where each section is made

up of 8 points

Truncated cone: made up of 2 intermediate sections and where each

section is made up of 8 points

The pyramid is a cone where the sections are made up of 4 points

Reference Manual266

23.1.4 CylinderThis tool allows you to quickly create a cylinder. First ofall, the position and the base dimensions have to be set,

and then the height. The +/- keys allow you to quickly tune thenumber of intermediate sections and the number of pointsdefining the sections. Finally, Amapi Pro will suggest closing theopenings before validating the operation.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):

• A polyhedral “Cylinder” adds a first DG level labeled Polyhedral volume.

• A NURBS “Cylinder” generates a NURBS volume controlled by a Grid-structure; adds two DG levelslabeled NURBS volume and Grid-structure.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

267 Amapi ProT M

23.1.5 TetrahedronThe “Tetrahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonicshapes are built following the same procedure. To learn

how to do this, see “Dodecahedron” paragraph (see details onpage 269).

23.1.6 OctahedronThe “Octahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonicshapes are built following the same procedure. To learn

how to do it, see paragraph “Dodecahedron” paragraph (seedetails on page 269).

23.1.7 IcosahedronThe “Icosahedron” is a platonic shape. All platonicshapes are built following the same procedure. To learn

how to do it, see paragraph “Dodecahedron” paragraph (seedetails on page 269).

Reference Manual268

23.1.8 DodecahedronAmapi Pro offers several methods for creating a platonicshape. It can be created by setting its center or its base.

Then, the dimensions of its bounding sphere are set. This spherecan become an ellipsoid if it is stretched horizontally orvertically.

23.1.8.1 Creation MethodsClick on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

From the centerIn the first step of this method, the tool will ask you to set the position of the centerpoint of the dodecahedron before the next construction step which is setting the

radius(es).Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other.

Dodecahedron Horizontal Dodecahedron Vertical Dodecahedron

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Radius (r)of the bounding sphere

•Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Zof the bounding ellipsoid

•Radius X•Radius Y•Radius Zof the bounding ellipsoid

r

rr Radius X R

adiu

s y

269 Amapi ProT M

From the baseIn the first step of this method, the tool will ask to set the position of the base point ofthe dodecahedron before the next construction step, setting the radius(es).

Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar”toggle from one option to the other:

23.1.8.2 Additional information

Dodecahedron Horizontal Dodecahedron Vertical Dodecahedron

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Diameter (d)of the bounding sphere

•Diameter X•Diameter Y•Diameter Zof the bounding ellipsoid

•Diameter X•Diameter Y•Diameter Zof the bounding ellipsoid

The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) This tool generates a first DG level which is labeleddepending on the type of object generated :

• A platonic Polygonal shape will generate a first DG level labeled Polygonal volume

• A platonic NURBS shape will generate a first DG level labeled Polygonal volume and a second

level labeled Poly-NURB.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

dd

dDiameter X

Dia

met

er y

Reference Manual270

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

271 Amapi ProT M

23.1.9 Height-FieldsThis tool allows you to convert a 2D image into a 3D object, the different heightsand altitudes dependant on the colors of the image.

1) The tool requires you to draw the grid that will be transformed as a relief (See “Grid” onpage 273).

2) A dialog box then asks you to select the image to be converted.

3) Amapi Pro will map the image onto the grid, moving the points of the grid to give it arelief. This displacement is done according to the color of the area: the lighter the color,the higher the altitude. The darker points remain at zero altitude.

4) The tuning of the maximum altitude is made by using the + or - keys or by entering avalue in the parameter palette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106) (See “The objects with a grid-structure (Quad mesh)” on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Grid Structure. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

It is recommended to use grey levels images.

Reference Manual272

23.1.10 GridUse the “Grid” tool to create a flat mesh. Amapi Pro asks you to set the origin (acorner), then to set the dimensions of one cell. Finally, you will enter the number of

cells needed in height (V) and in width (U).

This tool builds ’grid structure’ objects (see details on page 106).

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):

• A polygonal grid adds a first DG level labeled Grid-structure.

• A NURBS grid generates a NURBS volume controlled by a Grid-structure; adds two DG levels:Level 2 : NURBS volume

Level 1 : Grid Structure(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

At the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Only complete grids are generated. If a cell (or facet) size is 10 X 10, the entire grid size will bea multiple of 10, such as 180 X 50, but never 182 X 47.

Width of a cell

Hei

ght

of a

cel

l

Example of a grid with 3 cells in V and 4 cells in U

273 Amapi ProT M

23.1.11 TextThe “Text” tool allows you to insert editable 3D text into a scene, and has severalparameters to customize its graphic appearance.

When using this tool, set the text position’s first point (See “Alignment” on page 276), byentering the coordinates in the parameter palette or by clicking on the graphic workspace.Then select the parameters by filling or checking the boxes in the dialog box.

TextEnter the text in the text box

Text: Hello

FontSelect a font from the list of choices

Font: Times new roman

BoldCheck this box to generate bold text

Font: Times new roman Bold

ItalicCheck this box to generate italic text

Font: Times new roman Italic

Outline onlyWhen checking this box, Amapi Prowill only draw the text outline. Thisoption is the opposite of the filled text.Specific case: A text without depth butbut only with an outline is a curve.

Text outline only (without depth)(this object is a curve)

Reference Manual274

NURBSCheck this box to generate NURBSobjects.

Polygonal text

NURBS text

ScaleThis parameter allows you to tune thesize of the text

Text size before the scale downsizing

Text size after the scale downsizing

DepthEnter the text depth in this area. A text with a zero depth is a flat text.

Depth at zero

Depth with a value

BevelChoose to bevel or not the text letters.

Text not beveled

Beveled text

275 Amapi ProT M

SmoothingSet the smoothing range (default =2).

Smoothing range = 2

Smoothing range = 8

AlignmentCheck the icon corresponding to thechoice of alignment (on left, centeredor on right). The alignment will bemade from where the text position'sfirst point was set when entering thetool.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Text (See“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

To edit a Text group, simply double-click on it.

The letters of a text are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the “Ungroup”(see details on page 186) tool located in the control panel.Attention! an ungrouped text is not be editable.

Left alignment

Centered

Right alignment

Reference Manual276

23.2 Line drawingThis tool displays a sub-tools palette with several kinds of 2D or 3D lines that canbe quickly and easily drawn. The curves created from these lines will be used as a

building base for the construction of your models (See “Curves” on page 91).Click on the icon depicting the desired primitive then follow the instructions.

• “Rectangle / Square” (see details on page 279)

• “Circle” (see details on page 281)

• “Arc” (see details on page 284)

• “Polyline” (see details on page 286)

• “Interpolated curve” (see details on page 289)

• “Curve” (see details on page 292)

• “Helix” (see details on page 295)

• “Symmetry” (see details on page 298)

• “Reverse curve points” (see details on page 299)

It is possible to make several drawings before releasing the palette.

277 Amapi ProT M

If the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is anopen curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to

connect the new line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” onpage 91). Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.Amapi Pro keeps the desired option as long as the “Line drawing” tool is in use (as long asthe sub-tools palette is displayed). The default option is “Do not connect”.

For most surfaces and volumes primitives, the creation can be done in polygonalmode or in NURBS mode. This must be specified while creating the object (See

“Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Pro displays a toggle-icon allowingyou to switch from one drawing mode to another. Check that the button corresponding to thedesired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the (Ctrl+B) shortcut.

This palette can be floating or fixed. This option can be found in the “Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Palettes display”> “Sub-tools floating palette display” (see details on page 455).• If the palette is floating, it can be relocated, reoriented and locked/unlocked:

Palette relocation handle.

Vertical display of the palette.

Horizontal display of the palette.

Palette locked: it remains displayed whatever the current tool.

Palette unlocked: it appears only in the current tool.• If the palette is fixed, it will be displayed in the tools palette area.

Reference Manual278

23.2.1 Rectangle / SquareTo draw a rectangle, define its two opposite corners.Set the first corner by clicking a point in the graphic workspace or by entering its

coordinates in the parameter palette. Do the same to set the opposite angle or enteraccurately the dimensions of the rectangle in the parameter palette.

23.2.1.1 The constraintsClick on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

23.2.1.2 Draw a squareThis option toggles between the drawing of a rectangle and a square.

No constraint Horizontal constraint Vertical constraint

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Width•Height

•Opposite corner x•Opposite corner y•Opposite corner z

•Width•Height

•Opposite corner x•Opposite corner y•Opposite corner z

•Width•Height

•Opposite corner x•Opposite corner y•Opposite corner z

Width

Hei

ght

Width

Hei

ght

279 Amapi ProT M

23.2.1.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool creates a DG where the labeling depends onthe type of desired object:

• A Polyhedral “Rectangle / Square” will create a first DG level labeled Polyline.

• A NURBS “Rectangle / Square” will create a first DG level labeled Polyline and a second level

labeled Polyline (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the mostperpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Reference Manual280

23.2.2 CircleAmapi Pro has two methods to create a circle. It can be created by setting its centeror by setting its base. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction

option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.With this tool, it is also easy to create an ellipse and set the number of points for the objectdefinition.

23.2.2.1 Creation Methods

From the centerWith this method, the tool requires you to set the circle’s position of the center pointbefore the next construction step, which is setting the radius.

Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

Free movement Horizontal movement Vertical movement(Circle) (Horizontal ellipse) (Vertical ellipse)

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Radius (r) •Radius X•Radius Y

•Radius X•Radius Y

r

Radius

Radius X

Rad

ius

Y

281 Amapi ProT M

From the baseWith this method, the tool requires you to set the circle’s position of the center pointbefore the next construction step, which is setting the diameter.

Click on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

23.2.2.2 Setting the number of pointsOnce the circle is drawn, Amapi Designer allows you to set the number of points defining it.The greater the number of points, the smoother the circle. The tuning can be made with the+/- keys.

Free movement Horizontal movement Vertical movement(Circle) (Horizontal ellipse) (Vertical ellipse)

Editableparameters

in thegraphic

workspace

Editableparameters

in the parameterpalette

•Diameter (d)If d<0, the circle will be drawn under the base point

•Diameter x•Diameter y

•Diameter x•Diameter y

Nb points=4 Nb points=8 Nb points=16

Dia

met

er

Diameter x

Dia

met

er y

Reference Manual282

23.2.2.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a DG labeling which depends onthe kind of circle:

• The polygonal circles are labeled Polyline.

• The NURBS circle generates a NURBS curve, controlled by a polyline. Thus, it adds two DG levelslabeled NURBS curve and Polyline.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the mostperpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

283 Amapi ProT M

23.2.3 ArcAmapi Pro has several methods to create arcs. Check the number of points definingthe arc before releasing the tool.

23.2.3.1 Creation MethodsClick on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

The setting order is shown by the color code of the points in the icons:• 1st point (or dimension) to be set: Red• 2nd point (or dimension) to be set: Green• 3rd point (or dimension) to be set: Blue

23.2.3.2 Composite connection options Amapi Pro provides three options to connect or not to connect the currentarc to the current selection. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired

option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

1- Center2- Start-Radius3- Angle

1- Start2- Center-Radius3- Angle

1- Start2- End3- Middle

1- Start2- End3- Center-Radius

1- Start2- End3- Tangent

Possibilityto reverse the arc

1 2

3

1 2

3

1

2

3

1

3

2

1

3

2

1

2

3

Reference Manual284

23.2.3.3 Setting the number of pointsOnce the arc is drawn, Amapi Pro suggests that you set the number of points defining thearc. The greater the number of points, the smoother the arc. The tuning can be made with the+/- keys.

23.2.3.4 Additional information

No points=3 No points=4 No points=6

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:

• Level #2: Arc (labeled Arc)

• Level #1: The control parameters (labeled Parameter(s)).

• If a composite connection has been made, the tool adds a third DG level labeled Compositeconnection.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

285 Amapi ProT M

23.2.4 PolylineUse the “Polyline” tool to draw a set ofconnected straight lines. Amapi Pro will

create a segment between each point. The pointposition can be set by entering its coordinates inthe parameter palette, manually or by successivemouse clicks. In this last case it is possible to give constraints to the cursor movement orpositioning. While drawing, it is possible to connect the polyline with the latest drawn curveor to leave it as is. Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.4.1 Composite connection optionsIf the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is anopen curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not the new

line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on page 91). Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not Connect Connect to the end of the curve

Connectto the beginning of the

curveIllustration

Latest drawncurve

New polyline

First pointof the new

polyline

Editableparameters

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

End

Beginning

Reference Manual286

23.2.4.2 “Freehand” drawingWhen the “Freehand” drawing option is set,holding down the left mouse button generates

points according to the defined “step”. The stepcorresponds to the minimum distance between twoconsecutive points.

23.2.4.3 Closing the curveAmapi Pro provides a “Close line”accessory.

When clicking on it while drawing, a segment isadded between the last drawn point and the firstpoint of the current curve, the tool is thenautomatically released.

For a composite curve (made up of severalconnected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curvesegment between the last drawn point and the freeend of the first curve, the tool is then automaticallyreleased.

23.2.4.4 Additional information The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline.

If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Compositeconnection. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

A polyline cannot be created in NURBS mode.

Cursor path

Generated polyline

Closing of a simple polyline

Closing of a composite curve

287 Amapi ProT M

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Reference Manual288

23.2.5 Interpolated curveThis tool generates a smoothed curve that iscontrolled by a polyline defined by the user.

The generated curve passes through those points. Thepoint position can be set by entering its coordinates inthe parameter palette, by freehand, or by successivemouse clicks. In this last case it is possible to put constraints on the cursor movement orpositioning. While drawing, it is possible to modify the number of points generated by eachsegment and choose whether or not to connect the polyline with the latest drawn curve.Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.5.1 Composite connection optionsIf the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is anopen curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to

connect the new line to the current selection, or choosing to make a composite curve (See“Curves” on page 91). Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

23.2.5.2 “Freehand” drawingIn the “Freehand” drawing option, thepolygon drawing follows the path drawn by

the cursor. The step corresponds to the minimumlength of its segments. With this method,Amapi Pro automatically creates the points whichdefine the drawing. To start a “Freehand” drawing, keep the mousebutton pressed.

Do not Connect Connect to the end of the curve

Connectto the beginning of the

curveEditable

parameters•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

Cursor path

Generated curveGenerated control polygon

289 Amapi ProT M

23.2.5.3 Defining the rangeAt the end of the drawing, Amapi Pro suggests that you set a range. It corresponds to thenumber of segments generated between two nodal points (See “NURBS Curve” on page 99).The greater the number of points, the smoother the curve. The tuning can be made with the“Ctrl +” or “Ctrl -” keys.

Interpolated curve (range = 4)

23.2.5.4 Defining the degreeA NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points influencing thecurve at a given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line passing by the control points. Adegree of 3 gives a smoother curve which deviates slightly from the control points. Thehigher the degree, the less influence each control point has on the curve, thus creating asmoother curve as it moves away from the control points.

23.2.5.5 Closing the curveAmapi Pro provides a “Close the line”accessory.

When clicking on it while drawing, a segment isadded between the last drawn point and the firstpoint of the current curve, the tool is thenautomatically released.For a composite curve (made up of severalconnected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curvesegment between the last drawn point and the freeend of the first curve, the tool is then automaticallyreleased.

Points of the control polygon(defined by the user)

Points generated betweentwo control points

Open curve

Closed curve

Reference Manual290

23.2.5.6 Additional information

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:

• Level #1: The control polyline (labeled Polyline).

• Level #2: The curve ((labeled Interpolated curve)

• If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Compositeconnection.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

291 Amapi ProT M

23.2.6 CurveA NURBS curve is defined by control points, anodal sequence and a degree (See “NURBS

Curve” on page 99). The point position can be set byentering its coordinates in the parameter palette, byfreehand, or by successive mouse clicks. In this lastcase it is possible to give constraints to the cursormovement or positioning. While drawing, it is possible to modify the number of pointsgenerated by each segment and choose whether or not to connect the polyline with the latestdrawn curve. Finally, choose whether or not to close the curve.

23.2.6.1 Composite connection optionsIf the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is anopen curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options to connect or not the

new line to the current selection to make a composite curve (See “Curves” on page 91). Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

23.2.6.2 “Freehand” drawingWhen the “Freehand” drawing option isset, holding the left mouse button down

generates new points for each “step” pixel. Thestep corresponds to the minimum length of itssegments. With this method, Amapi Proautomatically creates the points which define thedrawing. To start a “Freehand” drawing, keep the mousebutton pressed.

Do not Connect Connect to the end of the curve

Connectto the beginning of the

curveEditable

parameters•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

Cursor path

Generated curveGenerated control polygon

Reference Manual292

23.2.6.3 Defining the rangeAt the end of the drawing, Amapi Pro suggests that you set a range. It corresponds to thenumber of segments generated between two nodal points (see details on page 99). Thegreater the number of points, the smoother the curve. The tuning can be made with the “Ctrl+” or “Ctrl -” keys.

23.2.6.4 Defining the degreeA NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points influencing thecurve at a given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line passing by the control points. Adegree of 3 gives a smoother curve which deviates slightly from the control points. Thehigher the degree, the less the influence of each control points on the curve, thus creating asmoother curve as it moves away from the control points.(See “NURBS Curve” on page 99)

Points of the control polygon(defined by the user)

Nodal points of the NURBS curve (set by the program)

Points generated betweentwo nodal points

293 Amapi ProT M

23.2.6.5 Closing the curveAmapi Pro provides a “Close the line”accessory.

When clicking on it while drawing, a segment isadded between the last drawn point and the firstpoint of the current curve, the tool is thenautomatically released.For a composite curve (made up of severalconnected curves), Amapi Pro adds a curvesegment between the last drawn point and the freeend of the first curve, the tool is then automaticallyreleased.

23.2.6.6 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates two DG levels:

• Level #1: The control polyline (labeled Polyline).

• Level #2: The curve ((labeled NURBS curve)

• If a composite connection was made the tool adds a second DG level labeled Compositeconnection.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor’s positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

Open curve

Closed curve

Reference Manual294

23.2.7 Helix This tool is used to create helixes and spirals.

23.2.7.1 UseEnter the following parameters for each step:

Step #1:• Coordinates of the center of the first spiral radius

Step #2:• Beginning radius

Step #3:• Ending radius• Helix total height

Step #4:• Number of spirals• Number of edges (+/- keys)

Step #5:Press the “Enter” key or release the tool to validate.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

Beginning Radius

Ending Radius

295 Amapi ProT M

23.2.7.2 The constraintsClick on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

23.2.7.3 The path optionTo select the path of the helix, click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or pressboth the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

Free movement(Helix)

Horizontal movement(Spiral)

Vertical movement(Circular Helix)

Counter-clockwise path Clockwise path

Reference Manual296

23.2.7.4 Composite connection optionsIf the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147) is anopen curve, Amapi Pro will provide three options whether or not to

connect the new line to the current selection, or to make a composite curve (See “Curves” onpage 91). Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

Do not connect Connect to the end of the curve

Connectto the beginning of the

curveIllustration

Latest drawncurve

New polyline

First pointof the new

polyline

Editableparameters

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

•x,y,z(point coordinates)

•Step (See ““Freehand” drawing” on page 287)

Accessories •Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

•Close (see details on page 287)

End

Start

297 Amapi ProT M

23.2.8 SymmetryThe “Symmetry” accessory can be used to obtain the mirror image of a curve.Amapi Pro automatically draws the mirrored curve, connected to the current curve,

onto the selected orthogonal plane. Note that the curve must be drawn in the right directionto get the expected symmetry.

23.2.8.1 Symmetry plane orientationClick on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor’s movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

23.2.8.2 Connections optionsIf the current selection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147)is an open curve, Amapi Pro will provide four options whether or

not to connect the new line to the current selection or to make a composite curve (See“Curves” on page 91).

Horizontal Vertical

Curve to be mirrored

Mirroring onto an horizontal plan

Mirroring onto a vertical plan

Symmetry plan

Sym

met

ry p

lan

Reference Manual298

Click on the icon corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt”and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other:

23.2.9 Reverse curve pointsSome tools check the direction of the curve(“Symmetry” ...). So here, as its name implies,

the “Reverse curve points” tool reverses the direction ofthe curve.

Just click on the curves to be reversed, then press the“Enter” key to validate the operation.

Do not connect Connect to the end of the

curve

Connectto the beginning

of the curve

Close the curve

Editableparameters

•x,y,z(plane position)

•x,y,z(plane position)

•x,y,z(plane position)

•x,y,z (plane position)

The symmetry of a NURBS, a composite curve or an arc creates composite curve (the curve tobe mirrored and its mirrored image).(See “Composite (curve)” on page 482).

Sym

met

ry p

lan

Sym

met

ry p

lan

Start

EndStart

End

299 Amapi ProT M

23.3 Extract LinesThe “Extract Lines” tool allows you to create one or several lines from points of anyobjects in the scene.

Amapi Pro has several drawing methods as options. Click on the icon corresponding to thedesired construction option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from oneoption to the other. Depending on the desired option, Amapi Pro will create an object or a group of objects(curve type):• “Creating a curve from existing points in the scene”

immediately creates an object (see details on page 300).• “Automatic extraction of openings”

immediately creates an object or a group of objects (see details on page 301).• “Object edges extraction”

immediately creates a group of objects (see details on page 301).• “Extracting U and V curves from objects with a grid structure”

immediately creates two groups of objects (see details on page 302).• “Extract a part of a line”

immediately creates an object (see details on page 302).

To leave the tool, release it or press the “Enter” key.

23.3.1 Creation methods

23.3.1.1 Creating a curve from existing points in the sceneThis method allows you to create a curve fromthe geometry of the objects in the scene. Select

the points each object on which the future facets will belocated. The selection can be made with the “One byone” or “Lasso” selection accessories (See “Theselection methods” on page 150). Press the “Enter” keyto finish the drawing.When the current option is “Extract edges from existingpoints”, clicking on the right mouse button is a shortcut for the “Extract edges one by one”option.

If the current selection is a ’grid structure’, this option will propose the accessory “Extracting Uand V curves from objects with a grid structure” (see details on page 302).

ClickClick

Click

Click

Reference Manual300

23.3.1.2 Automatic extraction of openingsThis option allows you to quickly create curvescorresponding to the openings of a surface or an

opened volume (See “Open / closed objects” onpage 94).Amapi Pro highlights the openings of the current object.Just click on those to be extracted, then press the “Enter”key to validate the action.

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, in order to automaticallygenerate all the opening-curves corresponding to the highlighted openings. This

accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

23.3.1.3 Object edges extractionThis method consists of selecting several edges tobe extracted as polylines.

The selection can be done by :• single object selection,• lasso/rectangular selection.Click on the right mouse button to switch between thesemodes.After validating, a new curve will be created for each setof connected curves.If this is not possible (more than 2 edges per vertex), adialog box will be displayed.

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, to automatically generate agroup of curves made up of all the edges of the current object.

If several opening-curves are created at the same time, Amapi Pro will group them automatically(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

If the current selection is a ’grid structure’, this option will propose the accessory “Extracting Uand V curves from objects with a grid structure” (see details on page 302).

Object with its highlighted opening curves

Click

Click

Object from which several edges are being extracted with

the lasso

Lasso

301 Amapi ProT M

23.3.1.4 Extracting U and V curves from objects with a grid structure

This option is only available if the currentselection is a ’grid structure’ (See “The objects

with a grid-structure (Quad mesh)” on page 106) or if itis a NURBS surface.

For polyhedral surfaces, Amapi Pro will automaticallycreate two groups of curves, when clicking on this icon:• a first group made up of as many objects as there are

U curves to be extracted.• a second group made up of as many objects as there

are V curves to be extracted.(See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

For NURBS surfaces, this accessory allows you to extract any isoparametric curve in U orin V.

1) Select the surface where you want to extract lines from.

2) Move the cursor above the surface to see the curve displayed.

3) Click to create the curve or enter a value between 0 and 1 in the parameters palette.

4) Click on the UV toggle option or press the “Space-Bar” to extract the lines in U or inV.

23.3.1.5 Extract a part of a lineThis option allows you to extract a part of a curve or an edge.You will only need to select the ends.

23.3.2 Generation of NURBS or Polygonal linesThis tool is able to generate either NURBS or polygonal lines. The nature of the linedepends on both:• the nature of the current object (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)• the current construction mode (See “What is a polyhedral model?” on page 97)

Group of V curves extracted from a cylinderGroup of U curves extracted from a cylinder

Reference Manual302

23.3.3 Additional informationThe cursor movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyline. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

303 Amapi ProT M

23.4 Extract FacetsThe “Extract Facets” tool allows you to create an object made up of one or severalfacets which can be drawn according to the selected method. Click on the icon

corresponding to the desired construction option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar”keys to toggle from one option to the other.The facets of the object will be drawn, one at a time, following the correspondinginstructions of the selected option (See “Creation methods” on page 304). It is possible tochange the creation option while drawing. After the last facet has been drawn, release thetool or press the “Enter” key to validate the action.

23.4.1 Creation methods

23.4.1.1 Creating a facet from existing points in the sceneThis method allows you to create a polygonalfacet from the geometry of the objects in the

scene. Select each point of the objects in the scene on which thepoints of the future facet will be located.Press the “Enter” key to finish the drawing.

23.4.1.2 Draw in the 3D spaceSet the points one by one to define the futurefacet. This method allows you to apply

constraints to locate or move the cursor (See “Theconstraints” on page 191) or enter the coordinates withthe keyboard (see details on page 163).Press the “Enter” key to finish the drawing”.

The creation of polygonal facets creates polyhedral objects. The extraction of closures or facets on a NURBS surface creates NURBS facets.

From the drawing of the second facet, the first point isautomatically connected to the closest point to thecurrent object.

Click

Click

Click

ClickClick

2- Click

1- Click

3- Shift-Click

Drawing of the third facetof the object

Reference Manual304

23.4.1.3 Automatic creation of facet closuresThis option allows you to quickly create facetscorresponding to the openings of closed curves, a

surface or an opened volume (See “Open / closedobjects” on page 94).Amapi Pro highlights the openings of the current object.Just click on the ones to be closed, then press the “Enter”key to validate the action.

23.4.1.4 Facets extractionThis method consists of selecting several facetson the current object to be extracted as a set of

facets. The selection is made with the “custom lasso” accessory(See “The Personalized Lasso Selection” on page 153).

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all”accessory, to automatically generate all the

facet closures corresponding to the highlightedopenings. This accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

This option allows you to quickly transform a curveinto a surface.

This tool is different from the tool “Close” (seedetails on page 400):• The “Extract Facets” tool creates a new object closure.• The “Close” tool closes the current object.

When the current object is a NURBS object, theclosure creates a NURBS facet.

To extract facets and remove the facets from theobject, use the tool “Cut” (see details on page 354).

When the current object is a NURBS object, the lassoselection accessory tool selects NURBS facets,meaning complete NURBS surfaces and not polygonalfacets.

Object with its facet closures

Click

Click

Creating a facet from a curve

Click

Object on which facets are being extracted with the

lasso

Lasso

305 Amapi ProT M

The "facet" and "edge" selection mode are available.

23.4.2 NURBS or Polyhedral facets generationThe tool can generate either NURBS facets, or polygonal facets. The facet type depends on both:• the nature of the current object (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96)• the current construction mode (See “Change the construction mode” on page 96)

23.4.3 Accessory "create new empty object" The "Facet" tool allows you to create one or several facets with several methods defined bythe available options. By default, the new facets will be automatically added to the current object.

For each click on the "Create a new object" accessory, Amapi Pro creates a newobject which will contain all the facets created afterwards.

In "facet"mode

(default), selectedfacets are extracteddirectly.The tool creates a setof facets.

Selection Generated facets

In "edge"mode,

selected edges areused to build a singlefacet.

Selection Generated facet

Reference Manual306

23.4.4 Additional informationThe options “Creating a facet from existing points in the scene” and “Draw in the 3D space” haveshortcuts:• The right mouse click is a shortcut for the option “Facets extraction” (see details on page 305).• The “Apply to all” accessory automatically generates all the facet closures corresponding to the

openings (See “Automatic creation of facet closures” on page 305). This accessory shortcut is the “A” key

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a first DG level labeled Polyhedral Volume.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The cursor is movement is done on the “Working plan” (see details on page 488).The mouse movement will modify only two values out of the three displayed (x, y and z). There are two ways to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (see details on page 135)• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

The “Extract Facets” tool creates only one object per session. It is possible to separate the facets afterwards by using the tool “Cut” (see details on page 354).

The generated facets create a new object. Use the tool “Weld” (see details on page 403) tomerge it with another object of the scene.

If used on NURBS objects, the “Extract Facets” tool will create only polygonal facets.

307 Amapi ProT M

23.5 SweepThe sweep tool is used to make tubular shapes, that is why we will call these objects“Tubes”. This powerful tool will allow you to create, with options, more complex

objects which do not look anything like tubes.

• A Tube is built from the following elements:• one or several base section(s) (see details on page 309). • a profile (see details on page 308).

• There are two ways to build a tube:• The “Sweeping with the profile already drawn” which has several tubing options

(see details on page 311).• The “Freehand sweeping” (see details on page 314) which has several tubing

options that can be mixed together.

• You can choose between several intermediate section orientation options (see detailson page 317) and the possibility to increase or decrease progressively the size of thesections using only one operation.

• To finish, it is possible to close or not to close the openings (see details on page 318)when working from a closed curve.

• If the current selection is a curve or group ofcurves, you will be able to do a freehand sweep oruse a preset profile. If the current selection is a surface or a volume,you will be able to work freehand, starting from amultiple selection of points, edges or facets.

307 Amapi ProT M

23.5.1 Section and ProfileAmapi Pro has several tubing options that can be mixed together (See “The options” onpage 315). The use of the section and the profile will be different depending on the selectedoption. This must be known before drawing the section and/or the profile.

An Extrusion A Sweeping

Tubular shape the sections are concentric

and parallel one another

Tubular shapewith a constant section

along a profile

•The Profile defines the position, the number and the size of each intermediate section.

•The size of each section can be specified.

•The Profile shows the path to be followed by the tube and the number of intermediate sections to be generated.

•Each intermediate profile section has a constant size (default).

Profile

base section

Profile

base section

h

l

h= Height of the current segment l= Width of the current segment

h

h= Height of the current segment = Angle between the current

segment and the previously drawn segment

Reference Manual308

23.5.1.1 The base section(s)Their stateA base section can be one of the following entities (See “The selectable entities” onpage 149):• a closed or open line object (See “Line drawing” on page 277)• a point on a polyhedral surface (NURBS surfaces have no points)• an edge on a surface• a facet on a polyhedral surface (It is not possible to sweep a NURBS surface).

As opposed to the specialized selection accessories detailed in the selection palette,the “Select all entities” accessory allows you to select either facets, edges or points

(See “The selectable entities” on page 149).

Their quantityIt is possible to “Sweep” several sections along a same profile at the same time.The base section is selected when the tool is picked up (See “Selection” on page 147).

This option allows you to clone or not the profiles of a sweeping of multiple sections(several sections are selected). (See “The clones” on page 107).

Examples

... a line... points

on a surface... edges

on a surface... facets

on a surface

Extruded sweep...

Profiled sweep...

309 Amapi ProT M

23.5.1.2 Section and profile from curvesThe section and the profile can be open or closed curves, but their shape and their orientationare determining. What is more, their role is different depending on the desired option (See“The options” on page 315). Think about this before drawing the section and/or the profile.

An Extrusion A Sweeping

Shapes the sections which are concentric and parallel to each

other

Shape with a constant section along a profile

•The Profile defines the position, the number and the size of each intermediate section.

•The size of each section can be tuned.

•The Profile shows the path to be followed by the tube and the number of intermediate sections to be generated.

•Each profile intermediate section has a constant size (default).

Profile(open curve)

base section(open curve)

Profile(open curve)

base section(closed curve)

base section(open curve)

Profile(closed curve)

Profile(closed curve)

base section(closed curve)

Reference Manual310

23.5.2 Sweeping with the profile already drawn

23.5.2.1 UseBefore using the sweeping mode, an open or closed profile must be drawn with a “Linedrawing” sub-tool (see details on page 277).The section(s) must be selected before entering the “Sweep” tool, then just click on theprofile curve. Amapi Pro has several sweeping options. Click on the icon corresponding tothe desired option or press both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option tothe other.

Extruded tube Irregular sweep Regular sweep Sweep with parallel sections

base section to be swept along a

profile

The sections are concentric

The profile defines the size of those

sections

The segments of the obtained shape

are not regular.

The size of each intermediate

section is automatically

modified to make a regular shape.

All the intermediate sections are

automatically set parallel.

The Profile defines the number of the intermediate sections.

What about the curves used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109), thecurves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the

tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109), the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be seen again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

311 Amapi ProT M

23.5.2.2 The profile snappingThe notion of snapping exists only when sweeping along an existing profile.The result obtained is directly depending of the snapping point. Its action is different:• “The case of an extruded tube” (see details on page 312)• “The case of a swept tube” (see details on page 313)

The case of an extruded tubeWith this kind of extrusion, Amapi Pro will move the section to the path before extruding.The closest points of each curve will be snapped together, and consequently the result of thisoperation will depend on the position of the two curves.

Profil

Section debase

Points de calages superposés

Section debase

Profile

Snap points

Points de calagesection

Reference Manual312

The case of a swept tube

There are two different cases:

• The profile and the section do not share a common point: A base section corresponds to each profile segment.

• The profile and the section share a common point (snapping point): The snapping will be at the geometric center of the profile.

base sectionSnap point

Profile

Intermediate sections positioned along the profile

base section

Snap point

Profile

Intermediate sections position along the profile

313 Amapi ProT M

23.5.3 Freehand sweeping

23.5.3.1 UseWith this kind of construction, which is much more intuitive, no profile need previously bedrawn. Each tube segment is displayed as soon as a new profile segment is created. With thismethod, it is possible to mix extruded segments and swept segments.

Freehand sweeping

To create a Freehand sweep: Select the base section(s) before picking up the tool, click in the graphic workspace (awayfrom any object) to start the operation, then move the cursor to build the first tube segment. According to the selected option, one or several of the following parameters can be set:• The orientation of the segment ( ).• The width of the intermediate section (l).• The height of the segment (h).Their tuning can be made by a simple click or by entering accurate values in the parametersarea. Do the same for the other segments and validate the operation by pressing the “Enter”key.

The validation ignores the last displayed segment attached to the cursor.

With this method the profile can only be a polyline.

Reference Manual314

23.5.3.2 The options

Extruded tubing Swept tubing

The cursor movement controls simultaneously:The section scaling (the width l).The height (h) of the extruded segment.

The cursor movement controls simultaneously:The orientation of the swept segment ( ).Each intermediate section of the tube is constant and is automatically oriented so that its plane follows the bisecting line of the angle made by two successive profile segments.The height (h) of the swept segment (h).

•The “Ctrl” key: shortcut for the “Radial tubing” option (See “The constraints” on page 316). Press and hold the key before moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning is completed.

•The “Shift” key: shortcut for the “Axial tubing” option (See “The constraints” on page 316). Press and hold the key before moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning is completed.

•The “Ctrl” key: controls the section size (l). Press and hold the key before moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning is completed.

•The “Shift” key: shortcut for the “Axial tubing” option (See “The constraints” on page 316). Press and hold the key before moving the cursor. Release it only after tuning is completed.

h

l

h

l

h

l

h

315 Amapi ProT M

23.5.3.3 The constraintsClick on an icon to put a constraint on the cursor movement or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other:

Free movement(Free tubing)

Horizontal constraint(Radial tubing)

Vertical constraint(Axial tubing)

Free extrusion

Free sweeping

The height of the segment is null (h=0).The cursor movement controls only the section size (l).

The current profile segment is oriented along the axis of the previous profile segment ( =0). The cursor movement controls only the height of the segment (h).

h

l

h

l

h

Reference Manual316

23.5.3.4 Section orientation optionsWhen using the “Swept tubing” (See “The options” on page 315), Amapi Pro has anadditional step after the validation of the drawing. This is to select the option for theorientation of the section. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or press boththe “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other

* Regular tube: tube with a constant section on its entire length.

23.5.4 Progressive scaling of the sectionsWhen using the “Swept tubing” (See “The options” on page 315) (See “Sweeping with theprofile already drawn” on page 311), Amapi Pro allows you to control the progressivescaling of all the sections. The tuning can be done with the +/- keys. Then, validate bypressing the “Enter” key or by releasing the tool.

Irregular sweep Regular sweep Sweep with parallel sections

The size of the intermediate sections remains as defined.The segments of the obtained

tube are not regular*.

The size of each intermediate section is automatically modified

to make the tube regular*.If some intermediate sections had

been scaled, Amapi Pro would have applied a scaling coefficient

on them.

All the intermediate sections are automatically oriented to be parallel to the base section.

317 Amapi ProT M

23.5.5 Close the openingsIf the base section is a closed curve, Amapi Pro proposes closing the openings (See “Open /closed objects” on page 94).

To close them, click on the highlighted openings.

23.5.6 Simplified displayWhen building a tube from several base sections, the display screen can be overloaded and itmight be better to simplify the display. That is why Amapi Pro has a “Simplified display”accessory.

Full display

Simplified display

23.5.7 Display the graduated axisThis option makes it possible to visualize the axis of the orthonormal local baserelated to the sweeping in progress. These reference marks allow, as for traditional

layouts of lines, to carry out a snapping on the graduations and to better visualize directionof displacement.

23.5.8 Sweep by Block The sweep by block applies only to the sweeping of a selection of adjacent facets. When thisoption is not activated, the sweeping makes as many tubes as of selected facets each onebeing perpendicular to its facet.

An icon allows you to automatically close all the openings of the sweeping.

Reference Manual318

When it is activated, the adjacent facets are joined together in only one block which pre-serves the form of the group of facets. To use it, it is necessary to select several adjacent fac-ets by an edge then to select the this option and finally to launch the sweeping (Enter key).

23.5.9 Sweeping from an edge of a NURBS surfaceIf the current selection is a NURBS surface or a BREP, you will be able to work startingfrom the edge outlines or to trim by freehand as in the example below where the sweepinguses the cutting edge as a base section

Sweep by block enabled Sweep by block disabled

Profile drawn hand free

Sweeping edgebased on the edge

Original surface cut by a circle

319 Amapi ProT M

In this case, the edge section is divided by the two surfaces. Thus, if this curve is modified,the two surfaces will be modified as in the example below:

23.5.10 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Sweeping (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) to set a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a Number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Reference Manual320

23.6 Double-SweepThe “Double-Sweep” tool allows you to create complex shapes quickly from a basesection and two profiles. This way, you can create surfaced or volumetric tubes, that

can be asymmetrical or have different shapes at their ending sections.

Profiles(open curves)

base section(closed curve)

base section(open curves)

Profiles(closed curves)

base section(closed curve)

Profiles(closed curves)

base section(closed curve)

Profiles(closed curves)

321 Amapi ProT M

23.6.1 Use1) Create a base section and two profiles under the following conditions:

• The section can be an open or a closed curve (See “Open / closed objects” onpage 94).

• Both profiles must be either closed or open (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).• Each profile must share a common point with the section.• The two profiles must not share the same common point with the section.

2) The base section must be the current object (See “The selection accessories” onpage 148).

3) Click on the icon showing the tool “Double-Sweep” in the construction palette.

4) Click on each profile, one after another.

5) If the object has openings (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94), Amapi Pro willallow you to close them by clicking on those that you would like to close.

6) Release the tool by pressing the “Enter” key to validate the operation.

23.6.2 Base orientation optionsIt is possible to choose the way in which a surface is generated compared to the section. Ifthe section is not located in a plane perpendicular to the profiles, the tool can either create asurface by positioning the section perpendicular to the profiles or create a surface while con-serving the original position of the profile.

Section perpendicularto profiles

Preservation of the section orientation

Construction curvesbefore “Double-Sweep”

Reference Manual322

23.6.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Double Sweep (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

For a better quality, the two profiles should have the same number of segments. If not,Amapi Pro will add more segments to the profile with less segments to do the operation in thebest conditions.

What about the curves used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by

the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

323 Amapi ProT M

23.7 Ruled SurfaceThis tool is used to create a “skin” between curves or edges (in NURBS mode) fron-tières. A simple illustration of a ruled surface would be the wing of an airplane. The

structural members of the wing represent the curves, and the “skin” (wing’s surface) is themesh linking these curves together.

You also can make a “Tangential connection” of NURBS surfaces using the edges of thesesurfaces. In this type of connection, a curve border belonging to two objects is shared by thetwo surfaces in dynamic geometry. You can thus edit this curve and the modifications willbe applied to the two surfaces.

Example of surface obtained by using the “Ruled Surface” tool

Ruled surface on edges of closed NURBS surfaces

Reference Manual324

23.7.1 Creating “Ruled Surface”To create a “Ruled Surface”, proceed as follows:

1) Create a set of curves proceeding as follows before picking up the “Ruled Surface” tool.• The curves can have a different number of points.• They can be curves or volume openings (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94), or

edges (in NURBS mode).• They can be Polygonal or NURBS (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). • The only constraint is that the curves must be all open or all closed (See “Open /

closed objects” on page 94).

2) Pick up the “Ruled Surface” tool.

3) There are two cases:• All the curves are open:

Click on each curve that is to become a border.In NURBS mode, you will have the possibility to point out a succession of edges as aborder. You can select multiple edges by keeping the “Shift” key pressed.

• All the curves are closed:Click a point of the first curve, then the corresponding point of the second curve andso on. Amapi Pro draws a line segment between each selected point. These segmentswill be used to create the surface. Select the points with care because the result can beaffected. The “Curve Inversion” (see details on page 330) can solve the revertedcurves problems. In NURBS mode, you will be able to ask to “Align the first borderpoints” (see details on page 330).

4) If the borders are edges (in NURBS mode), you can make a “Tangential connection” (seedetails on page 326).

5) Validate by pressing the “Enter” key.

Amapi Pro allows you to pick up the tool only if there is at least one curve or an open volume inthe scene.

325 Amapi ProT M

23.7.2 Tangential connectionThis type of connection makes it possible to connect the ruled surface tangentially to an edgeof a NURBS surface. You can also use a cut (trimming) or the external edges of a NURBSsurface.

The user will need to do the following:• “Determine the connection surfaces”• “Set the tension”• “Set the degree in U”

The tangential connections options are available only if the NURBS mode has been activated(See “Change the construction mode” on page 96).

Surfaces not connected tangentially

Surfaces connected tangentially

Reference Manual326

23.7.2.1 Determine the connection surfacesA handler will make it possible to indicate, for each border, the adjacent surface theconnection will need to be tangential to, as well as the direction of the connection.The selection will be made by a simple click on the handler arrow which approaches theorientation of the desired surface connection the most. A red arrow identifies the tangential connection.By clicking again on this arrow, the user will cancel the tangential characteristic of theconnection.

Non tangential connections between two borders Non tangential connections on the border #1tangential on the left on the border #2

Connectionsnon tangential on the border #1

tangential on the left on the border #2

Connectionstangential on the left on the border #1tangential on the left on the border #2

Border #1

Border #2

Border #1

Border #2

Border #1

Border #2

327 Amapi ProT M

If the border is common to several faces, the user will have to click on the handler arrowwhich approaches the orientation of the desired surface of the face to be connectedtangentially.

Non tangential connections between two borders Connectionstangential on the top on the border #1

non tangential on the border #2

Connectionstangential on the right on the border #1

non tangential on the border #2

Connectionstangential on the top on the border #1

tangential on the bottom on the border #2

Border #1

Border #2

Border #1

Border #2

Border #

Border #2

Reference Manual328

23.7.2.2 Set the tensionThe connection handler will make it possible to graphically tune the tension of the tangentialconnection. The length of the arrow is proportional to the tension. The setting will be doneas the follows:

• Click on the end of an arrow marking the tangential connection.• Move the cursor• Click to validate.

23.7.2.3 Set the degree in UWhen making a ruled surface between NURBS curves, Amapi Pro creates a NURBS surfacewhere U degree is given by the degree of the curves but where the V degree is undefined.The degree per default depends on the number of borders as well as the nature of theconnection (tangential or not): Minimum degree = number of borders + number of tangential connections -1.

Slightly tightened tangential connection

Fairly tightened tangential connection

Strongly tightened tangential connection

A degree of 1 will produce a surface with sharp angles

A degree of 2 will produce a smooth surface

329 Amapi ProT M

23.7.3 Closing the surface on itself It is sometimes necessary to close the ruled surface by using the first curve as the lastcurve. For this, after having validated the second to last curve, click on this option

and the first curve will be added to the surface in order to close it.

23.7.4 Curve InversionThe “Ruled Surface” tool takes into account the direction of the curve. The generatedsurface might therefore appear twisted if all the curves are not in the same direction.

The “Curve Inversion” accessory enables you to obtain a better result as it will reverse thedirection of the last indicated curve. You will obtain the same effect by pressing on the“Space-Bar”.

23.7.5 Align the first border pointsIn NURBS mode, the user will be able to choose to align the first points of closed borders inU or V. This option can solve the problems of twisted ruled surfaces.

Does not align the first border points.

Aligns the first border points.

23.7.6 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Ruled_Surface(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109): thecurves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the

tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123). When the curves areedges or cuttings of NURBS surfaces, they are shared by the two surfaces they belong to. Whenthey are edited, the modifications appear on the two surfaces as if they had been welded.

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

Reference Manual330

23.8 Coons SurfaceThis tool generates a surface from connected curves, snapped by the end points withthe adjacent ones drawing a closed perimeter. These curves can be edges of NURBS

surfaces that makes it possible to create surfaces of connection between several adjacent sur-faces by a point. .

Coons Surface created from four curves

4 adjacent surfaces with one point Coons surface created from four adjacent edges

Amapi Pro allows you to pick up the tool only if there is at least one curve or an open volume inthe scene.

331 Amapi ProT M

23.8.1 Surface creationThe tool can work in two different modes. Select the icon showing the desired mode:

Manual Coons mode

Automatic Coons mode

Manual Coons modeTo manually create a “Coons Surface”, proceed as follows:

1) Create a set of curves under the following conditions before picking up the “CoonsSurface” tool.• The curves must be connected (See “Connected curves: Connected curves are several

curves, where a curve has one end exactly superimposed with one end of anothercurve.” on page 91).

• There are no limits for the number of curves.

2) Pick up the “Coons Surface” tool.

3) It must be specified if an object will be polygonal or NURBS while creatingit (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). Amapi Pro displays atoggle-icon allowing to switch from one drawing mode to another. Check that the buttoncorresponding to the desired mode is selected. If not, click on it or use the (Ctrl+B)shortcut.

4) Click on each curve (in any order).

5) The operation is finished when Amapi Pro detects the curve or the set of connectedcurves is closed.The Coons surface is displayed.

Automatic Coons modeThe Automatic Coons mode works exactly like the manual mode. The onlydifference is that Amapi Pro is able to detect whether or not the first selected curve is

connected to the others to make a closed shape. If it is the case, the surface will beimmediately created from the detected curves without another user action.

Reference Manual332

23.8.2 Tangential connectionThis type of connection makes it possible to connect a Coons surface tangentially to a borderof a NURBS surface.Connection options are offered only if the user has enabled the NURBS operating mode (See“Change the construction mode” on page 96).

23.8.3 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Coons_Surface (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by

the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123). When the curves areedges of NURBS surfaces, they are shared by the two surfaces to which they belong. When theyare edited, modifications will appear on the two surfaces as if the surfaces were welded.

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

333 Amapi ProT M

23.9 Gordon surfaceThis tool is used to create a surface using a network of 3D curves. The surface isgenerated along the longitudinal and latitudinal curves.

23.9.1 Surface creationTo create “Gordon surface”, proceed as follows:

1) Create a set of curves under the following conditions before picking up the “Gordonsurface” tool.• All the longitudinal curves must have their ends connected to one point of the

latitudinal curves (and vice versa) to create a net.• It must not be a curve that will be longitudinal and latitudinal at the same time (See

“Curves” on page 91).• All curves going in the same direction (longitudinal or latitudinal) must either be

closed or opened (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).

2) Click on each of the longitudinal curves.

3) Validate.

4) Click now on each of the latitudinal curves.

5) Validate.

6) Amapi Pro computes the surface mesh; if the curves are correct, it will display the result.If not, Amapi Designer will suggest a configuration to be validated that will generate thesurface.

Reference Manual334

23.9.2 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Gordon_Surface (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

What about the curves used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109): thecurves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by the

tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): the curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

335 Amapi ProT M

23.10 ManifoldThis tool is used to create a closed volume from NURBS surfaces which will definethe future volume.

(See “Surfaces / Volumes” on page 92)(See “Open / closed objects” on page 94)(See “The NURBS models” on page 98)

The selection of the surface-limits will be made either before or while using the tool. To change the selection while using the tool is known as the “inverse” selection principle(See “Single object selection” on page 151).The volume will be created when the “Enter” key is pressed, thus validating the selection ofthe surface-limits.

An option allows you to generate or not the internal surfaces of the resulting volume.

Surfaces-limits Generated volume

Do not generate internal surfaces Generate internal surfaces

Reference Manual336

The surfaces-limits must imperatively delimit a closed contour.If this condition is not observed, Amapi Pro will not be able to generate a volume.

The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG) : This tool adds a DG level labeled Manifold_Volume (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

What about the objects used for the construction?There are two cases :

When working using the Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109) : The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be

editable by the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will beautomatically transmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using the Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109) : The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

337 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual338

339 Amapi ProT M

24 Modeling palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to model the objects.

Icon Tool name Description See

“Smooth” This tool is used to control the number of facets defining a surface and thenumber of points defining a curve and to give them a smoother aspect. page 340

“Chamfer” This tool allows you to create internal or external bevels, depending on theorientation of the model edges page 347

“Thickness/Offset”This tool offers two different options: - Creates a clone object parallel to the current object.- Gives a thickness to a curve, a surface or a volume

page 351

“Cut” Proposes several methods to cut one or several objects at the same time. page 354

“Delete” This tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge or point)from the selected objects. page 364

“Tesselate” This tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or avolume. page 367

“Deform” This tool lets you apply several kinds of deformations on the currentselection proposed as options. page 374

“Bend” This tool deforms the selection along a profile curve. page 379

“Mold” This tool allows you to pull on the current selection so that the pointslocated in the influence area are moved with an inertia effect. page 382

“Bump/Soften” This tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection. page 385

24.1 SmoothThe “Smooth” tool is used to control the numberof facets defining a surface and the number of

points defining a curve.

• Amapi Pro has several smoothing methods (See“Smoothing options” on page 341).

• The higher the smoothing value, the smoother theobject looks.

• Some options give accessories to generate smoothingbreaks (see details on page 344) or tune tensions (seedetails on page 343).

• The default mode is to apply a smoothing on thecurrent selected objects (See “The concept ofselection” on page 147). However, a smoothing canbe applied on a part of the selection “Partialsmoothing” (see details on page 345).

• The smoothing is editable: if the “Smooth” tool is selected again and the current object isalready smoothed, Amapi Pro will suggest either to modify the current smoothingparameters or to change the smoothing method.

When working with Dynamic Geometry, the smoothing adds a DG level to the object,allowing the smoothing to be editable. That is to say, if the current object is already smoothed, the tool systematically offers to editthe corresponding Dynamic Geometry level for the user.Thus, he or she will be able either to change the smoothing method of the selected elementsor to modify the selection to be smoothed.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Not smoothedObject

SmoothedObject

Reference Manual340

24.1.1 Smoothing optionsAmapi Pro has several different smoothing methods depending on the type of the currentselection. The smoothing methods are displayed as options. You will select the option proposing the nearest solution to the required effect.As there are many smoothing possibilities, you will have to test them to find the best adaptedto your shape.There are several kinds of smoothing:• “Smoothing polygonal surfaces” (see details on page 341)• “Smoothing polygonal curves” (see details on page 342)• “Smoothing NURBS objects” (see details on page 343)

24.1.1.1 Smoothing polygonal surfaces

There are two kinds of smoothing:* The internal smoothing: the smoothed shape remains inside the limits defined by the not smoothed object.** The external smoothing: the smoothed shape is outside the limits defined by the not smoothed object.

Catmull smoothing

*

Doosmoothing

*

Béziersmoothing

**

Loopsmoothing

*

Butterflysmoothing

**IllustrationsObjects to be smoothed

EditableParameter(s)

•Range(see details on page 342)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

•Range(see details on page 342)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

•Range(see details on page 342)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

•Range(see details on page 342)

•Range(see details on page 342)

341 Amapi ProT M

The rangeThe smoothing range defines the number of facets. The higher the range value, thefiner the smoothing. The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by entering a

value in the parameter palette.

24.1.1.2 Smoothing polygonal curves

* Generates NURBS curves

DegreeA NURBS curve is defined by control points, a nodal sequence and a degree.The degree of a NURBS curve corresponds to the number of control points which influencethe curve at any given point. A degree of 1 gives a broken line which goes through thecontrol points. A degree of 3 gives a smoother curve moving away from the control pointsThe greater the degree, the lower the influence of the control points, with the curvesmoothing out the more as it moves away from the control points.(See “NURBS Curve” on page 99)

Not smoothed object Bézier smoothingrange = 2

Bézier smoothingrange = 8

Béziersmoothing

*

Interpolationsmoothing

*

Approximationsmoothing

*

Chaïkinsmoothing

Cubicsmoothing

IllustrationCurve to be smoothed

EditableParameter(s)

•Range(see details on page 343)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

•Range(see details on page 343)

•Degree(see details on page 342)

•Range(see details on page 343)

•Level(see details on page 343)

•Degree(see details on page 342)

•Range(see details on page 343)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

•Range(see details on page 343)

•Tension(see details on page 343)

Reference Manual342

The rangeThe smoothing range defines the number of segments. The higher the range value,the finer the smoothing. The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by

entering a value in the parameter palette.

The level

24.1.1.3 Smoothing NURBS objects The Polygonal objects smoothing methods are not applicable to the NURBS objects (See“Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96) and Amapi Pro will switch to the Tesselationprocedure described in “Tesselate a NURBS object” on page 370.

24.1.2 Tension controlSome smoothing methods allow you to control the tension of the smoothing, that is tosay that it controls how close the smoothing edges are (polygonal surfaces smoothing

only) or vertices (polygonal surfaces and curves) to the not smoothed object.Tension setting is done on the entire object. To do so, enter a value in the parameter palette.

Not smoothed object Bézier smoothingrange = 2

Bézier smoothingrange = 8

Not smoothed object Approximation smoothingrange = 5 and level = 2

Approximation smoothingrange = 5 and level = 4

343 Amapi ProT M

Tension control on internal smoothing:

Tension control on external smoothing:

Some smoothing methods have an accessory to control tension on a part of an object.Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the edges or thevertices on which the tension can be tuned.The tuning can be made either with the +/- keys or by entering a value in the parameterpalette.A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the local tensions.

24.1.3 Break controlSome smoothing methods allow you to control the breaks of smoothing.The breaks correspond to the edges (polygonal surfaces smoothing only) or vertices

(polygonal surfaces and curves) on which the smoothing must not be applied.Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the edges or thevertices to be broken.

Not smoothed object Tension = -0.80 Tension = 0 Tension = 0.80

Not smoothed object Tension = -0.80 Tension = 0 Tension = 0.80

Reference Manual344

A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the breaks.

24.1.4 Partial smoothing By default, the smoothing is automatically applied on all the selected objects withrespect to the break instructions (See “Tension control” on page 343) (See “Break

control” on page 344).Some smoothing methods provide a partial smoothing accessory. It allows you to selectfacets (polygonal surfaces smoothing only) or segments (polygonal surfaces and curves) tosmooth. The facets or segments not selected will not be smoothed.Use the appropriate selection accessory (see details on page 148) to select the facets orsegments to smooth. A click in an empty space of the scene will delete all the selections.

24.1.5 Making convex surfacesThis option gives a small variation of the smoothing effect for the objects made up ofconcave facets.

A convex facet is any segment linking two pointsanywhere on a surface and is fully enclosed in theshape.

A concave facet is any facet which does notmatch the above convex facet definition.

Not smoothed object Smoothed object Smoothed objecton which some edges are

selected breaks

Smoothed objecton which a point is a

selected break

Convex facet

Concave facet

345 Amapi ProT M

The smoothing of an object made up of convexfacets gives a different result from the smoothingof the same object made up of concave facets.For this reason, Amapi Pro can automaticallymake convex the concave facets of the object tobe smoothed. This operation consists of dividingeach concave facet into the minimum convexfacets.

24.1.6 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Smoothing (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

For a better quality and efficiency, we recommend to create your models with a small numberof facets and to smooth them at the end of the modeling.

Mixing different smoothing methods on the same object:If the current object is already smoothed, Amapi Pro will suggest to edit the corresponding DGlevel.To apply another smoothing method on a part or on the entire object, delete this DG level. (See“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Concave facet transformed into a convex facet

Reference Manual346

24.2 ChamferThis tool allows you to create internal or externalbevels, based on the orientation of the edges of the

model. Choose a kind of chamfer before selecting the elementsyou want to work on. The selection method is described in “The selection methods”paragraph on page 150. Then, set the range and the radius of the chamfer on polyhedralobjects. Only the radius can be locally changed.On NURBS objects, the radius can be set on the entire object.

24.2.1 Chamfer a volumeIf the current object is a surface or volume and polyhedral, Amapi Pro has three chamferoptions. If the current object is a NURBS surface or volume, only the “Chamfer the edges”mode will be available. Toggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

Option description Chamfer the edgesCreates an arc on each

end of the selected edge, then generates a ruled surface between

them.

Dice cornerCreates arcs on selected points, then generates a ruled surface between

them. (Polyhedral only)

PeaksGives a sharp aspect to

a chamfered vertex. (Polyhedral only)

Illustrations:

Object to be chamfered Object on which some edges have been chamfered

Object with all vertices chamfered in dice corner

Object fully edge-chamfered but with a sharpened vertex

Editable parameters •Range (Polyhedral only) (see details on page 349)

•Radius (see details on page 349)

•Range (Polyhedral only) (see details on page 349)

•Radius (see details on page 349)

A suitcase corner is a corner on which all the adjacent edges have been edgechamfered.

To create a suitcase corner quickly, just click on a vertex of the current object.

347 Amapi ProT M

24.2.2 Chamfer a polygonal lineChamfering a curve, consists of replacing a point of the curve with an arc on which theradius (see details on page 349) and the range (see details on page 349) will be set.

24.2.3 Radius Global settingThe “Radius” parameter defines the radius value of the arcs associated with the chamferedvertices.The +/- keys allow you to set the radius quickly without entering a value in the parameterpalette.

Of course, it is not possible to transform a dice corner into a suitcase corner.

The curves chamfer does not apply to NURBS curves.

Dice corner chamferRadius 3

Dice corner chamferRadius 6

Edge chamferRadius 1

Edge chamferRadius 3

“C” curve that has not been chamfered

“C” curve on which a vertex has been chamfered

“C” curve of which all vertices have been chamfered

Reference Manual348

24.2.4 Radius local setting on polyhedral objectsAmapi Pro allows you to locally modify the radius/range values of the arcs that areassociated with the chamfered vertices. This setting does not apply to NURBS

objects. To do this, click on the “Radius local setting on polyhedral objects” accessory icon. Theselection method is described in “The selection methods” paragraph (see details onpage 150). The +/- keys allow you to set the parameter quickly, which avoids entering a value in theparameter palette.

24.2.5 Range global setting on polyhedral objectsThe “Range” parameter corresponds to the number of intermediate points defining the arcsassociated with the chamfered vertices. This setting does not apply to NURBS objects. Thehigher the range, the smoother the chamfer. To set the range, enter a value in the parameterpalette (See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

Edge chamferswith an identical radius

Edge chamferswith some modified radiuses

Dice corner chamferRange 0

Dice corner chamferRange 1

Dice corner chamferRange 2

Edge chamferRange 0

Edge chamferRange 1

Edge chamferRange 2

349 Amapi ProT M

24.2.6 Shape of the chamfer for NURBS edgesNURBS edges can be chamfered in various ways using one of the options below:

Linear Section: allows you to create beveled edges

Circular Section: rounded chamfer

Approximate Circular Section: Differs very slightly from the circular section

Interpolated Section: Uses the shape of the two surfaces to define an interpolation,thus preserving the ideal contour.

24.2.7 Apply to allThis accessory allows you to chamfer all the current objects at the same time. It ispossible to apply some selection changes before validating.

24.2.8 Additional Information

The “Apply to all” accessory cancels all the chamfering operations already made on thecurrent object.

This accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Chamfer (See“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Reference Manual350

24.3 Thickness/OffsetWith the “Thickness/Offset” tool you will be able to “Give a thickness” to a curveor a surface or “Create an offset copy” of the current object.

24.3.1 “Thickness/Offset” options• The “Give a thickness” option consists to give a thickness to the curve or to the selected

surface.• The “Create an offset copy” option creates an identical object offset from the original at

a given distance. These two operations apply to polyhedral curves and surfaces and NURBS. In some cases, itcan apply to BREP volumes. Click on the icon corresponding to the desired option or pressboth the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from one option to the other.

Give a thickness Create an offset copy

Option description Gives a thicknessto a curve,

a surface or a volume

Creates a clone objectparallel to the current object.

(See “The clones” on page 107)

Illustration

On a 3D curve

On a surface object

Editable parameters •Thickness *•Number of points **(Polyhedral only)

•Thickness *

351 Amapi ProT M

* The +/- keys allow you to quickly tune the thickness without using the parameter palette.

** The “Number of points” parameter is available when applying a thickness to a curve. It corresponds to the number of points which defines the sections.

24.3.2 Changing the position of the thicknessThis option allows you to change the location of the action (Inside/Outside or Above/Below). To toggle from one to the other, click on the icon showing the desired action.

OptionsInside Outside

Object to be thickened Object thickened towards the inside

Object thickened towards the outside

Example of curve with a thickness of 2 Example of curve with a thickness of 4

Example of curve with a thickness of 4 points Example of curve with a thickness of 6 points

Reference Manual352

24.3.3 Surface optionsIf the current object is surface or volume, Amapi Pro will give you the choice betweenseveral options to get an “Ideal”, “Angular” or “Exploded” shape.

24.3.4 Additional information

OptionsIdeal Angular Exploded

Option description

All the points belonging to the surface of the

thickened shape are at equal distance from the

original object.

The facets of the original object are offset by the thickness value then

dilated in order to obtain a shape similar to the

original.

The facets of the original object are reproduced

identically and shifted of the thickness value

Surface to be thickened

Available on NURBS objects only

Available with the “Create an offset copy” option only

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG):

• The “Give a thickness” option adds a DG level labeled Thickness.

• The “Create an offset copy” option creates a clone of the object and transmits its DG to it.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Using this tool, create a vase with variable thickness, modifying only the inside or the outsidesurface (the original object and its offset).

353 Amapi ProT M

24.4 CutThe “Cut” tool works on the selected objects (See “The concept of selection” onpage 147). Several methods are available to cut one or more objects at the same time:

Boolean: Performs boolean operationsbetween curves, surfaces or volumes (seedetails on page 355).

Punch or «Trimming»: Punching a surfaceor a volume using a reference curve (seedetails on page 357).

Extract: Extracts one or several facets of thecurrent object to make a new object (seedetails on page 361).(Polyhedral only)

Slices: Cuts a volume object into regularslices (see details on page 362).(Polyhedral only)

The cutting methods are proposed as options. toggle from one to the other by using both the“Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

Reference Manual354

24.4.1 Cutting methods

24.4.1.1 Boolean This “Cut” tool option computes the intersections between two operands such ascurves, surfaces or volumes. Then, it displays all the solutions resulting from this

operation. Select the one to be kept. The two objects can be indifferently Polyhedral orNURBS (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96). .

Tool usage

1) Select the first operand of the operation (object or group)

2) Pick up the tool

3) Click on the object or group of objects which will be the second operand.

4) Amapi Pro displays a first object. Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the +- keys) to toggle from one option to the other to display all the possible solutions of theoperation.

5) As the expected result is displayed, release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validatethe operation and leave the tool.

Options

“Boolean” tool example:• The sphere is the operand #1 (the object selected

before picking up the tool). It will be named Vol.1 ifconsidered as a closed volume or Surf.1 ifconsidered as a surface.

• The cube is the operand #2 (the object selected afterpicking up the tool). It will be named Vol.2 ifconsidered as a closed volume or Surf.2 ifconsidered as a surface.

If the two original objects are NURBS objects, cutting will make a NURBS object whatever theoperating mode. If one of the two objects is polyhedral, cutting will make a polyhedral object.

Boolean operations on open NURBS surfaces can give erroneous results. Use theseoperations only on closed volumes.

An operand should not have intersection with itself. Objects of a group should therefore notbe intersected between them.

Vol.2 Surf.2

Vol.1 Surf.1

355 Amapi ProT M

• Operations between volumes

• Operations between surface and volume

• Operations between surfaces

Vol.2 minus Vol.1 Vol.1 or Vol.2 Vol.1 and Vol.2 Vol.1 minus Vol.2

Surf.1 and Vol.2 Surf.2 and Vol.1 Surf.1 minus Vol.2 Surf.2 minus Vol.1

Surf.2 and Surf.1 Surf.2 or Surf.1*

*generates 4 surface objects

The boolean computing time on complex models is longer than on simple models.

Reference Manual356

24.4.1.2 PunchThe punch option cuts a curve, surface or volume objectfollowing the projection of a profile curve on this

object.

The two parts can be Polygonal or NURBS (See “Polygonal orNURBS Models” on page 96). Cutting NURBS volumes with the “Punch” option correspondsto what is called the “Trimming”.

The punch profile can be an open or a closed curve which hasalready been drawn or will be drawn into the tool (see detailson page 357).

Drawing the profileThe punch profile can be an open or closed curve which Amapi Pro will project onto theobject to be cut. The operation can be made either from an existing curve or a curve drawninto the tool.

• Punch from an already drawn profileDraw a profile with a tool from the “Line drawing” palette (see details on page 277).Select the element(s) to be “Cut”, pick up the tool and then click on the profile curve.Amapi Pro immediately displays the object created during this operation. Then, choose from the following options:• Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the + - keys) to toggle from one option

to the other to display all the possible solutions of the operation (See “Cutting options”on page 358).

• Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate the operation and leave the tool.

• Punch from a profile drawn in the toolSelect the element(s) to be “Cut” and pick up the tool. The “Line drawing” tools palette isdisplayed.

Use one of them to draw the punch profile(see details on page 277).

If the two original objects are NURBS objects, cutting will make a NURBS object whatever theoperating mode. If one of the two objects is polyhedral, cutting will make a polyhedral object.

The curve used as a punch on a NURBS volume must be a closed curve. If not the result can beerroneous.

Object to be cut

Cut object

357 Amapi ProT M

Amapi Pro immediately displays the object created from this operation. Then, choose from the following options:• Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the + - keys) to toggle from one option

to the other to display all the possible solutions of the operation (See “Cutting options”on page 358).

• Release the tool or press the “Enter” to validate the operation and leave the tool.

Direction of the profile projection The punch profile must be a 2D (flat) and closed curve, which will be projected onto theobject to be cut, following the normal to the plane it is inscribed to.

If required, the projection axis could be set perpendicular to the current view plane (See“View plane” on page 487). To do this, click on the icon in the control panel.

Cutting options• Punching a volume or surface objectAmapi Pro computes all the possible intersectionsbetween the current object and the profile curvefollowing its projection path.Use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys (or use the+ - keys) to toggle from one option to the other todisplay all the possible solutions of the operation. It is possible to control the cutting depth or the faceto be cut (see details on page 359).Press the “Enter” key to validate the operation andleave the tool.

Profilecurve

Profile projection path

Object to be cut

Reference Manual358

Cutting options between the volume and the projection path

Cutting options between the surface and the projection path

Control the hole depth or the face to be cut

It is possible to control:• The depth of the cut, when cutting a volume. • The facets to be cut, when cutting a surface.

Interior volume Exterior volume Interior/exterior volumes

Interior Surface Exterior surface Interior/exterior surfaces

359 Amapi ProT M

This operation could be done using the “Stretch” tool.

After having made the cut, you will release the “Cut” tool. You will then pick up the“Stretch” tool. You will then see the curve appear used for the cutting and a green axis repre-senting the cutting depth. Note that it slightly exceeds the cut out object. To reduce the cut-ting depth, simply take one of the ends of this axis and move it. The cutting is recomputed inreal time and you can thus visualize its exact depth. In the same way, you can orient the cut-ting axis or modify the curve.

• Punch a curve After validation, the number of objects is equal to the number of intersections between thecurve to be cut and the profile, plus one.

Particular case of the cutting on one point:

The same object and the line allowing you to

set the depth of the cutting in the “Stretch”

tool

The cutting depth line while setting it with the

“Stretch” tool

Object cut with the “Punch”

tool where the depth has been reduced.

Object cut with the “Punch” tool.

The object is drilled from a face through the

other one

Curve to be cutCutting profile Curve cut into several curves

Curve to be cutCutting profile

Shift clickClick

Click

Curve cut in two parts

Reference Manual360

24.4.1.3 ExtractThis “Cut” tool option allows you to substract one ormore facets of the current object to make a new object.

The newly created object becomes the current one.The “facets to be extracted” selection can be made with anavailable selection accessory (See “The selection methods” onpage 150).

To extract facets without removing them from the current object (duplication), use the tool“Extract Facets” (see details on page 304).

This “Cut” tool option can be used to separate different parts of an object after modeling in orderto apply different materials.

This type of extraction does not apply to NURBS objects.

361 Amapi ProT M

24.4.1.4 SlicesThis “Cut” tool option allows you to cut the selection into oriented slices. Select firstthe start point, then the end point of the cuts. Set the slices interval with the + - keys

or by entering the value in the parameter palette.

In the steps where the Position or Dimension must be set, several methods are available:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• “Using the Remote Control” (see details on page 162)• With the “+” or “-” keys.

• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Click

Click

Reference Manual362

24.4.2 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled Cut (See“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

What about the objects used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by

the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

Shortcuts: See the shortcut list available after starting the tool with any current option:• Click on a surface or a volume; Amapi Pro will make a cut with a Boolean operation (see details on

page 355).• Click on a curve: Amapi Pro will make a punch following an already drawn profile (see details on

page 357). • Click on the current object: Amapi Pro will make a punch following a profile drawn in the tool (see

details on page 357). • Click on the right mouse button: Amapi Pro will make a cut with the slice-cut option (see details on

page 362).

363 Amapi ProT M

24.5 DeleteThis tool allows you to delete one or several elements (facet, edge or point) from theselected objects (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). This deletion can be

made with or without facet reconstruction.

1) You can pick up this tool by having or not a current selection (Facets, Edges orPoints) (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).

2) You will begin or update the selection within the tool with the selection accessories (See“The selection accessories” on page 148).The deletion will be interactive.

3) Validate the action (“Enter” key) or release the tool to end the tool action.

Two deletion options are available;

With reconstruction

Without reconstruction

Amapi Pro will suggest options for the type of the current object and the entity to be deleted(See “The current selection is a curve” on page 365) (See “The current selection is asurface” on page 366)..

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool doesn’t work on objects including several DGlevels. You must collapse the DG before deleting an element (See “Collapsing the DG” onpage 118).

In the case of NURBS objects, only the edge and facet modes will be accessible since the pointsare not entities displayed on NURBS. The suppression of NURBS edges will allow you to removethe trimming curves of the NURBS surfaces. A NURBS surface represents a single face and thusthe removal of NURBS faces will remove the complete face.

Reference Manual364

24.5.1 The current selection is a curve

Without reconstruction With reconstruction

Option description Keeps the “hole” made by the deletion of the element(s).

Creates a curve segment to close the “hole” made by the deletion of the element(s).

Illustrationon open curve

I

Inactive

I

IInactive

The deletion of only one edge “with reconstruction” has no effect on the curve.

Inactive

Illustrationon closed curve

The removal of only one edge “With reconstruction” has obviously no effect on the curve.

Inactive

Point to be deleted

Edge to be deleted

Edges to be deleted

Point to be deleted

Edge to be deleted

Edges to be deleted

365 Amapi ProT M

24.5.2 The current selection is a surface

24.5.3 Additional information

Without reconstruction With reconstruction

Option description Keeps the “hole” made by the deletion of the element(s).

Creates a facet to close the “hole” made by the deletion of the element(s).

Deletion of only one facet

The deletion of only one facet “with reconstruction” has no effect on the object.

Facets deletion

Edges deletion

Point deletion

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): this tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DGlevel. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higherlevels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

The “Delete” tool doesn’t work on NURBS models. It is possible to transform a NURBSmodel into a polygonal model. To do so, use the “Information” tool located in the Control panel(See “Information” on page 188).Attention! A polygonal model cannot be transformed into a NURBS model.

Use the most adapted selection accessory within the proposed ones (See “The selectionmethods” on page 150)

Reference Manual366

24.6 TesselateThis tool subdivides the segments of a curve or the facets of a surface or a volume. A distinction must be made between the Tesselation of polygonal objects and the

Tesselation of NURBS objects (See “Polygonal or NURBS Models” on page 96).

24.6.1 Tesselate a polygonal volume or surfaceChoose between two groups of very different options:• “Standard Tesselation options” (see details on page 367)• “Customized Tesselation options” (see details on page 368)

24.6.1.1 Standard Tesselation optionsThe Standard Tesselation proposes several Tesselation modes.Click on the icon showing the desired option or use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys totoggle from one option to the other.

Select each facet to be subdivided. The selection can be made facet by facet (click on thefacet) or with the “Lasso” (See “The Personalized Lasso Selection” on page 153) quicklyavailable by right clicking the mouse. Validate the tool by pressing the “Enter” key.

The tool and the Dynamic Geometry (DG)• The tesselation on polyhedral object is a DG editor. This option carries out modifications of a

topological nature on the 1st DG level, its effects are reflected at the higher levels.• The tesselation of NURBS objects changes the NURBS properties of the object.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Rectangular Tesselation

Triangular Tesselation DiamondTesselation

Illustration

367 Amapi ProT M

When clicking on the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro will perform the operationon all the facets. Hit the “Enter” key to validate and start a new tesselation. The

shortcut for this accessory is the “A” key.

24.6.1.2 Customized Tesselation options Customized Tesselation allows the user to determine the segment of each facet to besubdivided. Amapi Pro proposes two possible interfaces to draw the segments. In both cases,validate the action by pressing the “Enter” key.

Tesselation by segment Continued Tesselation by segment

Tesselation by slice

Option description

Select the exact position of the ends of each segment for each facet to be sub-divided.

This interface considers that all the segments are adjacent. The user will define the passing points of the cutting line.

The user will have to only click on an edge to position the cutting section.

Illustration

Click 1Click 2

Click 3 Click 4

Click 1Click 2Click 3 Click

Reference Manual368

24.6.2 Tesselate a polygonal curveAmapi Pro proposes two modes for curves Tesselation. Click on the icon showing the desired option.

Middle segment tesselation Customized Tesselation

Illustration Amapi Pro adds a point in the middle of each selected segment.The selection can be done segment by segment (click on the segment) or with the “Lasso” (See “The Personalized Lasso Selection” on page 153) quickly available by clicking on the right mouse button. Validate the tool action by pressing the “Enter” key.

Click on segments to add new points.Validate the tool action by pressing the “Enter” key.

Accessory If using the “Apply to all” accessory, Amapi Pro will apply the operation on all the

segments. The shortcut for this accessory is the “A” key

Clicks Clicks

369 Amapi ProT M

24.6.3 Tesselate a NURBS object See “The NURBS models” paragraph on page 98 to learn more details about the NURBSmodels

For NURBS objects, Amapi Pro proposes two Tesselation methods. Click on the iconshowing the desired option or use the both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle from anoption to another.

“Standard NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 370)

“Adaptive NURBS Tesselation” (see details on page 371)

In the both cases, some settings can be made : “Adding nodes and breaks management” (seedetails on page 372)

24.6.3.1 Standard NURBS TesselationThis is a constant parametric Tesselation because the number of subdivisionsdepends on the “Range” parameter.

• For a NURBS curve, the tesselation range corresponds to the number of segmentsgenerated between two nodal points.

• For a NURBS surface or volume, the tesselation range corresponds to the number ofintervals made by the intermediate lines generated between two nodal lines.

When creating a NURBS curve, surface or volume, Amapi Pro sets the tesselation range to 5by default.

Tune the range with the + or - keys or by entering a value in the parameter palette.

Range U = 5Range V = 5

Range U = 2Range V = 3

Reference Manual370

24.6.3.2 Adaptive NURBS TesselationThis Tesselation method is slower than the standard method (see details on page 370)but it has the advantage of generating an optimal number of subdivisions. It can only

be applied to surfaces. You will have the possibility to modify the following parameters:

• Maximum chord height of a facet compared to the theoretical surface.• Maximum angle in the UV space made by a polygon (in degrees).• Maximum length of an edge in the 3D space.• Minimum length of an edge in the 3D space.• Width and height maximum ratio between the surfaces of the created polygons.• Smaller subdivision in the UV space.

Each one of these values can act in complement to the others. Setting a value to 0 will cancelthe effect of this parameter. Therefore, one of the first two parameters should not be set to 0in order to generate a result.

Some values can create verylong computing times. It isthus advised to test the val-ues one by one and to applymodifications by reducing tothe default values.

Range U = 5Range V = 5

Default tesselation ranges for a NURBS object (See “The NURBS models” on

page 98)

Range U = 2Range V = 10

Range U = 10Range V = 2

Range U = 10Range V = 10

RangRang

ConstantTesselation

AdaptiveTesselation

371 Amapi ProT M

24.6.3.3 Determination of the degreeThe degree of a NURBS can be modified by editing the Degree field for a curve or Degree Uand Degree V for a surface. (See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

24.6.3.4 Adding nodes and breaks management• If the current object is a curve:

• Add a nodal point by clicking at the exact location where this node is to be added.• To create a break, do a Shift-click on the node to be broken.

• If the current object is a surface or a volume:

A group of options allows you to select which nodal lines to work on. Click on the iconshowing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option to theother.

Work on U and V

Work on U

Work on V

• If working both on U and V:To add U and V nodal lines, place the cursor at the exact location where theses curveswill intersect and click. Create a break both on U and V by doing a Shift-click on the node corresponding tothe nodal lines intersection to be broken.

• If working individually on U or V:To add a nodal line, place the cursor on a point where the future line is to intersectand click. Create a break, by doing a Shift-click on the line to be broken.

Reference Manual372

24.6.3.5 Inversion of the space of the U and V parameters of a NURBS surface

It will sometimes be necessary to change the orientation of a NURBS surface. That can bedone thanks to these accessories:

Inversion of U

Inversion of V

Inversion of U and V

Adding two nodal lines(U and V)

Click

The two nodal lines (U and V)have been added

373 Amapi ProT M

24.7 DeformThis tool allows you to apply several kinds of deformations on the current selectionproposed as options (See “The concept of selection” on page 147).

They can be:• either due to the moving, the orientation or the scaling of the control face of the “Set the

mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376).• or depending on a parameter only.

The different options of the “Deform” tool

The objects deformed with the “Edit the meshed controlbox”, “Bend”, “Twist” or “Taper” option will have theirDynamic Geometry replaced by a DG level correspondingto a bounding meshed box called the meshed control box(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

An object deformed by this tool will be transformedfollowing the actions made on this meshed control box.

The “Edit the meshed control box” tool will allow you todeform the control box. The object will therefore undergo the effects of deforming thecontrol box. (See “The meshed control box editing accessories” on page 376).

Original object Bent object Twisted object Tapered object Spherized object

Reference Manual374

24.7.1 The optionsThe “Deform” tool proposes several possible deformations options. toggle from one to theother by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the correspondingicon. The tuner shows that the setting can be made by using the “+” and “-” keys or entering avalue in the parameter palette

Available options

Edit the meshed

control box

Bend Twist Taper Spherize

Illustration

Option description

Allows you to stretch the meshed control box (see details on page 377).Works according to a similar principle to the tool “Stretch NURBS objects” (see details on page 254).

allows you to bend the desired “Set the mesh of the control box” face around the selection geometric center.(See “Set the mesh of the control box” on page 376)(See “Action orientation options” on page 377)

allows you to rotate the desired “Set the mesh of the control box” face.(see details on page 376)(See “Action orientation options” on page 377)

allows you to scale the desired “Set the mesh of the control box” face.(see details on page 376)(See “Action orientation options” on page 377)

allows you to spherize the selection.Amapi Pro displays a support-sphere on which the selection will be projected.(see on page 376)

Editableparameter(s)

• Move x• Move y• Move z

•Angle •Angle •Ratio between the control face size and the original size

•Coefficient defines the projection extension

•Radius of the support-sphere

Accessory (See “The meshed control box editing accessories” on page 376)

•“Set the mesh of the control box”(see details on page 376)

•“Set the mesh of the control box”(see details on page 376)

•“Set the mesh of the control box”(see details on page 376)

375 Amapi ProT M

Spherized option using example

24.7.2 The meshed control box editing accessoriesThe “Edit the meshed control box”, “Bend”, “Twist” and“Taper” options replaces Dynamic Geometry by a DG levelcorresponding to a meshed control box. The object itselfwill be transformed following the actions made on thismeshed control box (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109).

The “Edit the meshed control box” tool and its accessoriesallows you to deform the control box.

The tool works on a similar principle to the tool “Stretch NURBS objects” (see details onpage 254). Its accessory functions are described below.

Set the mesh of the control boxThe “Set the mesh of the control box” accessory will allow you to modify the rowsand degrees of the meshed control box.

The range corresponds to the number of meshes in x,y and/or z. This setting allows you towork more or less precisely. This cursor shows that this can be done by using the “+”and “-” keys of the numeric keypad or by entering the values in the parameters window.

The degree is related to the number of points of control influencing the volume at a givenpoint. It defines the number of nodal points. The higher the degree, the less the influence ofthe control points and thus, the higher the smoothing on the volume. (see details onpage 101).

Originalobject

Objectslightly spherized

Objectstrongly spherized

Spherizedobject

Reference Manual376

Mold the control boxThis accessory makes it possible to move a control box’s selected points so that thepoints located in a specific area of influence will move with a certain inertia. The

object will undergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See “Mold” on page 382).

Scale the control boxThis accessory modifies the size of the control box either by preserving its propor-tions, or by deforming it vertically or horizontally. You will be able to set a scaling

percentage, as well as a dimension, a surface or a volume to be reached. The object willundergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See “Scale” on page 248).

Rotate the control boxThis accessory applies a rotation to the control box, around an axis perpendicular tothe working plane and by default through its geometric center. You will be able to

either control the rotation angle, or to carry out a rotation by applying a constrain by pointsalignment. In both cases you will have the possibility to customize the center as well as therotation plane. The object will undergo the effects of deforming the control box. (See“Rotate” on page 244).

24.7.3 Action orientation optionsThese options allows you to toggle the action direction (X,Y or Z). Theyare available in the tools working on the meshed control box. Click on

the icon showing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” to toggle from one option tothe other. In each case, Amapi Pro will highlight the two faces which can be the actioncontrol face.

Minimum meshing of the control box:• Range: 2 x 2 x 2.• Degree; 1 x 1 x 1.

Default meshing of the control box• The default range is 3 x 3 x 3.• The default degree is 2 x 2 x 2.

The value of the range must be strictly higher than the value of the degree.

377 Amapi ProT M

24.7.4 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): • The “Bend”, “Twist” and “Taper” options...

• Replaces the object Dynamic Geometry by a DG level corresponding to its “Set the mesh of thecontrol box”, labeled Mesh control box.

• Add a DG level corresponding to the deformed object, labeled Deformation.

• The “Spherize” option creates a DG level corresponding to the deformed object, labeledDeformation.

• The “Edit the meshed control box” option belongs to the list of editor-tools able to edit the 1stDG level. Its effects are reflected at higher levels.

(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

This tool works on selections relating to only one object: If the current selection is applied toseveral objects, Amapi Pro will refuse access to the tool.

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Dimension.• With the “+” or “-” keys for setting a Number.

• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

The rotations are made on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the most perpendicular tothe eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).To change the rotation plan, change the viewpoint (See “The Navigation” on page 135).

This tool uses DynamicGeometry properties.(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)”on page 109)

Original object made from a

circle extrusion along a profile

Obtained result after deformation (with the Bend

option) of the geometry level corresponding to the profile

Obtained result after deformation

(with the Bend option) of the object highest

geometry level.

Reference Manual378

24.8 BendThe “Bend” tool deforms the selection along a profile curve.Amapi Pro proposes two methods;

• “Bending along an existing profile” (see details on page 379),

• “Bending along a profile drawn with the tool” (see details on page 379).

24.8.1 Bending along an existing profileDraw a profile curve with a tool from the “Line drawing” palette (see details on page 277).Select the element(s) to “Bend” before picking up the tool and then select the profile curvewith a simple click. Amapi Designer immediately displays the bent selection.

24.8.2 Bending along a profile drawn with the toolSelect the element(s) to be bent before picking up the tool. The “Line drawing” (see detailson page 277) tools palette is displayed. Use these tools to draw the bending profile.

Bending profile Object to be bent Bent object

379 Amapi ProT M

Amapi Pro immediately displays the bent selection as the drawing is validated.

24.8.3 Additional information

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): the tool adds a DG level labeled Bend. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The size of the profile shape has no effect.

The bending is made following the projection of the selected profile on the working plane.That is to say this tool works in two dimensions. Thus, it is important to be exactly on the same plane as the profile curve.So, it is possible to perform successive bendings in different planes (See “Scene / orthonormalbase toggling” on page 171).

Object to be bent

Torsion profile while drawing

Bent object

“Hand free” drawn profilein the “Bend” tool

The sceneafter the tool validation

Reference Manual380

It is obvious that to bend an object, thisobject must be defined by several pointsfor a curve or several intermediatesections for a surface. Amapi Pro cannotproperly bend a cylinder made up of onlyone extrusion segment.

It is not possible to bend:• Several objects at the same time (except if they are grouped)• A selection of several different objects.

What about the objects used for the construction?There are two cases:

When working using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details on page 109):The curves used for the construction will be the first DG level. They will be editable by

the tools which modify the topology. The effects of the transformations will be automaticallytransmitted to the finished object (See “Editing a DG level” on page 123).

When working without using Dynamic Geometry (DG) properties (see details onpage 109): The curves used for the construction will be automatically hidden after

releasing the tool. They can be shown again using the Unhide tool (See “Hide, Show” onpage 184).

Cylinder #2 to be bent, made up of only one segment

Cylinder #1 to bebent, made up of

several segments

Cylinder #2 bent following the P profile

Cylinder #1 bentalong the P profile

P= Bending profile

381 Amapi ProT M

24.9 MoldThis tool allows you to pull the current selection (see details on page 382) so that thepoints located in the influence area (see details on page 383) are moved with some

inertia (see details on page 384).

24.9.1 Selection to pullThere are two cases:

• The current selection, before picking up the tool, is an object.In this case the user will select a point to be pulled. This will be the only point on which the inertia doesn’t apply (See “Inertia” onpage 384).

• The current selection, before picking up the tool, is a part of the object.In this case the user will select a point within the selected points. All the selection will bemoved without any inertia: it will not be deformed (See “Inertia” on page 384).

Original object Mold object.No points are selected

before picking up the tool.The upper point of the

bottle was moved.The button and the cork

got the mold effects.

Mold object.The button was selected before picking up the tool.

Only the cork got the mold effects, but the button was moved

without deformation.

Reference Manual382

24.9.2 Influence area The influence area is the area inside which all the points receive mold effects. There are twooptions to increase or to reduce the influence area:

By adjacency; the “adjacency level” parameter allows you to geometrically controlthe size of the influence area.

With a radius of influence; the “radius of influence” parameter allows you totopologically control the size of the influence area.

In both cases, the “Alt” “Page up” and “Alt” “Page down” keys will increase or decrease thesize of the influence area

Original object Mold object with a small influence area

(limited to the top half portion of the cork)

Mold object with a greater influence area

(limited to the top portion of the cork)

383 Amapi ProT M

24.9.3 Inertia“Mold” tool creates inertia on all the points located in the influence area (See “Influencearea” on page 383). It is proportional to the distance from the selection to be pulled. The points close to the main selected point receive a high inertia coefficient, the points farfrom the main selected point receive a small inertia coefficient.The selection to be pulled has no inertia and follows the exact cursor movement (See“Selection to pull” on page 382).

The “Alt” “Page up” and “Alt” “Page down” keys will increase or decrease the inertiacoefficient.

24.9.4 Additional informationThe Mold tool works on NURBS models as on polygonal models. But on a NURBS model theoperation is carried out on the points of the control polygon and not on the points of the objectitself. The object will be deformed depending on the points of the control polygon movement.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DGlevel. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at thehigher levels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Original object Top portion of the cork mold with a high inertia coefficient

Top portion of the cork mold with a very low

inertia coefficient

Top portion of the cork mold with a low inertia

coefficient

Reference Manual384

24.10 Bump/SoftenThis tool allows you to work on the surface bump of the current selection (See “Theconcept of selection” on page 147).

This tool can either:• Bump the selection by moving the points of a surface randomly.• Soften or Stress the perturbations of a surface.

Use the +/- keys to tune the amplitude of the action before validating.

Bump Soften-Stress “Relax” method

Soften-Stress “Mid-mid” method

Illustration

Original object

Soften Stress

Option description

This option moves the points of a surface or a curve on both sides to give it some random surface bump. The amplitude of the deformation will remain within the specified range(see on page 386).

This option uses the “Relax” method to soften or stress the perturbations of a surface or a curve.

This option uses the “Mid-mid” method to soften or stress the perturbations of a surface or a curve.

Editableparameters

• Maximum amplitude•Minimum amplitude

The +/- keys allow you to set these two parameters quickly.(see on page 386)

•Level (number of times to iterate)•Coefficient (algorithm weight)A negative coefficient increases the surface bump, whereas a positive coefficient softens it

The +/- keys allow you to set these two parameters quickly

Accessories •New iteration Amapi Pro will launch a new

computing operation each time this icon is selected. The surface appearance will be modified each time.

• Freeze boundary verticesIf the current object is a surface, click on this icon to leave out its edges of the

softening process (it keeps them sharp).

385 Amapi ProT M

Original surface Original surfaceand

“Bumped” surface

Maximum amplitude =10Minimum amplitude =10

Original surfaceand

“Bumped” surface

Maximum amplitude =10Minimum amplitude =0

Original surfaceand

“Bumped” surface

Maximum amplitude =0Minimum amplitude =-10

Bumping a surface

Original surface “Stressed” surfaceCoefficient = -0.10

“Softened” surfaceCoefficient = 0.20

Stressing/Softening a surface

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): the tool adds a DG level labeled height field (See“Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

This tool works on a selection of only one object. If the current selection is on several objects,Amapi Pro will not give access to the tool.

In the steps where the Dimension or Number must be set, several methods are available:• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys for setting a number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

Reference Manual386

387 Amapi ProT M

25 Assembly palette

This tools palette contains the tools used to place and orient the objects:

Icon Tool name Description See

“Duplicate” Allows you to create one or several copies of the current selection. Amapi Prooffers several methods of duplication. page 388

“Symmetry” Creates a mirror image of the current selection. page 398

“Close” Lets you close the current selection, such as a curve or an opened surface. page 400

“Weld”This tool offers several options to weld objects or points. If these optionsgenerate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them (other pointsare deleted).

page 403

“Snap/Align” This tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along a vector,the ends of which are defined by the user. page 406

“Lay on”This tool is used to lay a facet of the selected object onto a facet of anotherobject (center on center). page 408

“Unfold” This tool is used to create a 2D flat unfolded version of a 3D model. page 409

“Wrap” This tool allows you to deformation of an object by mapping it onto a surface(grid, cylinder or sphere). page 413

“Measurements”This tool displays the dimensions of an object. Amapi Pro allows you todisplay three types of dimensions: length, angle and volume/surface/circumference.

page 415

“Decimate” This tool allows you to reduce the complexity of an object. page 420

25.1 DuplicateThe “Duplicate” tool allows you to create one or several copies of the currentselection (See “The concept of selection” on page 147). Amapi Pro has several

methods of duplication:

25.1.1 The methodstoggle from one to the other by using both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking onthe corresponding icon.

“Single copy”: Makes one copy of theselection (see details on page 389).

“Multiple copy”: Makes several copies ofthe selection with a copy shift and/or

rotation (see details on page 390).

“Copy on support”: Duplicates theselection along a path or on the facets of a

surface or a volume (see details on page 392).

Reference Manual388

25.1.1.1 Single copy This option allows you to duplicate an object ora group of objects.

Click on the object to be copied.The bounding box of the copy follows the cursor. Setits position in the scene. The position setting can bedone with a mouse click in the graphic workspace or byentering the coordinates of the geometric center in theparameter palette. Amapi Pro will suggest to do a newcopy. Press the “Enter” key to validate the operationand leave the tool.

The “Single copy” proposes to clone the copies

(See “The clones” on page 107).

The validation (by releasing the tool or pressing the “Enter” key) ignores the current copy (whenthe bounding box position is not set).

389 Amapi ProT M

25.1.1.2 Multiple copy

UseThis “Duplicate” tool option allows you to make several copies of the selection witha copy shift, rotation and/or a scaling ratio. This option works with parameters

settings along several steps:

1) Setting the Number of copies (data or “+ or -” keys) and validation.

2) Setting the Offset and validation.

3) Setting the Rotation and validation.

4) Setting the Scale ratio and validation.

The “Multiple copy” gives an option;

“Clone” the copies (see details on page 107).

The “Multiple copy” gives the accessory “Reference point” (see details on page 391).

If’ “n” copies are set in the “Multiple copy” option, “n” copies will be added to the selection.

No of copies = 5

Offset step in x = 4Offset step in y = 4Offset step in z = 0

Rotation step in x = 0Rotation step in y = 0Rotation step in z = 0

Scaling ratio in x = 100Scaling ratio in y = 100Scaling ratio in z = 100

No of copies = 5

Offset step in x = 0Offset step in y = 4Offset step in z = 0

Rotation step in x = 0Rotation step in y = 20Rotation step in z = 0

Scaling ratio in x = 100Scaling ratio in y = 100Scaling ratio in z = 100

Examples of object duplication.

No of copies = 5

Offset step in x = 0Offset step in y = 4Offset step in z = 0

Rotation step in x = 0Rotation step in y = 0Rotation step in z = 0

Scaling ratio in x = 90Scaling ratio in y = 90Scaling ratio in z = 90

Reference Manual390

Reference pointThis is this point from which theoffset and the rotation of each copy

will be computed.The default reference point is the center ofthe selected objects bounding box. Tochange it, use the “Reference point”accessory and then select the point of thescene which will be the new reference point.

No of copies = 4

Offset step in x = 0Offset step in y = 4Offset step in z = 0

Rotation step in x = 0Rotation step in y = 20Rotation step in z = 0

Reference point

Scaling ratio in x = 100Scaling ratio in y = 100Scaling ratio in z = 100

391 Amapi ProT M

25.1.1.3 Copy on support Use this tool to duplicate the selection along a path or on the facets of a surface or avolume the copies will lie on.

Use1) The duplication support can be either a curve, a surface or a volume.

• A curve support (or path) can be drawn with the “Line drawing” tool before selectingthe “Duplicate” tool or while using the “Duplicate” tool.

• A surface or a volume used as duplication support must be built before selecting the“Duplicate” tool.

2) Select the elements to be copied (See “Selection” on page 147).

3) Pick up the “Duplicate” tool in the assembly palette.

4) Select the “Copy on support” option.

5) It is possible to draw a duplication support path with the tool by using the accessory“Draw a path with the tool” (see details on page 396). Otherwise, go to the next step.

6) Click on the duplication support. • If the support is a curve: the copies are created on the path so that their reference

points (see details on page 393) are located on each point defining the curve.• If the support is a surface: the copies are placed on the support so that their reference

points (see details on page 394) are located on the center of each facet of the support.

7) If needed, change the proposed options:

“Orientation of the copies” (see details on page 393).

“Clone” the copies (see details on page 107)

“Control of the facet-copy size ratio” (see details on page 396).

“Reference point” (see details on page 396)

8) Eventually control:• the size of the copies (see details on page 395)• the rotation of the copies (see details on page 395)

9) Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validate the operation and leave the tool.

The number of copies will be equal to the number of points of the path or to the number offacets defining the support (surface or volume).

Reference Manual392

Orientation of the copies• The support is a curve:

Example of a selection to be copied onto a curve support

It is possible to draw a duplication support path with the tool by using the accessory “Drawa path with the tool” (see details on page 396)

Keeps the orientation of the original.

Rotates the copies to position the x axis of the original on the normal to the curve.

Rotates the copies to position the y axis of the original on the normal to the curve.

Rotates the copies to position the z axis of the original on the normal to the curve.

Rotates the copies following the Frenet triangle

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

Selectionto be copied

Support

393 Amapi ProT M

• The support is a surface:

Example of a selection to be copied onto a surface support

Keeps the orientation of the original.

Rotates the copies to position the x axis of the original on the normal of each facet of the support.

Rotates the copies to position the y axis of the original on the normal to each facet of the support.

Rotates the copies to position the z axis of the original on the normal to each facet of the support.

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

•Size (see details on page 395)

•Rotation (see details on page 395)

Selectionto copy

Support

x

z

y

x y z

Reference Manual394

Controlling the size of the copiesIf the support is a curve

Amapi Pro can scale the copies so that thesize of the copies increases or decreases

progressively between the first and the last copy.The first copy position is on the first point of thecurve. Set the size ratio between the first and thelast copy. The tuning can be done by using the +or - keys, or by entering the ratio in the parameterpalette.

If the support is a surfaceSet the size ratio between the first and the lastcopy. The tuning can be done by using the + or -keys, or by entering a value in the parameterpalette.

Rotation of the copiesGive a rotation movement to all the copies byentering a value in the parameter palette.

Reverse the copiesThe copies are oriented so as toposition one axis (x,y,z) of the

original on the normal of the support (see detailson page 393).

The “Reverse the copies” option allows you toreverse the orientation of the normal.

395 Amapi ProT M

Control of the facet-copy size ratio If the support is a surface, Amapi Pro hasan accessory to control the size ratio of

each facet/copy pair. The “Control of the facet-copy size ratio”accessory asks you to select the facet/copycouple to define a size ratio. This size ratio willbe automatically assigned to all the facet/copycouples.

Reference pointThe reference point, displayed with the ( ) sign, defines the position of the copiesonto the support. The default reference point is the center of the selected objects

bounding box.• If the support is a curve: the copies will be positioned on the path so that their reference

points will be located on each point defining the curve.• If the support is a surface: the copies will be positioned on the support so that their

reference points are located on the center of each facet of the support.To change it, use the “Reference point” accessory and then select the point of the scenewhich will be the new reference point.

Draw a path with the toolThe “Line drawing” tools palette allows youto draw a path with the tool.

Amapi Pro will display the copies just after the drawing validation.

Selected facet-copy couple

Selected facet-copy couple

Reference Manual396

25.1.2 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool keeps the DG properties of the current objectand transmits them to the generated objects (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The copies are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the tool “Ungroup” in thecontrol panel (see details on page 186).

The orientation of the object on a support facet depends on the orientation of the normal ofthis support facet (See “Information” tool, section “Functions” (see details on page 189)).

In the steps where the Position, Dimension or Number must be set, several methods areavailable:• “From the graphic workspace”

• “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162) for setting a Position or a Dimension.In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).

• With the “+” or “-” keys to set a number.• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

397 Amapi ProT M

25.2 SymmetryUse the “Symmetry” tool to create a mirror image of the current selection (See “Theconcept of selection” on page 147).

Do the operation following one of the proposed options. toggle from one to the other byusing both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys or by clicking on the corresponding icon.

25.2.1 Symmetry from an orthogonal planeThis option creates a mirror image from anorthogonal plane on which the faces of the

bounding box are oriented.To do it, click on the desired face. Release the tool or press the “Enter” key to validatethe operation and release the tool.

25.2.2 From an orthogonal plane passing by a point to be selected

This option creates a mirror image from an orthogonal plane passing by a point to beselected by the user.

Press the “Space-Bar” to toggle between Horizontal / Vertical plane.

Validate the operation by pressing the “Enter” key or by releasing the tool.

Reference Manual398

25.2.3 Clone the generated objectsThe “Symmetry” tool can clone the objects it generates. (See “The clones” onpage 107).

25.2.4 Additional information

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool keeps the DG properties of the current objectand transmits them to the generated objects (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

The copies are automatically grouped. They can be ungrouped with the tool “Ungroup” (seedetails on page 186) in the control panel.

The cursor is movement is done on the orthogonal plane which orientation is the mostperpendicular to the eye - target point axis (See “Viewpoint” on page 137)When setting a point in the three dimensions, the mouse movement modifies only 2 out of 3displayed values (x, y and z). There are two possibilities to change the third value:• Change the viewpoint (See “The Navigation” on page 135))• “Editing the parameters” (see details on page 162)

In the steps where the Position must be set, several methods are available:• “From the graphic workspace”: “Using the mouse” (see details on page 162)

In this case, set the cursor positioning or movement constraints (see details on page 191).• By entering a value in the parameter palette (see details on page 163)

399 Amapi ProT M

25.3 CloseThe “Close” tool allows you to close the current selection such as a curve or anopened surface (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).

The interface is slightly different depending on the current object type:

• “Close a polygonal surface” (see details on page 400)

• “Edit the polylines closings” (see details on page 400)

• “Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure object” (see details on page 401)

25.3.1 Close a polygonal surfaceAmapi Pro highlights (in white) theopenings that can be closed. Click onthese openings then release the tool orpress the “Enter” key.

25.3.2 Edit the polylines closingsAmapi Pro can edit the opening/closing segment of a curve.• The open segment is highlighted in white.• The closed segment is highlighted in red.Switch from one state to the other by clicking on it, then release the tool or press the “Enter”key.

This kind of closure is not editable.

This kind of closure is editable, that is to say that a curve closed with the “Close” tool can beopened again.

Click

Polygonal objectbefore closing

Polygonal objectafter closing

Reference Manual400

25.3.3 Edit the joint and opening of a grid-structure object

Amapi Pro can edit the joints and the openings of a “Grid structure” (see details onpage 484) object.

A “Grid structure” object may or may not be closed in U and/or in V:

• It is possible to close the upper and/or lower openings of a grid structured object joinedin U only.

• It is possible to close the left and/or right side(s) openings of a grid structured objectjoined in V only.

• The open joint is highlighted with a thin white line.• The closed joint is highlighted with a thin red line.• An opening is highlighted with a thick white line.• A closure is highlighted with a thick red line.

Switch from one state to the other (open/close) by clicking on it then release the tool or pressthe “Enter” key.

This kind of closure is editable.

Grid structurenot closed

Grid structureclosed in U(Cylinder)

Grid structureclosed in V

Grid structureclosed in U and in V

(Torus)

Grid structurejoined in Uand closed

Grid structurejoined in Vand closed

401 Amapi ProT M

25.3.4 Additional information It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory, to generate automatically all thefacet closures corresponding to the highlighted openings. This accessory shortcut is the

“A” key.

This tool is different from the tool “Extract Facets” with the option “Automatic creation offacet closures” (see details on page 304).• The “Extract Facets” tool creates a new object closure. • The “Close” tool closes the current object.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool which can edit the first DGlevel. The editor-tools carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higherlevels. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Reference Manual402

25.4 WeldThe “Weld” tool has several options to weld objects or points. If these optionsgenerate overlapping points, Amapi Pro keeps only one of them (other points are

deleted). Refer to the description below to understand how to use these options.

25.4.1 The options

Proposedoptions

Weld objects Weld points onto an object

Weld points close to each other

Optiondescription

Replaces the selected objects by only one which is the sum of both. There is no visible transformation displayed. But the difference is fundamental when a modeling operation is made (see illustration below).The “One by one” selection accessory is the default option. Other accessories can be used (see details on page 150).

Move the selected points toward the geometric center of the selection. The “One by one” selection accessory is the default option. Another accessory can be selected (see details on page 150).

Move the closest points toward their geometric center. The + and - keys allow you to quickly tune the distance at which the two points are considered to be close.

Illustration

Editableparameter

•Distance:distance at which two points are considered to be close.

Model made from several not welded

objects

Object made from several welded

objects

Scaling of the tray object.

In this case, only the tray is deformed

Scaling of the points corresponding to the

tray The entire object is

deformed

Lasso

Before welding

After welding

Before welding

After welding

403 Amapi ProT M

25.4.2 Weld points of distant objectsSpecial case: successively using the “Weld points onto an object” and “Weld points close toeach other” options.

25.4.3 Point selection when using weld points It will be sometimes necessary to weld several groups of points between each other in thesame operation without leaving the tool. To do this in the weld points mode, it is necessaryto quickly change the reference point. The reference point is the point displayed in red after the first operation of selection or weld-ing. All the clicked points are then welded to the reference point. To disable this, just clickon it. It is then possible to select any other point which will then become the reference point.

25.4.4 Weld NURBS objectsWelding two NURBS surfaces creates a different object depending on the type of surfaceand their relative position. If two surfaces have edges which are close or adjacent, they are welded onto only one sur-face by connecting their closest edges.In all the other cases, Amapi Pro creates a dynamic geometry containing a BREP linking thefaces to be welded.

This sphere and cube are welded to make only one object.

Welding points belong to the object.

Result obtained after welding.

Reference Manual404

25.4.5 Additional informationIt is not possible to:• Weld closed curves (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).• Weld open curves if they don’t have a common end (See “Open / closed objects” on page 94).• Weld the points close to each other of grouped objects (See “Group, Ungroup” on page 186).

The “Weld” tool with “Weld objects” option must be distinguished from the “Group” tool(see details on page 186).• A group of objects:

• can have a hierarchy (sub-group notion)• keeps all the points of each object.• can be ungrouped at anytime with the Ungroup tool• is recognized thanks to its entire bounding box.

• An object made from welded objects:• doesn’t have overlapped points just after welding.• cannot be ungrouped (but with Crtl-Z).• is recognized thanks to its partial bounding box.

The “Weld” tool with “Weld points close to each other” option must be distinguished fromthe “Decimate” tool (see details on page 420) which reduces the complexity of a surfaceselection with respect to the general shape of the original object.

It is possible to click on the “Apply to all” accessory. This carries out the operation on allthe displayed entities, then automatically quits the tool.

This accessory shortcut is the “A” key.

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool has a different behavior depending on thedesired option.• The “Weld points onto an object” and “Weld points close to each other” options are able to edit the

first DG level. They carry out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at higherlevels.

• The “Weld objects” option add or insert a DG level labeled Weld Objects (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

405 Amapi ProT M

25.5 Snap/AlignThe “Snap/Align” tool is used to apply a translation to the current selection along avector, the ends of which are to be defined by the user (See “The concept of

selection” on page 147).

25.5.1 UseThe user will select in the following order:

• The starting point of the translation vector.

• The ending point of the translation vector.It can either be:• selected in the scene.• defined by entering its coordinates in the parameter palette.

(See “Editing the parameters” on page 162).

A movement constraint can be applied to the translation (See “Align” on page 406).

After each translation, Amapi Pro will suggest a new translation. To validate the operation,press the “Enter” key or release the tool.

25.5.2 AlignThe Horizontal / Vertical constraints options allows you to proceed to precise alignments.Press on the “Space-Bar” to toggle between Horizontal / Vertical.

Translation vector

Current selection

Moved selection

Translation with horizontal constraint

Translation with vertical constraint

Translationwithout constraint

Legend:

Reference Manual406

25.5.3 Some illustrated examples

25.5.4 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool is an editor-tool able to edit:• The first DG level by carrying out topological modifications. Their effects will be reflected at

higher levels.• A shape located at any DG level. In this case, the tool will not work on the current selection but on the

entire shape. (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109)

Translation vector

Current selection

Moved selection

This example shows the most frequent use of the “Snap/Align” tool. The goal is to move a selected object to snap one of its points on another point of the scene.

Translation vector

Current selection

Moved selection

Translation vector

Current selection

Moved selection

Translation vector

Current selection

Moved selection

407 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual408

25.6 Lay on This tool is used to lay a facet of a selected object (See “The concept of selection” onpage 147) onto a facet of another object (center on center).

First select the facet to be laid onto (from the current object), then select a facet of anotherobject of the scene. Amapi Pro proposes by default to lay the lower face of the bounding box onto the currentobject. The user will be able to indicate another facet to be laid onto before indicating thereceiving facet belonging to another object of the scene.

Two options allow you to toggle the direction of the action (normal direction / normalreverse direction). Click on the icon showing the desired option or press the “Space-Bar” totoggle from one option to the other.

Normal direction Normal reverse direction

The tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): this tool can work at any DG level. The effects will bereflected at higher levels (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

Click1- The deep dish is the current object. Click on the external side of the bottom face of the deep dish.

Click

2- Then click on the internal bottom face of the flat dish.

3- The deep dish is laid onto the flat dish.

25.7 UnfoldUse the “Unfold” tool to create a 2D unfolded flat version of a 3D model.

The model to be unfolded must be the current object.By default, Amapi Pro selects the edges which will be the cutting edges and the startingfacet. In some cases, there will be a specific need which doesn’t match the default options.However, Amapi Pro allows you to:• “Select the cutting edges” (see details on page 410).• “Select the starting facet” (see details on page 411).Once these (optional) setting(s) are made, the unfolding can be done (see details onpage 412).

2D flat unfolded model

3D modelwith its cutting edges

409 Amapi ProT M

25.7.1 Select the cutting edges

25.7.1.1 Specific edges for the cutting edgesThe user has the possibility to select the individual edges along which the object willbe cut. The selection can be made “one by one” or with the “lasso” (See “The

selection methods” on page 150). To toggle from one selection mode to the other, click onthe right mouse button.If there are not enough edges selected to unfold the shape correctly, Amapi Pro willautomatically select additional edges.

2D flat unfolded modelwith default cutting edges

2D flat unfolded modelwith custom cutting edges

Reference Manual410

25.7.1.2 Deselecting edgesBy clicking on this icon, all the edges selected as cutting edges will be deselected.

25.7.2 Select the starting facetBy default, Amapi Pro selects a starting facet to unfold the object.However, the user can select a facet as the unfolding starting facet. To do so, click onthe icon to select the starting facet.

2D flat unfolded modelwith default starting facet

411 Amapi ProT M

25.7.3 UnfoldBefore starting the unfolding operation, the cutting edges (see details on page 410) orthe starting facet (see details on page 411) might have been selected.

If not, Amapi Pro will select the cutting edges and the starting facet on its own.The unfolding operation starts when the user clicks on the icon. The current objectremains intact, the unfolded version is displayed on the horizontal plane.

25.7.4 Additional InformationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool generates a new object with only one DG levellabeled as Polygonal volume (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

2D flat unfolded modelwith custom starting facet

Reference Manual412

25.8 WrapThe “Wrap” tool allows you to deform an object by mapping it onto a surface (grid,cylinder or sphere). It is possible to control the dimensions of the shape and other

parameters such as the altitude, the width and the threshold.

25.8.1 OptionsClick on the desired option or press on both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys to toggle fromone to the other.

*The altitude is the distance between a point of the object and the mapped shape. The points located onto the shape are considered to be at an altitude of zero and the most distant points are at a maximum altitude. One can say that the maximum altitude corresponds to the thickness of the object.

On a grid On a Cylinder On a Sphere

Illustration

Editableparameters

•Width (shape)•Height (shape)•Altitude (maxi)*

•Threshold(see details on page 414)

•u0 •u1 •v0•v1•v1

•Height (shape)•Diameter (shape)•Altitude (maxi)*

•Threshold(see details on page 414)

•u0 •u1 •v0•v1•v1

•Diameter (shape)•Altitude (maxi)*

•Threshold(see details on page 414)

•u0 •u1 •v0•v1•v1

Accessories •Threshold(see details on page 414)

•Threshold(see details on page 414)

•Threshold(see details on page 414)

Spread (see details on page 414)

Spread (see details on page 414)

Spread (see details on page 414)

413 Amapi ProT M

25.8.2 Spread managementBy default, Amapi Pro maps the object on the entire surface of the shape (maximumspreading). To tune the spreading, press the “+” or “-” key or enter the projectioncoordinates - (u0,u1) and (v0,v1) - in the parameter palette.

Projection on a sphere with a decreasing spreading

25.8.3 The Threshold accessoryOnce the projection is made, the altitude (facet-shape distance) can be set with the“threshold” tool to define a distance under which the facets will be deleted. This

threshold is defined as a percentage of the maximum altitude. To tune the threshold, pressthe “+” or “-” keys or enter a value in the parameter palette.

Projection on a grid with an increasing threshold

25.8.4 Additional informationThe tool and Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool adds a DG level labeled as Projection(See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” on page 109).

At all the steps where values, such as “set size” or “set number”, must be set. Two methodscan be set:• “From the graphic workspace” with the “+” or “-” keys for the “Spread” parameters.• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163) for the other parameters

Reference Manual414

25.9 Measurements Use the Measurements tool to display the dimensions of an object. Amapi Pro allows you to display three types of dimensions: length, angle and

volume/surface/circumference (see details on page 416).

The dimensions are displayed only when the “Measurements” tool is in use. However, thedimensions are automatically updated as soon as the object is modified.

The measurements are saved with the object.

The measurements can be printed or not from the printing preferences “Preferences” (See“Printing preferences” on page 474).

If the object topology changes, Amapi Pro will not be able to keep this dimension and will deleteall the measures.

87.5 °

21.70 cm

12.20 cm

16 cm Volume: 4095.68 cm3

Area: 1555.72 cm2

415 Amapi ProT M

25.9.1 The measurement toolsThere are several measurement tools which can be selected by clicking on theircorresponding icon, or use both the “Alt” and “Space-Bar” keys keyboard shortcut.

“Distance” (see details on page 416)

“Angle” (see details on page 417)

“Circumference/ Volume / Surface” (see details on page 418)

25.9.1.1 DistanceThe “Distance” tool measures the distance between two points. They can be selectedby a simple click.

Amapi Pro proposes three distance measurement modes between two points:• the absolute distance measurement between these two points, • the distance measurement between the points projection on the horizontal axis,• the distance measurement between the points projection on the vertical axis.A shortcut can be used to toggle from one mode to another, either by using the switchingaxis icons located in the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206), or by pressing the“Space-Bar”.

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click on themouse button.

Absolute Distance(default mode)

Horizontal Projection Vertical Projection

Absolute distance measurement between two points.

Distance measurement between the points’ projection on the

horizontal axis

Distance measurement between the points’ projection on the

vertical axis

It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.

Reference Manual416

25.9.1.2 AngleUse the “Angle” tool to measure the angle made by two adjacent edges by selectingtheir extremities. They are selected by simple clicks:

• 1s t click: on the end of a segment of the angle• 2n d click: on the vertex of the angle• 3r d click: on the end of the other segment of the angle

The Amapi Pro default display is the inner angle, but the outer angle can also be selected. Ashortcut can be used to toggle from one mode to another, either by using the switching axisicons located in the “The assistant palette” (see details on page 206); or by pressing the“Space-Bar”.

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click themouse button.

Inner Angle (default mode) Outer Angle

It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.

135°

1s t click

3r d click

2n d click225°

417 Amapi ProT M

25.9.1.3 Circumference/ Volume / SurfaceTo display this information, just click on the object. The kind of informationdisplayed depends on the selected object (See “The Types of objects” on page 91):

Once the measurement is made, move the cursor to position the dimension and click on themouse button.

25.9.2 The dimensions-manipulating accessories

25.9.2.1 repositioning the dimensionIt is possible to move a displayed dimension by clicking on this icon.Just click on the dimension to be repositioned before moving the cursor. The

dimension will follow the cursor. Then click to set the new location of the dimension.

25.9.2.2 Deleting a dimensionOne or several dimensions can be deleted by clicking on this icon. Then, just click onthe dimension to be deleted.

25.9.2.3 Deleting all the dimensionsAll of the displayed dimensions can be deleted by clicking on this icon.

If the object is… Amapi Pro displays…

A closed volume • A volume • An area

A surface (open volume) • An area• A circumference (the perimeter)

An open or closed curve • A circumference (a length).

It is possible to move a dimension by using the “repositioning the dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.It is possible to delete a dimension by using the “Deleting a dimension” (see details onpage 418) accessory.

Reference Manual418

25.9.3 Additional informationIt is not possible to compute the volume of a NURBS surface.However, it is possible to transform it temporarily into a polygonal object to allow the computingof its volume. (See “Transform a Polyhedral model into a NURBS model /a NURBS model into a Polygonalmodel” on page 105).

419 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual420

25.10 Decimate This tool allows you to reduce the complexity of an object (See “The concept ofselection” on page 147). It uses a polygon simplifier which operates on polygonal

objects only.

Amapi Pro computes and displays the surface as a mesh made up of triangular facets.The “Decimate range” parameter represents the percentage of remaining polygons from theinitial model. A range of 0.3 means that the simplified model will contain 30% of theoriginal number of polygons.

Object before decimating

Object with a decreasing percentage of decimation

About Dynamic Geometry (DG): This tool collapses the DG of the object (See “DynamicGeometry (DG)” on page 109).

There are two methods to tune the parameters:• “From the graphic workspace”, with the “+” or “-” keys.• By entering a value in the Parameter palette (see details on page 163).

Because it uses a polygon simplifier, this tool works on polygonal surfaces only (See “Polygonalor NURBS Models” on page 96).

Percentage = 90% Percentage = 50% Percentage = 20%

Rendering Room

“Rendering” is the operation consisting in computing and displaying the scene. To doso, it uses software algorithms to simulate lighting and realistic materials. The image

thus obtained can be saved as a file.

The Rendering room is divided into specialized zones, that will allow you to work on:

• “Materials”: allows you to set and apply materials on objects (see details on page 453).

• “Lighting”: allows you to locate and set light sources (see details on page 461).

• “Rendering parameters”: allows you to set the parameters for rendering (see details onpage 465).

In rendering mode, the central graphic workspace will show the interactive preview of thescene. You will appreciate the effect of a lighting or the way a material interacts on itsenvironment while setting it up. A series of icons allows you to launch a preview or a rendering before saving an image. (See“Previewing and rendering” on page 451).

To use the “Rendering” room, click on the icon: .

Reference Manual422

423 Amapi ProT M

Reference Manual424

26 Previewing and rendering

A large graphic workspace isreserved for the interactivepreview of the scene, inrendering mode. This allowsyou to appreciate the effect of alighting or of a material into itsenvironment while setting itand before saving it.

When the user launches arendering display, Amapi Procomputes and displays thescene, by using softwarealgorithms depending on

• The object’s topology asdefined in the Modeling room (See “Modeling room” on page 237).

• The material applied to each object (See “Material editor” on page 432).Amapi Pro applies a default material to the objects, if not specified.

• The current lighting (See “Lighting” on page 435).

• The viewpoint (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).

425 Amapi ProT M

26.1 The rendering commandsWhen clicking on the “Render the scene” icon, the final rendering computation islaunched, including all parameters.

This button allows you to Save the image in a file. Select the output format (PICT,BMP, PNG, JPEG, GIF or TIFF), the file name and the destination folder.

At any time, a new preview display can be launched by clicking on this icon.

26.2 Additional functionsThe user can navigate in the scene to view it from any viewpoint, by using the keyboardshortcuts (See “The keyboard navigation” on page 142).

An “Edge smoothing” slider allows you to specify the break angle between two adjacentfacets.A null value generates flat rendering, a 180° angle value smooths all edges.

This icon allows you to toggle between Perspective and Orthographic display (seedetails on page 176).

Amapi Pro allows you to work in simple-view or in multi-view mode (see details onpage 178)

The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current display mode.Click on it to display the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the iconshowing the desired display mode.(See “The display modes” on page 180).

The “Move” tool (see details on page 242) allows you to move the objects or thelight sources (see details on page 438).

The “Rotate” tool (see details on page 244) allows you to rotate the objects or thelight sources (see details on page 438).

Use the “Hide” tool to make some objects of the scene invisible and the “Show” toolto make them visible again (see details on page 184).

The “Isolate” tool allows you to work with the current selection without having thesurrounding objects displayed (see details on page 185).

Reference Manual426

27 Materials

The “Material” editor allows you to make the scene more realistic by giving a "material"appearance to the surface of objects.

A material defines the appearance of the surface with a simulated material.

A large graphic workspace is used for the interactive preview of the scene in renderingmode. This allows you to appreciate the effect of lighting or the way a material interacts onits environment while setting it up (See “Previewing and rendering” on page 425).

The editor is divided into two zones:

• “Material catalog” (see details on page 428)Amapi Pro contains a library of existing materials, arranged by theme: Wood, Stones,Metals... You can choose the one that will be the most appropriate for the currentselection. Just “Drag and Drop” a thumbnail to the graphic workspace in order to apply the desiredmaterial to the current selection.In this way, you can also save a material you have just set up so that you can use it later.

• “Material editor” (see details on page 432)The editor allows the user to change or tune a new material.

427 Amapi ProT M

27.1 Material catalogThe material catalog is the management system for materials. You will find it at the top of the Rendering room. It looks and works just like “The Catalog”file management system (see details on page 443).

Amapi Pro contains a library of existing materials (“.ash” suffix), arranged by themes:Wood, Stones, Metals... Each material-file is displayed in a thumbnail showing the materialand its name.Choose the most appropriate one.

Drag the thumbnail corresponding to the desired material toward the current object.

The inverse operation is applied in order to save a material you have set to be reused later:just click on an “empty” cell in the catalog.

You can change the file order in the catalog, regardless of their order in the directory. Yourcustom organization is then automatically saved for later.

Trash

Open a directory

Current filethumbnail.

Current directoryFavorites directoryPage scrolling

Reference Manual428

27.1.1 Open a directoryClick on the icon “Open a directory” (of the catalog) to open a dialog box in whichyou can select the directory you need. Amapi Pro displays the contents of the

directory in the catalog. It becomes the current directory, and its path is displayed near theicon. Each material-file is displayed by a thumbnail showing the material and its name.

27.1.2 Browsing the pages of the catalogThe display of the thumbnails as well as files is done page perpage. Scrolling through the pages replaces the thumbnails of

the current page by the thumbnails of the next or the previous page. To change the page:

1) Use the “Page up”, “Page down” keys of the keyboard.

2) Enter a page number: a counter shows the current page number. Click on it to enter thepage number to be displayed. Press “Enter” to validate and view this page.

3) Use the page scrolling buttons: click on the right arrow to increment the page number.Click on the left arrow to decrement.

27.1.3 Deleting a file from the catalog Use the “Trash” icon to delete files from the catalog. Use the "Drag and Drop"method to delete:

1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be deleted.

2) Move the thumbnail onto the “Trash” icon .Release the mouse button.The location of the thumbnail is now empty.

You can also open a favorites directory (See “Managing the favorites directory” on page 431).

This operation erases the file on the hard disk, it cannot be undone.

429 Amapi ProT M

27.1.4 Applying a materialYou probably found the material you need while browsing through the catalog. Drag thethumbnail corresponding to the desired material onto the current object.

27.1.5 Saving a new material in the catalogYou can save a material you have just set in the current directory, to use later.Proceed as follows:

1) The current object must have the material on it to be saved applied on itself (See “Theconcept of selection” on page 147).

2) Scroll around the catalog’s pages to find an “empty” cell (See “Browsing the pages ofthe catalog” on page 429).

3) Click on the empty cell.

4) Amapi Pro records the material in the directory corresponding to the catalog. Athumbnail showing the material appears in the cell: it also becomes the current material.

27.1.6 Organizing the catalogThe file organization in the catalog is saved regardless of the way it is organized in thesystem directory. A custom organization will be automatically saved in the directory as a listnamed “catalog.lst”. To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:

1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be moved.

2) Move the cursor toward an empty cell, or scroll the catalog’s pages until you find anempty cell (See “Browsing the pages of the catalog” on page 429).

3) Release the mouse button.

There is no reason to record a material in the catalog if you don’t plan on using it later.

If by mistake the “catalog.lst” file has been deleted; it will be automatically rebuilt, but thecustomized filing will be lost.

The former versions of Amapi Pro, saved this list in a file named “CAT.LIST”; if it exists, it will notbe deleted but not updated either. Only “catalog.lst”will be updated.

Reference Manual430

27.1.7 Managing the favorites directory Some slots are available to store the path of favoritesdirectory. Each location is pointed at by an icon

showing if the space is free or not. These icons can be used to save the favorites directory.Each icon can have two states:

Free location

Filled location

When the cursor is slid onto one of these icons, a tooltip indicates the correspondingfavorites directory.

Adding a favoriteIt is possible to record the current directory as a favorite. Open the directory to save it as favorite (See “Open a directory” on page 429) then click onone of the free icons ( ). It will then be displayed as a filled space ( ).

Opening a favoriteA tooltip will indicate the corresponding favorites directory when sliding the cursor over theicon. Open the directory with a simple click on the corresponding icon. Amapi Pro willdisplay the directory content in the catalog.

Deleting a favoriteTo delete a favorite from the list, you will use the "Drag and Drop" method:

1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the favorite to be deleted .

2) Move the thumbnail toward the “Trash” .

3) Release the mouse button.The location is now free .

431 Amapi ProT M

27.2 Material editorA material is defined by a specific set of parameters including:the ambient color, the diffuse color, the shininess, thetransparency, the reflection and the refraction. The material editorallows you to set the different parameters defining the materialthat you will use to edit the current material object.

27.2.1 The editable material

27.2.1.1 Selected object / editable materialThe material editor is used to edit the current material-object.A thumbnail displays the selected object, followed by the nameof the object.The material applied to the object is the editable material. Itsname is displayed in an editable area.The material editor proposes refining the current materialparameters.

To edit a material, the user must select an object on which thematerial to edit is applied.

The object selection is done by clicking in the graphic workspaceor by selecting an object’s name in the objects list.

27.2.1.2 Creating a new materialThe “New” button creates a new material, which is a copy of thecurrent material. This new material becomes the editable material.

27.2.1.3 Delete a materialThe “Delete” button deletes the current material. Amapi Pro will assign a default material tothe current object. This new material becomes the editable material.

Reference Manual432

27.2.2 Editing

27.2.2.1 Ambient colorThe ambient color is the color of the object in the darkness (in complete darkness, only theambient light is used. If the ambient parameter is set to none, the object is not visible). Thesetting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or using the slider or in theeditable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).

27.2.2.2 Diffuse colorThe diffuse color is the color that the object reflects when lit by direct light (daylight orartificial light). This color is mixed with the ambient color. The setting can be made eitherby clicking on the sampling circle, or by using the slider in the dialog box (See“Preferences” on page 451).

27.2.2.3 ShininessThe shininess is the capacity of an object to reflect the light. The shininess is defined by thecolor, the intensity and the size of the halo of the reflected light.For instance, a polished surface has a small and intense reflection, even though a mattesurface has a large and weak reflection.

The Specular (Intensity and Color)The specular sets the color and the intensity of the reflection of an object. The setting can bemade either by clicking on the sampling circle, or by using the slider or in the editable area(See “Preferences” on page 451).

The Spread (Shininess)The spread sets the size of the reflection. The setting can be made by using the slider or inthe editable area.

The Falloff (Eccentricity)The falloff defines how the reflection is diffused along the surface of the object. The settingcan be made by using the slider or in the editable area.

433 Amapi ProT M

The FilterThe filter controls the influence of the color of the lighting on the color of the reflection(tuned by the specular). If the filter is set to the minimum, the reflective color is the same asthe light color. Conversely, if the filter is set to the maximum the lighting has no influence(the reflection has the color defined by the specular).The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area.

27.2.2.4 ReflectionThe surfaces can reflect surrounding colors. The reflection defines the ratio between thereflected lighting and the incident lighting (when lighting a surface). The setting can bemade by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).

27.2.2.5 TransparencyTransparency is the ability of a material to let light shine through it. The more transparent asurface is, the more the light that shines through it. A black color indicates that a material isnot transparent, while a white color indicates that a material is completely transparent. The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” onpage 451).

27.2.2.6 RefractionThe propagation of a light beam through a translucent or transparent material is determinedby refraction. Light beams will be sent to a greater or lesser extent depending on the materialthey go through, as each material has a different refractive index.The setting can be made by using the slider or in the editable area (See “Preferences” onpage 451).Note that these settings take effect only if the material contains transparency settings.

27.2.2.7 DensityThis parameter sets the number and the size of the patterns of a textured material.For instance: as you increase the size parameter of a tiling texture applied to the floor of aroom, you will see the size of the tiles decrease and their number increase. The setting canbe made by using the slider or in the editable area.

It is time-consuming to compute reflections because ray-tracing is used in thecomputation.

It is time-consuming to compute refractions because ray-tracing is used in thecomputation.

Reference Manual434

28 Lighting

Lighting is the propagation of rays of light originating from anatural or artificial light source. There are three types of lightsources: “Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot”. Light source tools aregrouped in the Rendering editor room.

The preview window allows you to see a real-time preview ofyour settings. The “Move” and “Rotate” tools allow you to set the positionof each light source. (See “Previewing and rendering” on page 425).

435 Amapi ProT M

28.1 The different light sources

28.1.1 Sun The sun produces a light diffused uniformly onto the entire scene. You can define its color and have it produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set alight source” on page 437).

28.1.2 BulbThe bulb is a directional light. You can specify its orientation, the area where you want adim light or the color of the diffused light. You can have the light produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set a light source” onpage 437).

28.1.3 SpotThe spot is a specific source of lighting which sends a direct light beam. You can specify thebeam direction, light cut-off and fall-off, the area where you want a dim light, and its color. You can have the light produce a solid drop shadow if you wish (See “Set a light source” onpage 437).

28.2 Create a light sourceTo create a light source, do the following:

1) Click on the button corresponding to the desired type of light (“Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot”).

2) The light source follows the cursor movement. Move it toward the graphic workspace.

3) Set the light position in the desired place in the scene. Amapi Pro gives it a name. Itbecomes the current light.Now, you can set the different settings (See “Set a light source” on page 437).

Reference Manual436

28.3 Select a light sourceTo select a light source, do the following:• click on it in the graphic workspace• select its name in the list of lights.Amapi Pro displays the selected light source in a text area.

28.4 Set a light sourceDepending on the light source you choose, you can perform several settings:

The light source to be set must be the current light source (See “Select a light source” onpage 437).

28.4.1 Diffuse colorThe setting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or using the slider and/oran editable area (See “Preferences” on page 451).

28.4.2 ShadowYou can determine whether or not the light produces a solid drop shadow on the lit objects.

“Sun” “Bulb” “Spot”

Diffuse color x x x

Shadow x x x

beam radius x

attenuation x x

Repositioning x x x

orientation x x

437 Amapi ProT M

28.4.3 Cut-offThe “Spot” cut-off controls the angle of the light beam.The setting can be made by using the slider and/or an editable area.

28.4.4 Attenuation (dimming)The attenuation defines the light reduction of propagation area for a “Bulb” or a “Spot”.This distance can be set by using the slider and/or an editable area.

28.4.5 RepositioningThe “Move” tool, located at the bottom of the graphic workspace, allows you toreposition the light source.

28.4.6 OrientationThe “Stretch” tool, located at the bottom of the graphic workspace, allows you tochange the “Sun”, “Bulb” or “Spot” orientation.

28.5 Delete a light sourceTo delete a light source, do the following:

1) Select the light source to be deleted (See “Select a light source” on page 437).

2) Click on the “Delete” button.

Reference Manual438

29 Rendering parameters

The user can set some parameters for the final rendering:

29.1 Anti-aliasingThis function to keep the object's colored outlines from being“jagged”Select the Anti-aliasing level (between 0 and 3).Use of Anti-aliasing will increase the rendering time.

29.2 ShadowsCheck this box to compute and the display the shadows (See“Shadow” on page 437).

29.3 Background

Background colorThe background color setting can be made either by clicking in the sampling circle, or byusing the slider and/or an editable area (See their using mode on page 451).

439 Amapi ProT M

Background imageCheck the “Background image” box if you want to display a background image in therendered image. Clicking on the “Browse” button will open the dialog box where you canselect the desired background image.Invisible in the modeling room, this image is displayed together with the final rendering.

29.4 Environment Check this box if you want to add an environment image to be reflected on an object in thescene.Clicking on the “Browse” button will open the dialog box where you can select the desiredbackground image.Invisible in the modeling room, this image is displayed with the final rendering.

29.5 Fog A slider allows you to set a coefficient which will define the density of the fog.

29.6 Image formatAllows you to set the image size in pixels.

Reference Manual440

Catalog room

30 The Catalog

The catalog is the Amapi Pro’s file manager.Using a graphical representation, it quickly and easily allows the user to store and

retrieve Amapi Pro documents like in a library.

Each file can be previewed thanks to its associated thumbnail image which shows the modeland its name. A model in the catalog can be loaded in the current scene by pointing out itsthumbnail image. Conversely, you will be able to save the current scene in the catalog.

The file organization in the catalog is saved independently of the way it is organized in thesystem directory. Files can thus be organized in a logical manner and automatically keeptheir layout.

The catalog allows import/export operations.The catalog makes it possible to manage all Amapi Pro format files with the.a3p suffix. Italso makes it possible to visualize and open Amapi Designer a3d format files. However, thefiles will be always saved with the Amapi Pro format. To export to the Amapi Designer for-mat, it will be necessary to use the export menu.

In most cases, using the catalog is more efficient than using the system file manager.

The catalog will be opened by clicking on this icon at the top right corner of the screen.

443 Amapi ProT M

30.1 Open a directorySelect a directory to use it as the current directory. Amapi Pro will display thedesired directory content in the catalog. The path is displayed near the icon.

A preview of each Amapi Pro file is displayed in the Thumbnails.

30.2 Browsing the pages of the catalogThe display of the thumbnails associated with the files isdone page per page. Doing a page scrolling replaces the

thumbnails of the current page by the thumbnails of the next or the previous page. To changethe page:

1) Use the “Page up”, “Page down” keys of the keyboard.

A directory can also be opened from the favorites directory (See “Managing the favoritesdirectory” on page 447).

Trash

Open a directory

Rebuild the catalog

Import

Export

Currentfile

thumbnail

Current fileinformation

in thedirectory

Current directoryfavorites directory

Pagesscrolling

Reference Manual444

2) Enter a page number: a counter shows the current page number. Click on it to enter thepage number to be displayed. Press Enter to validate and see this page.

3) Use the page scrolling buttons: Click on the right arrow to increment the page number.Click on the left arrow to decrement.

30.3 Edit the information of a fileEach thumbnail image is associated with the file’s name. If you click on one of them, theassociated file becomes the current file. Then Amapi Pro displays its name, its size, itscreation date and an associated comment in an editable palette (See “Editing the parameters”on page 162).The modification of one of these parameters causes the automatic saving of the file.

30.4 Deleting a file from the catalogUse the “Trash” icon to delete files from the catalog. The deletion will be doneusing the "Drag and Drop" method;

1) Click and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be deleted.

2) Move the cursor toward the “Trash” icon .

3) Release the mouse button.The location is now empty.

30.5 Deleting the entire sceneTo delete the entire current scene, click on the Trash icon of the catalog. Everythingis deleted, even the hidden objects!

This operation erases the file on the hard disk, it cannot be cancelled.

This action can be undone, by Crtl-Z or clicking on the icon.

By deleting the scene, all the objects of the scene will be deleted, even hidden objects. (See “Hide, Show” on page 184)

445 Amapi ProT M

30.6 Importing a file from the catalog into the scene

To import a file into the current scene, use the "Drag and Drop" method:

1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the scene to be imported.

2) Move the cursor toward the graphic workspace

3) Release the mouse button.The scene appears in the graphic workspace

30.7 Saving the scene in the catalogSaving the current scene in the catalog consists of saving it in the current directory in theAmapi Pro format. Do the following:

1) Scroll the catalog’s pages to find an “empty” cell. (See “Browsing the pages of thecatalog” on page 444).

2) Click on the empty cell.

3) Amapi Pro records the file in the directory corresponding to the catalog. A thumbnailshowing the scene appears in the cell; it becomes the current file. Modify its information,such as its name (See “Edit the information of a file” on page 445).

30.8 Organizing the catalogThe file organization in the catalog is saved independently of the way it is organized in thesystem directory. A personal organization will be automatically saved in the directory as alist named “catalog.lst”. To do this, use the "Drag and Drop" method:

1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the file to be moved.

2) Move the cursor toward an empty cell.Or scroll the catalog’s pages until finding an empty cell (See “Browsing the pages of thecatalog” on page 444).

3) Release the mouse button.

The imported scene is merged with the current scene. That is to say that all the objects of theimported scene are added to the current scene. The imported objects are displayed at the exactlocation they were in the original file.

Reference Manual446

30.9 Managing the favorites directoryTen slots are available to store the path of favoritesdirectory. Each location is showed by an icon

showing if the location is free or not. These icons can be used to save the favorites directory.Each icon can have two states:

Free location

Filled location

When the cursor is over one of this icon, a tooltip will indicate the corresponding favoritesdirectory.

Adding a favoriteIt is possible to record the current directory as a favorite. Open the directory to save it as favorite (See “Open a directory” on page 444) then click onone of the free icons ( ). It will be displayed as a filled location ( ).

Opening a favoriteA tooltip will indicate the corresponding favorites directory when putting the cursor over theicon. Open the directory with a simple click on the corresponding icon. Amapi Pro willdisplay the directory content in the catalog.

Deleting a favoriteTo delete a favorite from the list, you will use the "Drag and Drop" method;

1) Click on and hold the thumbnail corresponding to the favorite to be deleted .

2) Move the cursor toward the “Trash” icon .

If by mistake the “catalog.lst” file have been deleted; it will be automatically rebuilt, but thepersonalized filing will be lost.

The former versions of Amapi Pro, saved this list in a file named “CAT.LIST”; if it exists, it will notbe deleted but not updated. Only “catalog.lst”will be updated.

447 Amapi ProT M

3) Release the mouse button.The location is free .

30.10 Rebuilding the catalogThe catalog displays a thumbnail associated with each file of the directory. Thisthumbnail is a preview of a scene screenshot which helps you to identify the file. It

is automatically created for each file saving through the catalog with the same name, butwith a “.png” suffix.If some preview files are missing, click on the rebuild catalog icon to rebuild all the missingthumbnails.

30.11 ImportAn Import icon is available when the catalog is open. It is similar to the File Importmenu. (See “Import” on page 229).

30.12 ExportAn Export icon is available when the catalog is open. It is similar to the File Exportmenu (See “Export” on page 231).

On PC, the versions older than Amapi Pro v7 saved the thumbnails in a file with a “.2d” suffix;these files will not be deleted, but they will not be updated. Only, the “.png” files will be updated.On Mac, the versions older than Amapi Pro v7 saved these thumbnails in a resource of the.a3dfile. Because the more recent Amapi Pro versions are creating “.png” thumbnails, it would bebetter to perform a catalog reconstruction at the first opening of each directory.

The catalog reconstruction updates the corresponding “catalog.lst” file which manages thepersonalized organization of the catalog.For more details, see paragraph “Organizing the catalog” (see details on page 446).

Reference Manual448

Preferences

31 Preferences

31.1 Preferences editorThe preferences editor allows you to customize the interface, the display modes, or someapplication behaviors, depending on your needs or preferences.The “Alt-P” shortcut opens the editor.

The preferences can be displayed as follows:

• Check boxes:Enabled optionDisabled option

• Sliders:The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the datawindow on the right-hand side of the slider.

• Color sampling circle:

Click on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

• Editable data window:Allows you to enter the required information (text or numbers).

Amapi Pro allows you to automatically save or not the preferences.’“Preferences editor”> “User interface”> “Miscellaneous”> “Automatic saving of preferences” (seedetails on page 456).

451 Amapi ProT M

31.1.1 User interface

Generic

Interface themesAmapi Pro offers several interface themes corresponding to various users’ profiles. The userwill test them and select one which will work best for him.• Pro (default)• Default• Gradient • Immersive• Classic with tools palettes

Each theme has its own preference presets which will replace the current values. Afterchanging theme, it will always be possible to manually set all the preferences through thepreferences editor.

Pro interface theme Classic interface theme

Gradient interface theme Immersive interface theme

Reference Manual452

See the “Ergonomics” (see details on page 13) paragraph to learn more about each of theseinterfaces.

Full screenFull screen display (default): Amapi Pro is displayed on the full screen. The system barmenus are hidden.Window display

LanguageAmapi Pro is able to communicate in several languages. During its first use, it asks the userto set the language he or she prefers using. However, it will be possible to change it, byusing the preference editor. The following languages are available:• English (default)• French• German

Views / Multi-views The Control panel displays the icon corresponding to the current option. Click on it todisplay the list of the possible configurations. Then, click on the icon showing thedesired configuration.

(See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178).

Classic with tools palettes interface theme

453 Amapi ProT M

Gradient backgroundGradient enabled: the background colors in the interface windows are gradient.Gradient disabled (default): the background colors in the interface windows are flat.

Polygonal/NURBS toggling (default nurbs mode)Default NURBS mode:

Enabled (default): Amapi Pro creates NURBS objects by default.Disabled : Amapi Pro creates Polyhedral objects by default.

The construction mode must be defined as the curves, surfaces or volumes drawingbegins. Amapi Pro has a global default working mode. The construction mode can be changed while using a tool (local changing mode).

• The local toggle will be made by clicking on the toggle-icon that is displayed as anoption by the tools that allow the two construction modes.

• The global toggle will be made in the preferences editor “Polygonal/NURBS toggling(default nurbs mode)”. The Crtl-B keyboard shortcut can be used too.A global toggling while using a tool also makes a local toggling mode.

Palettes display

Buttons to represent the palettes Enabled: Amapi Pro displays buttons showing the palettes.Disabled: Amapi Pro does not display buttons representing the palettes.

The “Tools palette” (see details on page 456) interface is especially adapted to 3D modelingsince it simulates the natural movement of the designer in front of his table or the modelmaker in front of his workbench. Amapi Pro will display only one tools palette at a time, placing at your disposal only thatgroup of tools which are useful. The “basic toolkit” is be permanently displayed.You have two methods to switch from one tools palette to the other:• by simply “sweeping” the cursor from the right hand side of the screen out of the graphic

window and then by bringing it back towards the center of the screen.• by clicking on one of the number sequences of the tools palette (if you chose to display

buttons representing the tools palettes).

“Construction Palette”

“Modeling palette”

“Assembly palette”

Reference Manual454

Optional palettes display support areaThe optional palettes display support area can be hidden to make them floating. “Manage the optional palettes display” (see details on page 168).

Information panel enabled (default): displays optional palettes.Information panel disabled: optional palettes are floating.

Control panel displayThe Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. It gives access to a variety ofmodeling aids for a better use of Amapi Pro (See “The Control panel” on page 167). Some of them can be accessible from keyboard shortcuts. The Control panel can be hidden to make more room for the graphic workspace.

Show the Control panel (default).Hide the Control panel

Tools options and accessories display support areaAmapi Pro displays the tools options and accessories into a reserved area located above thegraphic workspace (See “The tools options and accessories” on page 83). But they can be displayed as a floating palette to make more room for the graphicworkspace.

Enables the options and accessories area (default). Floating options and accessories palettes.

Sub-tools floating palette displaySeveral tools display a sub-tools palette such as “Surface and volume primitives” (see detailson page 258) and “Line drawing”(see details on page 277).Amapi Pro gives the choice between two display modes:

Sub-tools floating palettes display (default). The Sub-tools palettes are displayed in the tools palettes area.

455 Amapi ProT M

ToolboxThe tools proposed in the modeling room have been split intothree tools palettes (see details on page 237) :• The Construction palette• The Modeling palette• The Assembly paletteWith each one of these principal tools palettes, a “BasicToolKit” is added and is always available.

Amapi Pro proposes several possible interfaces with regardsto accessing the modeling tools:

“Toolbox” Interface (default). “Tools palette” Interface.

Read the “Two interfaces” (see details on page 79) paragraphto learn more information about each interface.

Tooltips displayEnables the tooltips display (default).Disables the tooltips display.

Miscellaneous

Right-handed palettes displayAmapi Pro displays the tools palettes (See “The Tools palettes” on page 78) at the right-handside of the screen. Some people, such as the left-handed persons, might choose to display thetools palettes on the left-hand side of the screen.

Displays the tools palettes on the right-hand side of the screen (default). Displays the tools palettes on the left-hand side of the screen.

Maximum undo levelsSets the successive maximum undo levels (Ctrl-Z).

Automatic saving of preferencesAutomatic saving of preferences enabled (default)Automatic saving of preferences disabled

“Tools palette”Interface

“Toolbox”Interface

Reference Manual456

View Informations displayIt is possible to decide whether or not to display information in the upper left-hand corner ofeach view (See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178)

Display the point of view name (default).Do not display the point of view name.

Display the number of frames per secondDisplay the number of frames per second (default).Do not display the number of frames per second.

Display the file nameYou are allowed to display or to not display the file name in the upper top left corner of thecurrent view (See “Simple-view / Multi-view” on page 178).

Display the file name (default).Do not display the file name.

Grey inactive tools iconsGrey inactive tools icons (default).Do not grey inactive tools icons.

Display timeDisplay time (default).Do not display time.

Display the 3D view borderDisplay a line around the graphic window (default).The graphic window is not marked.

Magnetism effectMagnetized dialog boxes (default).Not magnetized dialog boxes.

Display the Assistant paletteDisplay the assistant palette (default).Do not display the assistant palette.

(See “The assistant palette” on page 206)

457 Amapi ProT M

ColorsThe majority of the user interface colors can be modified. Click on the sample of color circleto display the colors palette. The default colors depend on the selected theme.

Editor’s colorsYou will be able to personalize the colors of the editor's windows such as the preferenceseditor, the shortcuts editor...

Colors of the palettesYou will be able to personalize the colors of the floating palettes, the tool options palettesand the windows of the software messages.

Reference Manual458

31.1.2 Graphic environmentThe user will work in the orthonormal base visualized as three gradated axis.

The working plane, on which the modeling will be done, is defined by the two axis mostparallel to the current view plane. To create points in 3D the user will be allowed to use a 2D mouse (or equivalent) only. He orshe will have to change the viewpoint to change the working plane (See “The Navigation”on page 135).The orthogonal planes visualization will help for the orientation in the 3D graphicworkspace.(See “The graphic environment” on page 87).

Orthogonal planesSome preferences allow you to customize the display.

Display the floorEnabled (default).Disabled.

Checker planeEnabled the plane is checkered (default).Disabled.

Translucent Checker planeEnabled the checkers on the plane are translucent (default).Disabled.

Antialias on grid textureEnabled (default).Disabled.

Grid sizeThe dimensions of the plane(s) can be customized. The setting can be made by moving theslider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

459 Amapi ProT M

Number of columns of the gridThe number of columns can be customized. The setting can be made by moving the slider’scursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Number of rows of the gridThe number of rows can be customized. The setting can be made by moving the slider’scursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand side of the slider.

Display the tree gridsEnabled.Disabled (default).

Display image on XY planeEnabled.Disabled (default).

Image on XY planeSelect the image to display.

Display image on XZ planeEnabled.Disabled (default).

Image on XZ planeSelect the image to display.

Display image on YZ planeEnabled.Disabled (default).

Image on YZ planeSelect the image to display.

Grid colorClick on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

Reference Manual460

Center of grid axis colorClick on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

Orthogonal planes colorClick on the color sampling circle to display the color setting palette.

Rulers

Quarter axis (half-axis)Amapi Pro suggests two possible representations of the rulers.

Half-axis enabled: only the half portion of the axis that is in use is displayed. Half-axis disabled: the entire axis is displayed (default).

Quarter axis gradationAmapi Pro offers two possible representations of the rulers.

Gradation limited to the half part of the axis that is in use (default).Gradation on the entire axis length.

Local gradationAmapi Pro propose two types of gradation for the rulers.

Gradation activated locally.Gradation disactivated locally (default)

Coordinates displayAmapi Pro asks if you would like to display the cursor coordinates along the rulers.

Display the cursor coordinates.Do not display the cursor coordinates (default).

Display 2D axis (2D Trihedron)The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base that facilitates the orien-tation in the graphic workspace.

Display the trihedron in the bottom left hand corner (default).Do not display the trihedron.

Display 3D axis (3D Trihedron)The trihedron is a miniature representation of the orthonormal base that facilitates the orien-tation in the graphic workspace.

461 Amapi ProT M

Display the trihedron in the center of the graphic workspace (0,0,0) (default).Do not display the trihedron.

Axis (Trihedron) sizeThe setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the datawindow on the right-hand side of the slider.

Origin of the rulerThe origin of the ruler default position is the center of the grid and called “the ground”. Itcan be changed at any time during the modeling process.It can be set by using the tool “Orthonormal base origin” (see details on page 173)located in the Control panel.

Alignment guidesThe “Alignment guides” tool allows you to temporarily constrain the cursor movement dur-ing the construction of 3D points (See “Alignment guides” on page 196).

“Alignment guides”

“Alignment guides” Disabled

“Alignment guides” Enabled

Alignment anglesAllows you to assign particular values to the angles the alignments guides will be displayedat. Attention, when modified, this modifies the values of the eight following angles.

Angles 1 to 8Values of the angles that the alignment guides will be displayed at. These values can be setmanually. Attention, the use of the "Alignment Angles" field redefines these angles auto-matically.

Reference Manual462

Cursor

SnappingThis option allows you to specify whether the cursor should be snapped on the virtual griddefined by the orthonormal base gradations.

A cursor that is not magnetized moves freely in the scene.

A magnetized cursor is snapped to the intersection points of the grid.

See “Snapping” (see details on page 174) for more information.

Cursor-parameter displayIf enabled, the parameters follow the cursor movement and are very easy to view. But,unlike the parameter palette, the cursor-parameter doesn’t allow editing (See “To check theparameters” on page 161).

Enables the cursor-parameter display (default). Disables the cursor-parameter display.

Navigation Animation(See “The Navigation” on page 135)

Animated direct viewpoint changingAmapi Pro offers to animate the direct viewpoint changing to help the user determine thebest orientation.

Camera animation enabled (default)The camera animation speed can be set.

Camera animation disabled

(See “Make a direct viewpoint change” on page 142).

Animated direct viewpoint changing speed settingThis option allows you to set the speed of the direct viewpoint changing animation. Themaximum camera animation time can be set. Amapi Pro will interpolate the number ofimages needed for the allowed time.

463 Amapi ProT M

Mouse rotation navigation speed step settingThis option allows you to set the observer’s eye rotation step around the scene, while usingthe mouse (See “Rotate around the scene” on page 141).

Mouse panoramic navigation speed step settingThis option allows you to set the observer’s eye panoramic movement from the scene, whileusing the mouse (See “Pan the scene” on page 141).

The animation follows the cursor directionAbout “Rotate around the scene” (see details on page 141), gives you two possibilities:

The animation follows the cursor direction (default).The animation follows the cursor opposite direction.

MicroScribe

AutoPlotAllows you to continuously digitize by moving the point of the digitizer on the surface. Inthis mode, when the stylus has covered the distance defined by the Distance AutoPlotparameter, a point is automatically created.

Autoplot DistanceDefines the distance between two points created in AutoPlot mode.

ScaleScale factor applied to all the points drawn by the Microscribe.

Reference Manual464

31.1.3 Scene displayAmapi Pro has many options to help display the scene in a manner best suited to the user’srequirements and/or facilitating operation. The user can personalize the display of eachelement of the scene as well as the selection in progress. However, some types of displayneed a fairly long display time. That is why Amapi Pro offers several display optimizationfunctions.

Entities displayDifferent entities are handled while modeling: points, edges, facets or objects (See “Entity”on page 94).Amapi Pro offers several display options that allow you to highlight one or another kind ofentity. Depending on the manipulation to be made, select the display mode that best highlights theentities you're working on. It can be changed at any time during the modeling. Most of themare accessible through the Control panel (see details on page 167).

Give a different color to each objectThis option allows you to give colors to objects that are not selected:

Give a different color to each new object: enabled (default).The color of each new object is picked in a predefined color table.Give a different color to each new object: disabled.All the objects have the same color (See “Edges color” on page 467).

Default colorThis preference will enable you to personalize the color of the objects. It will be taken intoaccount if you chose not to give a different color to each object (see above).

Objects display mode (Real time rendering mode)Amapi Pro offers several display modes to best highlight the entities you're working on.

The “Wireframe” mode displays only the edges of the objects. Because this modedoesn’t display facets, it has the advantage to show the entire object without havingto navigate the scene. It is possible to select the elements which would be hidden ina non-wireframe mode.

The “Lit Wireframe” mode adds a light effect to the “Wireframe” mode.

465 Amapi ProT M

The “Flat Solid” mode gives a more realistic appearance to the objects bydisplaying their facets. The “Flat Solid and edges” mode adds the edges display to the “Flat Solid” mode.

The “Smoothed Solid” mode corresponds to the “Flat Solid” mode on which asmoothing has been applied. This is the most realistic mode.

The “Smoothed Solid and edges” mode adds the edges display to the “SmoothedSolid” mode.

These options can also be accessible through the Control panel (See “The display modes” onpage 180).

Selection transparency levelTransparency allows you to select the elements which would not be visible (and notselectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display mode (Real time renderingmode)” on page 465). This option will be effective in the following situations:• The “Transparency effect” (see details on page 470) option is enabled.• The selectable entity is an edge or point (See “The selectable entities” on

page 149).The “Selection transparency level” option allows you to tune the transparency level.The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the datawindow on the right-hand side of the slider.

Simplified displayThis option allows you to limit the display simplification of the objects.

Do not simplify the scene display.

Simplify the display of the objects not selected.

Simplify the display of the selected objects.

Simplify the display of all the objects of the scene.

(See “Simplified display” on page 177).

PerspectiveThis option allows you to toggle on one of the two display modes of the scene:

Reference Manual466

The Conical Perspective (default)

The Orthographic view to see the scene without perspective. In some cases, this display mode can provide a clearer visualization of the scene or

facilitate some manipulations.This option is also be accessible through the Control panel (See “Perspective” on page 176).

Edges colorThis preference allows you to set the color of the edges.

Points colorThis preference allows you to set the color of the points.

Point sizesThis preference allows you to set the size of a point.

Size of the centers of the objectsThe user can specify the size of the mark showing the center of the objects.

Current selection displayThe current selection consists of marking a set of items before applying an action on them(See “The concept of selection” on page 147).Amapi Pro allows you to display the scene. This option is to help meet the user’srequirements and/or facilitate the operation.

Color of selected objectsThis preference allows you to display the current object(s) with a fixed color to distinguishthem between the objects that are not selected.

Display the current object with another color: enabled (default)Display the current object with another color: disabled

Color of the selected objectThis preference allows you to customize the color of the selected objects.

467 Amapi ProT M

Edge colors of the selected BREPBREPs have two types of edges: • edges and cuttings representing selectable edges • the isoparametric curves which are for visual help only These two types of edges are displayed with different colors on selected objects.

Edge and face colors of the selected BREPIn faces selection mode, BREPs faces can be selected individually. It is possible to set thecolors for the edges and for the isoparametric curves of the selected faces.

Display the bounding boxThe bounding box is the smallest way in which to contain an object or a group of objects. Itappears when the object is selected.

Display the bounding box: enabledDisplay the bounding box: disabled (default)

Center displayThe user can choose to display or not the geometrical center of a selected object.

Enable the display of the center Disable the display of the center (default)

editable edges isoparametric curves

Reference Manual468

Display the edgesDisplay the edges: enabled (default)Display the edges: disabled

Display the pointsThe user can choose to display or not the points of the selected object(s).

Display the points: enabledDisplay the points: disabled (default)

Point sizesThe user can personalize the size of the representation of the points of selected objects.

Color of the bounding box (control shape)The bounding box is the smallest way in which to contain an object or a group of objects. Itsurrounds the selected object(s) (see details on page 482). Its color can be customized.

Color of the selected but not editable entitiesThis preference allows you to customize the color of the selected but not editable entity(facet, edge or point).

Color of the selected editable entities This preference allows you to customize the color of the selected editable entity (facet, edgeor point).

Entity highlight display (facet, edge or point)

Entity highlighted when flying over itAmapi Pro offers to highlight an entity when the cursor flies over it.

Highlights an entity when the cursor moves over it: enabled (default)Highlights an entity when the cursor moves over it: disabled

Entity color highlightThis preference allows you to customize the color of the highlighted entity not yet selected.

Amapi Pro will not use this option if the current display mode shows the edges (See“Objects display mode (Real time rendering mode)” on page 465).

469 Amapi ProT M

Latency of the highlighting of the detected entities• Object latency highlighting • Facet latency highlighting• Edge latency highlighting• Point latency highlighting

Edge colors of the detected BREPThe BREPs have two types of edges: • edges and cuttings which represent selectable edges• isoparametric curves for visual help onlyThese two types of edges are displayed in different colors on the detected objects.

Edge and face colors of the detected BREPIn faces selection mode, BREPs faces can be selected individually. It is possible to set thecolors for the edges and the isoparametric curves of the detected faces.

Color of the highlighted and already selected entityThis preference allows you to customize the color of the highlighted and currently selectedentity.

Display editing

Color of the Deformation box and of the NURBS Control boxThis option allows you to customize the color of:• “Set the mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376) • The NURBS Control box (See “The NURBS models” on page 98).

Transparency effectThis preference lets you decide whether or not to give a transparency effect to the selectedobjects. If this option is activated, it will be effective in the following situations:

• When selecting edges or pointsThe transparency allows you to select the elements which would not be visible (and notselectable) if the display was in solid mode (See “Objects display mode (Real timerendering mode)” on page 465).The selected object will be displayed with a transparency effect if:• The “Transparency effect” option is enabled (see details on page 470).

Reference Manual470

• The selectable entity is edge or point (See “The selectable entities” onpage 149).

The “Selection transparency level” option (see details on page 466) allows you to tunethe transparency level.

• When editing an object with several Dynamic Geometry levelsThe transparency allows you to display the Dynamic geometry level corresponding tothe finished object while an intermediate level is edited. This kind of display has theadvantage of making manipulation particularly efficient (See “Dynamic Geometry(DG)” on page 109). The user can set the “Transparency level when editing DG” (see details on page 471).

Display “with transparency effect” (default)

Display “without transparency effect”

This is effective when a “solid” display mode has been selected (See “Objects display mode(Real time rendering mode)” on page 465).

This option can also be accessible through the Control panel (See “Transparency of theselected object” on page 181).

Transparency level when editing DGThis preference allows you to adjust the transparency value of the Dynamic geometry levelcorresponding to the finished object while an intermediate level is edited.The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the datawindow on the right-hand side of the slider.This set up is effective only if a display mode with transparency effect has been selected.(See “Transparency effect” on page 470).

Tools feedback colorThis preference allows you to customize the feedback color of several tools.

Advanced display optionsWhen displaying complex scenes, the display time or the density of some objects canobstruct the manipulation. To fix this, use the following options:

Fast transparencyFast transparency: enabled.

471 Amapi ProT M

Fast transparency: disabled (default)

Buffer regionBuffer region:Amapi Pro uses the previous object’s display computation to speed up the display in real-time.Do not use the previous display (default)

Advanced occlusion cullingOcclusion culling enabled:Amapi Pro uses the 3D graphic board occlusion culling system which avoids displayingthe objects not in the field of view (See “Viewpoint” on page 137).Occlusion culling disabled (default)

Clipping objects

Fast edgesLine display method which improves display times (depending on the type of graphics card)

Active.Disable (default).

Refresh method• Refresh method extended to all views (default).• Refresh method limited to the current view.Amapi Pro uses this option when the Muti-view mode is selected (See “Simple-view /Multi-view” on page 178).

Regular OpenGL mode displayRegular OpenGL mode display enabled (default).Regular OpenGL mode display disabled.Some OpenGL extensions can cause display problems with some graphic boards. Thismode does not use such extensions.

Hidden linesHidden lines enabled (default): uses a special filling mode based on a “stipple pattern”. It

can simulate the transparency on some graphic boards.Hidden lines disabled.

Reference Manual472

Background imageEnabled.Disabled (default).

Background image fileThe user can indicate a file to be used as the background image of the scene.

Anti-aliasingAnti-aliasing enabled (default).Anti-aliasing disabled.

(See “Anti-aliasing” on page 481)

Clipping (Front/back cut out)Useful in the case of very small objects.

LightingThe lighting corresponds to the propagation of luminous rays. It is directly related to theeffect obtained when rendering. By selecting the actual lighting, several parameters can becustomized.

Actual lightingActual lighting enabled (default)If so, the following parameters can be customized.Actual lighting disabled.

Use a global specular on objectsEnabled (default)Disabled.

Specular power (spread) (actual lighting)The spread sets the size of the reflection.

Global lightThe default values of the two global lights can be configured by adjusting their associatedcolors.

473 Amapi ProT M

31.1.4 Printing preferences

Drawing options• Draw all lines• Draw hidden lines• Draw hidden lines «fast»

ScaleThis parameter is a scale factor, it allows you to control the printing size.The values must be within: ]0,1000].

Points per inchThis parameter controls the printing quality.The values must be within: [150,3000].

Print measures Print measuresDo not print measures

31.1.5 Import / ExportThe preferences editor allows you to customize the import/export files. See paragraph“Import / Export” (see details on page 229) to find the list of the imported or exportedformats.

31.1.6 Units

Relative coordinates By default, Amapi Pro works in relative mode (see details on page 486). The modelingrequirements can force the user to work in absolute mode (see details on page 481). Totoggle from one to the other, you can check the “Relative coordinates” option.

Relative coordinates (default)Absolute coordinates

Reference Manual474

Length unitsAmapi Pro allows you to change the length unit at any time of the modeling. To do so, selectthe unit from the following list:• None• mm• cm (default)• m• inch• numeric inch

Angle unitAmapi Pro allows you to change the angle unit at any time of the modeling. To do so, selectthe unit from the following list:• Degree• Radian

PrecisionAmapi Pro allows you to control the units precision. To do so, specify the number of digitsafter the decimal point to be displayed.The setting can be made by moving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the datawindow on the right-hand side of the slider. The default precision is “2”.

Working scaleThis preferences editor allows you to set a working scale. The setting can be made bymoving the slider’s cursor or by entering a value in the data window on the right-hand sideof the slider.

Predefined scale factorThis preferences editor allows you to select a working scale from the proposed list.

475 Amapi ProT M

31.1.7 NURBS preferencesThe default tesselation can be configured for object creation and export. This makes it possi-ble to easily set a mode of very precise tesselation adapted to the constraints of the recipientof the exported file while conserving a rapid display with a less precise tesselation.

Tesselation

Default range of the curvesDefault tesselation range used by all the tools for NURBS curves.

Remove confusing tesselation pointsEliminates confusing points generating by tesselation. Lets you clean up the final topology.

Default tesselation modeDefault tesselation mode used during object creation and display:• Constant subdivision of the parameters (default)• Crack-free adaptative tesselation The following values are active only for the tesselation mode which uses them. (See “Tesse-late” on page 367)

Default range in U and VDefault tesselation range used by all the tools for NURBS surfaces. Only for tesselation byconstant subdivision (See “Tesselate” on page 367)

Default UV maximum angle

Default maximum chord height

Default maximum width/height ratio

Default smallest UV subdivision

Default minimal/maximal 3D edge lengthParameters of adaptive tesselation by default (See “Tesselate” on page 367).

Reference Manual476

Try to create quadranglesGenerally, the adaptive tesselation creates triangles. Sometimes it is preferable to obtainquadrangles.

Tesselation for exportingThis parameter makes it possible to select the tesselation to be used to export files in polyg-onal format:• Uses the tesselation parameters of the objects• Constant subdivision of the parameters • Crack-free adaptive tesselationIf the first value is selected, the objects will be exported with the same tesselation as thatused for display. If not, the parameters will be used as described in the preceding paragraph.

477 Amapi ProT M

31.2 Shortcuts EditorThe shortcuts editor allows you to customize the keyboard shortcuts to use the Amapi Profunctions.

How to edit a shortcut?

1) The editor left hand side lists the different tools palettes of Amapi Pro. Click on the name of the one which contains the desired tool, to edit the correspondingshortcut.

2) The editor displays the icons corresponding to the tools of the selected palette. Each ofthem is followed by an editable text area. Click in the text area corresponding to the shortcut to implement or to change.

3) Press the key (or combination of keys) that will be the new shortcut.

4) Click on the “Validation” button to validate the modifications and close the editor.

Reference Manual478

Appendix

Reference Manual480

32 Glossary

Absolute (mode) In absolute mode (in opposition to the relative mode) theposition of a point is computed by comparison with anorigin point. The default is fixed by convention at the centerof the plane (x,z).(See “Relative (mode)” on page 486)

Aliasing Undesirable visual effect (often called “jaggies”) whichappears when rendering curves at angles other than 0, 45, or90 degrees. Also visible on polygon edges, particularly withhigh contrast scenarios. See also anti-aliasing.

Ambient (Color…) Color of the object in ambient lighting (without shadows).

Anti-aliasing Filtering techniques used to reduce or eliminate aliasingeffects. See aliasing

Bitmap A bitmap image is an image which is defined by pixels (asopposed to vectors)

BREP A BREP (Boundary Representation) is an object made up ofone or more NURBS surfaces and with topological connec-tions corresponding to the edges or intersections of thesesurfaces. A BREP can be open or closed. (See “BREP: «watertight» surfaces and volumes” onpage 103)

481 Amapi ProT M

Bounding box The smallest parallelepiped which can contain an object or agroup of objects. It appears when the object is selected. Thebounding box is displayed either partially if the selection isan object or completely for a group of objects.The preference editor allows you to disable its display(“Preferences editor”> “Scene display”> “Current selectiondisplay”.

Boolean An operation based on logical algebra that can calculate theintersection of two objects, as well as their union, exclusion,and more.

Brightness Brightness is the property of an object to reflect light. Theparameters controlling brightness are: the specularity, thespread, the falloff, and the filter. Example: a polishedsurface has a narrow and intense reflection. A matte surfacedisplays a wide and faint reflection.

Camera The tool used to set the viewpoint, view direction, andorientation.

Catalog The Amapi Pro file manager (See “The Catalog” onpage 443).

Clone Clones are strictly identical objects which refer to only oneand unique geometry. A transformation done to one of themwill be automatically applied to all of its clones.(See “The clones” on page 107).

Composite (curve) A composite curve is an object made up of a series ofseveral lines with a connection at each extremity. Different from connected curves (see details on page 482).

Connected (curves) Connected curves are several curves, where each curve hasone end located at the same position in 3D space as the firstpoint of the next curve.Different from composite curves (see details on page 482).

Control shape (See “Bounding box” on page 482)

Reference Manual482

Control panel The Control panel is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Itprovides access to a variety of modeling aids for a better useof Amapi Pro. (See “The Control panel” on page 167)

Coons (surfaces…) A modeling technique based on a set of connected 3Dcurves forming the boundaries of an interpolated surface.

Coplanar Points, segments or flat surfaces located in the same plane.

Current selection “To Select” consists of marking a set of items beforeapplying an action to them (See “Entity” on page 94).All the tools have an effect on all selected elements (we callthis the “current selection”). See “Selection” (see details onpage 147).

Deformation box The objects modified with the “Deform” tool replacesDynamic Geometry by a DG level corresponding to its “Setthe mesh of the control box” (see details on page 376).

Dialog Box Window that allows the user to answer questions or selectoptions.

Diffuse (Color…) What the object reflects when lighted by direct lighting(daylight or artificial light)

Entity An entity is the element type. It can be an object, a facet, anedge or a point (See “Entity” on page 94).

Facet A flat surface delimited by geometric edges (straight lines orcurves), usually a triangle or a quadrilateral. Also calledpolygon.

Field of view The region of space that the eye can perceive when lookingat a target point.

Filter Controls the influence of the color of light on the color of itsreflection (defined by the specularity)

Format Structure of the data used to save a file on the hard drive.There are numerous types of file formats.

483 Amapi ProT M

Dynamic Geometry This allows you to edit a surface not from the surfacewireframe but from the construction curves, which thenbecome the control curves of the surface. The surface isautomatically regenerated when you edit the curves (like theNURBS control polygons). Each object of the scene retainsits building steps. You can, thanks to Dynamic Geometry,edit the construction curve of every step of construction.Amapi Pro will then rebuild the resulting shapesautomatically (See “Dynamic Geometry (DG)” onpage 109)

Falloff Defines the way reflection is diffused along a surface.

Grid Intersection of lines evenly spaced out in two or threedimensions.

Grid structure(Quad mesh)

An object with a grid-structure (Quad mesh), built fromdeformed mesh. This grid can be open or closed. Thedifferent ways of closure can be:• The curves are closed in U or in V (Cylinder).• The curves are closed in U and in V (Torus).

Hidden facets Facets of a model that are hidden by other objects in thecurrent viewpoint.

Hidden lines Edges or lines of a model that are hidden by other objects inthe current viewpoint.

Incident light The way the light strikes an object. The resulting color ofthe object depends on the incident light and the intrinsicobject color

Interface Communication facility between the computer and itsperipherals or between the user and the software.

Interpolation Mathematical technique used to define a curve, in that thecurve must pass through all its control points (unlikely in theapproximation technique)

Layer A layer is a system used to classify objects. The SceneManager is the tool used to manage this system. Objects canbe assigned to layers.

Reference Manual484

Lighting Lighting is the propagation of rays of light coming from anatural or artificial light source

Luminance Reflected or emissive light intensity of a surface in an givendirection

Mapping (image) The mapping of an image (texture map) on a surface(describing a volume or not). There are different types ofmapping depending on how the image is projected onto theobject, and on the interaction between the projection and thesurface of the object. For example, planar, spherical,cylindrical…

Material A material defines the appearance of a surface. It’s color,specular aspect, transparency coefficient,...

Navigation Techniques for moving and positioning the Viewpoint (See“The Navigation” on page 135).

Non planar facets A facet whose points do not lie on the same plane.